KR20180112753A - A method for deleting Korean input characters on a keypad in which 10 Korean clusters are deleted as a unit of a, ㅑ, ㅓ, ㅕ, ㅗ, ㅛ, ㅜ, ㅠ, ㅡ, - Google Patents

Abstract

Provided is a technique for naturally inputting Korean consonants with less ambiguity by using group characteristics of three types of Korean consonants having a strong correlation in pronunciation and a shape, and elaborating an operation of a deletion button to increase user friendliness and convenience.

Description

A method and apparatus for deleting Korean input characters on a keypad that deletes 10 Korean vowels of a, ㅑ, ㅓ, ㅕ, ㅗ, ㅛ, ㅜ, ㅠ, ㅡ, ㅣ

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION 1. Field of the Invention The present invention relates to an alphabet input device and a method thereof in a keypad, and more particularly, to an alphabet input device and a method thereof in a keypad having a small number of keys such as a telephone key board.

.

With the development of mobile communication, a function of transmitting and receiving digital information such as characters has been added to a portable terminal for voice call. Therefore, in the beginning, the keypad of the portable terminal for inputting the telephone number also includes means for inputting characters. However, since the size of the keypad used as the input means of the portable terminal becomes smaller, the number of buttons included in the keypad has a limit. On the other hand, the alphabet of each language greatly exceeds the number of 12 keys included in the keypad. Accordingly, in order to input one alphabet by using the telephone keypad, one or more of the buttons on the keypad must be combined to express the alphabet.

.

We proposed a technique to input Korean consonants with natural and very low ambiguity by using group characteristics of Korean flat, lattice, and light consonants with strongly related phonetics and morphology.

In addition, we have elaborated the operation of delete button, and proposed a method to improve user friendliness and convenience.

Figure 1-1. An example of configuring a reference keypad using English standard keypad
Figures 1-2. When assigning about 3 alphabets to each button, the central alphabet is set as the representative alphabet, and the left and right alphabets are arranged in the succeeding alphabet as follow-up keypads
1-3. An example of configuring the reference keypad when assigning 3 to 4 alphabets to each button
2-1. An example of configuring a subsequent keypad in Japanese (1)
2-2. An example of a subsequent keypad in Japanese (2)
2-3. Graph of 2D recycling control processing method
2-4. Graph of two-dimensional cross control processing method
3-1. An example of a subsequent keypad (in Arabic)
3-2. An example of a subsequent keypad configuration (Arabic, using two control buttons)
3-3. When assigning about 3 alphabets to each button, the central alphabet is set as the representative alphabet, and the left and right alphabets are arranged in the succeeding alphabet as follow-up keypads
4-1. Example of assigning basic consonants and basic vowels to each button in pairs 1 (Korean)
4-2. An example of assigning basic consonants and basic vowels to each button in pairs 2 (Korean)
4-3. An example of assigning basic consonants and basic vowels to each button in pairs. 3 (Korean)
4-4. Flowchart of inputting basic consonant and basic vowel by repetition selection method (an example of Korean)
Fig. 4-5. Example of application of 3 vowel elements
4-6. Figure 4-5 shows a case of expressing in terms of application of repetition selection method using four vowel elements
4-7. Example of assigning 4 vowel elements to 4 buttons
4-8. Figures 4-7 show examples of expressions from the viewpoint of application of repetitive selection method.
4-9. The variant display example of Fig. 4-5
4-10. Contemporary Korean collection using "ㅡ", "a", "ㅣ"
4-11. 6,
4-12. The variant display case (" + " type)
4-13. The variant display example (" -a " type)
4-14. 4-10 ("H" type)
4-15. In Figures 4-10, the variant display case (" type "
4-16. 3 * 4 Example of transforming the 4-line button on the keypad into one line (1)
4-17. 3 * 4 Example of transforming the 4-line button on the keypad into one line (2)
4-18. A case using modern Korean vowel "ㅡ", "a", "ㅓ", "ㅣ"
4-19. In Figure 4-12,
4-20. A case of combining vowels using modern Korean vowel "ㅡ", "a", "ㅣ" (graph)
4-21. A case of combining vowels using modern Korean vowel "ㅡ", "a", "ㅣ" (Graph 2)
4-22. Flow chart of keypad Korean input processing
4-23. 2 Flowchart of processing Korean input processing on a verbal keyboard
4-24. Flow chart of Korean key input process (when applying the method of repeated selection method to consonant input)
4-25. Flow chart of keypad Korean input processing (when applying specific button combination to consonant input)
4-26. Flowchart of Keypad Korean Input Processing (General)
4-27. Flow chart of keypad Korean input processing (added when applying letter completion button)
5-1. Input of Kanji using Pinyin dictionary and Pinyin
5-2. An example of text entry in English using a simple sentence-based simple code
5-3. In the parallel input method, the input value is treated as promised simple code (1)
5-4. In the parallel input method, the input value is treated as promised simple code (2)
5-5. Concurrent application method using client and server
5-6. Grouping examples of words (words or phrases) stored in the index
6-1. A case where the server (intermediate server) interprets the simple code received from the client, and the information obtained by interpreting the simple code is transmitted to the third server that needs the information
7-1. An example of a follow-up keypad for inputting various symbols by a control processing method (an English keypad)
7-2. An example of a subsequent keypad for inputting various symbols by control processing method (Korean keypad)
8-1. 3 * 4 Example of existing mobile phone with various function buttons on the numeric keypad
8-2. 3 * 4 Case with various function buttons placed below the numeric keypad 1
8-3. 3 * 4 Case with various function buttons placed below the numeric keypad 2
8-4. 3 * 4 Numerous function buttons placed on the left / right of the numeric keypad
8-5. Example of using various function buttons as control buttons 1
8-6. Example 2 using various function buttons as control buttons
8-7. Example of using various function buttons as control buttons 3
8-8. Example of using various function buttons as control buttons 4
9-1. When the up, down, left, and right movement buttons are used as the acceleration and deceleration buttons, the function corresponding to each button is iconified and displayed on the liquid crystal
9-2. A case where the symbol associated with each number button is iconified and displayed on the LCD
10-1 to 10-4. A Case of the Keypad Separator for the Roman Alphabet
10-5. Example of processing the input value into the promised simple code in the short input method example and the concurrent input method on the keyboard separation keypad
10-6. A Case of Keypad Separator in Roman Alphabet (5)
10-7. (1) Flowchart of applying the language restriction input method on the keyboard separation keypad (1)
10-8. (2) Flow chart of applying the language restriction input method on the bar separation keypad
10-9. Flow of applying language restriction input method on incompatible bar separation keypad
10-10. (In a system with all words) Example of parallel input method application (1)
10-11. (In a system with all words)
10-12. (In a system with all words) (1)
10-13. (In a system with all words) Language restriction parallel input method application flow chart (2)
10-14. Full input method (and concurrent input method) in the system using full code
10-15. A parallel input method in a system with an index of a word (or word) consisting only of a representative alphabet (1)
10-16. An example of parallel input method in a system with index (vocabulary or phrase) consisting only of representative alphabet (2)
10-17. Examples of processing the input of a tinning sound as a simple code (short input value)
11-1. If the input value is interpreted on the client side,
11-2. System configuration diagrams when input values are interpreted on the server side
11-3 to 11-10. An example of handling simple code (in a parallel input method)
11-11. Examples of simple code (ie, short code or short input value) types
12-1. Examples of inputting functions by control processing method
12-2. Example of displaying the controls assigned to each button on the LCD screen
13-1 to 13-4. Example of processing a part of the input value as a full code and another part as a simple code
14-1 to 14-2. Examples of control processing using long press
14-3. Example using long press and short press
14-4. Short press and long press

The following is a summary of the invention presented by the applicants (Application Nos. 10-2000-0031879 and PCT / KR00 / 00601).

First, according to the " whole part selection method ", alphabets are arranged on the grids by configuring a predetermined number of grids corresponding to the arrangement of all buttons in the keypad on each button on the keypad, Quot; alphabet ") disposed on the first button and a second button on the keypad corresponding to the arrangement position of the alphabet in the grids of the first button, thereby inputting a desired alphabet. For example, in Figure 1-1, enter A = [1] + [2].

Using a part of the grating including the reference grating in which the first button and the second button are the same among the gratings of the button, using a part of the grating, and the convenience of the combination of the first button and the second button is high The first use of the ordering grid was the core of the partial selection method. The key to this partial selection method is the reference grid, and the keypad, which makes use of the concept of the reference grid, is called the "reference keypad".

Next, the criterion repetition selection method is a method in which the number of times the button is pressed in the order from the alphabet of the reference grid position to the reference grid in the reference keypad configured to apply the partial selection method To select the alphabet according to the method. The criterion repetition selection method is to apply the repetition selection method on the reference keypad. To simplify the repetition selection method of the reference keypad is called a "simple keypad". For convenience, the repetition selection method is applied on a simple keypad Called the simple iterative selection method.

There was also a "control processing method", which included "subscript control processing" and "follow-up control processing". The subscript control processing method is a method of inputting a transformation alphabet by combining a subscript control and a basic alphabet when a transformation alphabet composed of a subscript and a basic alphabet is input. In the subsequent control processing method, a group of alphabets assigned to a button is set as a relationship between a representative alphabet and a subsequent alphabet, and when a subsequent alphabet is input, a representative alphabet and an accessory rank attached to the representative alphabet are combined to input a subsequent alphabet To do so. For example, in Fig. 4-1, " b = a + [*] "

Subscript control processing and subsequent alphabet control processing are essentially similar, with subsequent control processing being more general. In the case of the subscript control processing, it can be seen that the modified alphabet is attached to the basic alphabet in a certain order in a specific alphabet group. In the case of unicellular control processing, since the transformed alphabet can be decomposed into subscripts and basic alphabets, the alphabet group has strong associations in its shape, and subsequent controls have strong associations in their order or pronunciation .

The advantage of applying the control processing method is that the subsequent alphabet (or modified alphabet) is not displayed on the keypad through association of the basic alphabet with the subsequent alphabet (or modified alphabet), thereby simplifying the layout of the keypad , It was possible to input the alphabet without ambiguity through control processing. Simplified keypad was called "subsequent keypad." Keypad simplified by omitting variant alphabet was called "simplified keypad" and both were called "simplified keypad". The keypad showing all the subsequent alphabets (or variant alphabets) was called the "entire display keypad" in contrast to the simplified keypad.

The user can input the subsequent alphabet (or modified alphabet) through the control processing method in the entire display keypad, and conversely, even in the simplified keypad, the user who memorizes the layout of the entire display keypad can use the input method on the entire display keypad Respectively. This simplified keypad can be extended to configure the entire display keypad, and compatibility with the entire display keypad allows the user to enter the subsequent alphabet through the control process according to the user's convenience.

One of the effects of applying the control processing method is that, besides the effect of eliminating the ambiguity, as shown in the prior application, the relation between the representative alphabet and the succeeding alphabet is not displayed on the keypad, So that the keypad can be simplified. This is called "concealed control processing method" for convenience. However, as mentioned in the earlier application, the subsequent alphabet can also be input through the control processing method in the entire display keypad in which the subsequent alphabet (or modified alphabet) is displayed on the keypad. This is called "non-concealed control processing method" for convenience.

Since it is indispensable to explain a specific example on the basis of the characteristics of the present invention, the details will be described by way of examples.

First, the contents of the earlier application for each language are supplemented as follows. In the following, it is clear that the contents of one language that can be applied to other languages can be applied to other languages even if they are not specifically mentioned in other languages.

1. Common Supplement

1.1 Application area of the keypad in the prior art and the present invention

It is apparent that the prior art and the keypad of the present invention can be applied to all fields such as a numeric keypad of a mobile terminal or a standard keyboard, or a keypad or a door lock which is configured in software on a screen. Also, it is obvious that the numeric keypad of the standard keyboard differs in arrangement of the keypad and the numeric buttons according to the present invention, and the arrangement of the keypad buttons in the present invention can be applied to the keypad provided in the keyboard . For example, in the prior art and in the present invention, the alphabet placed on the [1] button is arranged on the [1] button of the numeric keypad provided on the keyboard, and arranged in the same manner as described below to utilize the alphabet input, It can be used for memorization.

1.2 Setting of the batting delay time and the releasing delay time

In a language in which consonants and vowels appear alternately such as Korean and Hindi, a pair of a representative consonant and a representative vowel is assigned to each button, and a consonant is selected by selecting one vowel as two vowels, For example, if an algorithm is first implemented to recognize two identical buttons input within an interval of 0.1 second as a vowel, it can be implemented efficiently while reducing the feeling of rejection to the user. This delay time should be determined in consideration of the time interval that is universally pressed for a certain time when the same button is continuously pressed. This delay time is referred to as " swing delay time " for convenience. In addition, it is possible to realize two consonant sounds of the same button input at intervals of a predetermined delay time (for example, 1 second). This delay time is referred to as " off-delay time " for convenience. This can also be applied when the same button is pressed more than three times.

For example, in FIG. 4-1 or FIG. 4-2, if [1] + [1] is input with a delay time of 0.08 seconds, it is primarily recognized as a vowel " ("ㄱ", "ㄱ") as the first consonant. If a time delay of 0.5 seconds is entered, it is possible to determine whether one vowel or two consonants are input through the structure of the vowels and vowels in the language. In addition, even if the delay time is 0.08 seconds or 1.1 seconds, it is possible to finally determine whether one vowel or two consonants are input through the appearance structure of consonants and vowels in the language.

In the past, if only one button is set within a predetermined time interval (for example, one second) and two consecutive buttons are continuously input, the button is delayed for longer than the predetermined time, . The difference is the difference between the reference time delay value (eg 0.1 second), which is judged to be 2 consecutive times, and the time delay value (eg 1 second), which is judged to be 1 second in each case.

In general, it can be said that the iterative selection method is superior in terms of the convenience of input among the partial selection method and the iterative selection method. This means that ambiguity can be largely avoided by using the structure of a specific language in which consonants and vowels appear alternately while utilizing the merits of the iterative selection method (simplicity and convenience of input rules) And the delay time of the network are set to be different from each other, and the user can specify the delay time, thereby simplifying the implementation of the algorithm.

1.3 How to handle chain control

The subscript control processing method in the prior art is essentially the same as the subsequent control processing method, and the subsequent control processing method is a more general method. In other words, in the Korean example of the earlier application, the relationship between a, b, and 설명 is described as a relation between the representative alphabet and the modified alphabet, and is described as b = a + , ㅋ (2nd), ㄲ (3rd) and so on.

In the case of Japanese of FIG. 2-1, an input example by a subsequent control processing method is shown again as follows. (1) Select one (1) button to select a (1) button, (2), (3), (4) [1]), and 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th controls are placed on a random control button (eg [*]) and repeatedly selected according to the number of times the button is pressed to select the next alphabet Can be input. For the sake of simplicity, it is assumed that the control is selected in brackets. For example, when the input is applied after control, a = [1], a = a + {2nd} = [1] + [ = {1} + [5] = [1] + [4]} [1] + [*] + [*] *] + [*] + [*] + [*].

Here, the relationship between the representative alphabet and the succeeding alphabet, such as (the alphabet), (2nd), (3rd), (4th) (Eg, [*]) to be selected by pressing the "Next" or "Next" control, but not the selection by way of the second alphabet And "Next Control" (ie i = a + {next} = a + [*]), the third alphabet followed by the next alphabet (second alphabet followed by the next alphabet) It can be entered as a combination of the 2nd consecutive alphabet and "Next control" by considering it as a new representative alphabet (second representative alphabet). That is, u = i + {next} = [1] + [*] + [*]. Likewise, when the fourth letter is input, the preceding alphabet (the third letter following the alphabet) is regarded as the new representative alphabet for the fourth letter (the third letter) [1] + [*] + [*] + [*]. The same is true for the fifth consecutive alphabet.

The result is that a combination of the representative alphabet and the affiliate ranking control is input while the control of the control button is arranged with the ranking control (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, ...) to be. If we can select the primary representative alphabet A without morphology, it is easy to see that it can be input without ambiguity in the second succeeding alphabet, and so on with the rest of the subsequent alphabet. In other words, it is possible to input it without ambiguity, and it is combined with "the next control", so that the result is not ambiguous and the subsequent alphabet You can enter an index.

In this association of the representative alphabet with the succeeding alphabet, it is assumed that the control button does not have an affixed rank control and that there is only one "next" control, and the following alphabet is regarded as the new representative alphabet when the subsequent alphabet is input, "The combination of control inputs is called" chain type follow-up control processing method "for the sake of convenience. Although the user does not need to display the accessory rank control on the next control button in the selected circle, the user should be aware that the specific button is a subsequent control button. However, the advantage of this chain type follow- Even if displayed on the button, the display can be simplified. In the present invention, the results of "subsequent control processing method" and "chain type follow-up control processing method" described in the prior application are the same and are used in combination.

1.4 How to Handle Skip Controls

In the subscript control processing method, it is shown that when inputting the modified alphabet ё composed of ".. + e", it is possible to input a combination of .. and e respectively. (Eg, e (basic alphabet), ^{/ or} e (for example, e (the basic alphabet), ^{or the} basic alphabet, e (2nd), ^{^} e (3rd), ...). In addition, the control buttons in which the controls that can be meaningful only when combined with the alphabets (that is, specific numeric buttons) are able to input a modified alphabet or a subsequent alphabet without ambiguity by repeated use.

In the case of Roman characters from French 11 is deformed alphabet used in <sup>(/ e, ^ e, `</sup> e, ё,` a, ^ a, ^ i, `u, ^ u, c, ^ o), using the modified alphabet There are five kinds of set points (/, ^, `, .., s). If the selection order of subscript control is /, ^, `, .., s, you must enter <sup>^</sup> a = a + [*] + [*]. However, if you can not be combined in the French alphabet A contains a subscript two kinds of "` "and" ^ "only the subscript" / "are unable to catch up, so skip it've combined the available subscript" ^ "is selected, ^{^} a = a + [*]. This is called "skip control processing method" for convenience. That is, it is the same as entering the succeeding alphabet (or modified alphabet) by the control processing method with the following order of the following alphabet such as a (basic alphabet), `a (2nd), ^{^} a (3rd)

Likewise, in Japanese, a line in which a long sound exists is only the alphabet of the line or line and the line of the line, and the line in which the whisper is present is only the alphabet of the line, line, line, It exists only in the alphabet of the line. In the end, there are two variants of the alphabet, the long and the whitish, and there are two variants of the alphabet, the whisper and the consonant. Therefore, it is possible to press the subscript control button once when inputting the transformation alphabet of the remaining alphabet except for the six alphabets in which there are two modified alphabets. For example, you can use the control button with the [*] button, and then apply the input after the control, such as a = a + [*], or = or + [*]. In the case of six alphabets with two variants, the control can be selected in order of frequency of use of the variant alphabet. For example, you can use the control button as the [*] button, and when you apply the control after inputting the control, *], Po = + [*] + [*]. This means that in the control selection, controls that can not be combined with the base alphabet do not take effect. For example, if you use [=] or [*], you can treat [*] as not selecting a long sound control but choosing a long sound control because the basic alphabet combined with the control has no long sound , And skip control is selected.

The advantage of strictly choosing a control selection is that it allows input of unused alpabet. For example, there is no alphabet with the suffix ".." in the French alphabet b, but it is possible to input these alphabets, and there is no alphabet with a dot on the Japanese alphabet, This is possible.

Even if the control is selected as an iterative selection method, it is possible to input the representative alphabet displayed on the alphabet without ambiguity at the time of inputting through the control processing (for example, if there is only one representative alphabet displayed on the keyboard, ), The remaining subsequent alphabets can be input without ambiguity. This is because the ambiguity is removed through the control process, because the control can not represent a specific alphabet by itself and must be combined with another alphabet.

1.5 Input by control processing method of numbers and English alphabet

As previously presented in the previous section, it was explained that the native language alphabet could be arranged in the order of "close to the reference grid", and then the numbers and the English alphabet could be arranged. In applying the basic iteration selection method, And that the national language alphabet and number can be selected. Likewise, in applying the subsequent control processing method, not only the native language alphabet belonging to a specific button, but also numbers and English alphabets (in case of non-roman alphabets) can be inputted through a subsequent control processing method.

Numbers or English alphabets may be followed by the following alphabetic characters following the native language. For the sake of convenience, for example, let us take the case of Japanese as follows: a (representative alphabet), (2nd), 3rd (3rd), 4th, 5th, 1 (6th), 7th, (9th). Also, if you have a button available for controlling numbers or English alphabets, you can use the control buttons for a (alphabet), 2nd, 3rd, 4th, (3rd alphabet), 1 (2nd alphabet), 3rd alphabet (3rd alphabet), etc. (for example, q (4th), and z (5th). For example, 1 = a + [#] = [1] + [#],. [#] + [#] = [1] + [#] + [#], q = a + + [#]. If the control buttons are available, you can have separate control buttons for numeric entry and control letters for the English alphabet.

This can be applied to other languages and can be applied to input of various symbols described later.

1.6 Grouping according to pronunciation of the English alphabet

In constructing the keypad of each language in the prior art, alphabets are grouped into similar pronunciation groups in consideration of application of the control processing method and use for memorization, and assigned to each number button. In the case of English, a method of grouping three or four alphabets according to the current dictionary order and assigning each group to each number button is widely used, but it is also possible to group them by assigning the similarity of pronunciation to each number button . The following are some examples of grouping English consonants into nine groups according to pronunciation similarity.

B P / C S X / D T / F V H / G K Q / J Z / L R / M N / W Y

B P V / C S X / D T / F H / G K Q / J Z / L R / M W / N Y

The following is an example of grouping English consonants into 8 groups.

B F P V / C G K Q / S X / D T / J Z / L R / M W H / N Y

B F P V / C G K Q / S X / D T / J Z / L R / M N / W Y H

In addition to the above examples, many variations are possible. Five vowels can be grouped into groups of two. This can be convenient when applying a simple input method using a simple code described later. In the case of the non-English language language, in assigning the grouped English alphabets to each button, it is possible to assign them in consideration of the similarity with the native language pronunciation group. For example, in the case of Korean, G, K, and Q groups are assigned to buttons assigned a letter "a" with similar pronunciation. In Japanese, G, K, and Q groups are assigned to the buttons assigned to the alphabet "kana" with similar pronunciation. Therefore, even in the grouping of the English alphabet, grouping can be performed considering the native language alphabet grouping of each language.

2. Supplementary information for each language

* The contents of the earlier application for each language are as follows. It is obvious that any of the contents described in the supplement for each language can be applied to other languages even if the contents described in one language can be applied to other languages without specifically pointing them.

2.1 English

It is possible to input alphabets following control processing in the entire display keypad in the prior art, and in the case of English, alphabets other than the representative alphabets can be displayed on the keyboard and input through control processing. In English, the subsequent controls (2nd, 3rd) can be placed on the same control button (for example, the [#] button) [#] button). In the case of English, when ABC is arranged in one button, when A is a representative alphabet, B and C are input through subsequent control processing respectively, and when B is a representative alphabet, A and C correspond to each subsequent control Is input through processing. As mentioned in the earlier application, the ordering of the substitute alphabet and the following alphabet may be determined in consideration of the frequency of use and the like.

For example, in the group A, B, and C, when A is a representative alphabet and the 2nd and 3rd controls are placed on the [*] button and the input is applied after the control, B = A + {2nd} = [2] , C = A + {3rd} = [2] + [*] + [*]. A = B + {2nd} = [2] + [*], C = [2] + [*] if you put the 2nd and 3rd controls in the [*] = B + {3rd} = [2] + [#]. Fig. 1-2 is an example in which the center alphabet of the alphabet of each group is centered on the representative alphabet and the succeeding alphabet is arranged on the left and the right, respectively, in order to facilitate the discrimination of the alphabet. D = E + {2nd} = [3] + [*].

Herein, it is referred to as &quot; Control Processing Method Except Representative Chanracter (CPMERC) &quot; for inputting only the representative alphabet by one button of the representative alphabet and inputting the remaining alphabet by the control processing method.

If four alphabets P, Q, R and S are assigned to the button [7] and four letters W, X, Y and Z are assigned to the button [9], as indicated in the Korean example of the prior application , One alphabet among the four alphabets may be arranged in a grid constituting the upper and lower adjacent combinations, and the partial selection method may be applied. See Figures 1-3.

2.2 Japanese

In the case of Japanese in the earlier application, alphabetical groups are grouped based on the 50-degree alphabet, and the remaining alphabets (a, b, c, ...) . In applying the subsequent ranking of the subsequent alphabet presented in the earlier application, it is possible to simply apply the 50-note chart as shown in the following table, which is very similar to Method 3 of the earlier application. This can give the user an affinity with the simplicity of the subsidiary rank. May be deemed to be attached to any representative alphabet, as in the earlier application. Also, in an empty space of a row or a row, it may be regarded that a silver letter is attached to a letter having a 50-degree alphabet (for example, yi, ei) attached thereto.

Method 3 of the prior application Simple way to use 50 notes Reference grid 2 ^nd 3rd 4th 5th Reference grid 2 ^nd 3rd 4th 5th Oh い To Yes You Oh い To Yes You Or I The け This Or I The け This The And The Se It The And The Se It た Chi One To And た Chi One To And Of To No You Of Of To No You Of Is H ふ To H Is H ふ To H M Only Mum Me Also M Only Mum Me Also And Yu Yo And Yu Yo ら り る The Ro ら り る The Ro I To I I To

In the case of Japanese, the alphabet of the first stage, which is considered to be the most representative for convenience, is defined as the representative alphabet. In this case, the alphabet of an arbitrary stage may be replaced with a substitute alphabet, . Also, in assigning the alphabet of each line to each button, the line of the button on the keypad is used as reference ([1], [2], [3], [4],. ), Or the heat can be assigned to the criterion ([3], [6], [9], [2], [5], ...). Likewise, a row can be arbitrarily assigned without being allocated on the basis of a row or a column.

Also, in the Japanese example of the earlier application, if you put "N" in the reference grid position of the [0] button, and you have 2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th controls on the [*] Has been assigned to an arbitrary number of buttons other than the [0] button in order to utilize it as a control button for inputting long / twitching / returning sounds. However, in this case, you can place a "n" at the reference grid position of the [0] button, arrange the long / twitch / fade control in the order close to the reference grid, and apply the repeat selection method to the control selection. Because "n" does not appear in succession in one word. See Figure 2-1. Let's select the alphabet that does not appear consecutively like this one button with the corresponding alphabet placed on it, and select 2, 3, ... Allowing the selection of other controls on the same language can be applied to all other languages. These characteristics are also utilized in the method of using the vowel elements of the Korean language described later.

2.3 Arabic

There are 28 consonants in Arabic. Arabic consonants having the meaning of numbers in the prior art are grouped as follows and allocated on the keypad buttons and the alphabet having the meaning of the smallest number is assigned to the position of the reference lattice as the representative alphabet of each group And arranging the remaining alphabets on the keypad from an alphabet having a small number meaning to an order close to the reference lattice (described in the earlier section). In addition, a method of inputting an alphabet by control processing in Japanese, Roman alphabet, Korean, Indic, Arabic, In the case of Arabic, we have proposed a method for treating subscript control by treating a vowel as a subscript.

In this paper, we propose a method for controlling consonants in Arabic (subsequent control processing). The following is an example of grouping consonants of Arabic in the earlier application and assigning them to each button.

[1] The alphabet having the meaning of 1, 10, and 100 assigned to the button is displayed on the keypad as the representative alphabet, and the remaining alphabet having the meaning of 10, 100 can be processed subsequently have. The control button can be any button as in the prior art. If you use the next control button [*] button and 2nd and 3rd control are arranged, the average input number of consonant input is 2. Since only one alphabet is placed per button, it is not necessary to select the partial selection method when selecting the alphabet displayed on the button. Since the arrangement of the alphabet is conceptual, it is not necessary to place the alphabet on the keypad as described below.

You can separate the subsequent controls with other buttons, as in the case of Japanese in the earlier application. For example, if the 3rd control is distributed to the [#] button, the average input number is about 1.7 ((1 + 2 + 2) / 3), and 28 consonants can be input without ambiguity do.

In this application, an alphabet having the meaning of the number is used as the representative alphabet of each group regardless of the frequency of use of the alphabet of each unit, and an alphabet having a small number of meanings can be selected first even in the alphabet of the remaining units see. The control can be pre-input or post-input.

= [*] +

가 되고,

= [*] + [*] +

가 된다. 나머지 알파벳에 대해서도 동일하다. 이 경우 [#]버튼을 모음컨트롤처리를 위해 사용할 수도 있다. If all the subsequent controls are placed on the [*] button, one unit of alphabet is used as the representative alphabet, and 10 units of alphabet is selected,

= [*] +

Lt; / RTI &

= [*] + [*] +

. The same is true for the remaining alphabets. In this case, the [#] button can also be used for vowel control processing.

= [0] 이 된다. 1000의 의미를 가지는 알파벳을 1그룹알파벳으로 처리할 수도 있다. 이 경우

= [*]+[*]+[*]+

가 될 것이다. 혹은 1000의 의미를 가지 는 알파벳이 70의 의미를 가지는 알파벳(

)에 윗점이 붙은 형태이므로, 윗점컨 트롤을 각종 모음컨트롤에 앞서 선택되도록 하여 컨트롤처리하는 것도 가능하다. 즉 윗점컨트롤 선입력시

= [윗점컨트롤] +

로 입력할 수 있는 것이다. 윗점이 붙어 이루어진 다른 알파벳에도 이러한 윗점컨트롤처리를 다른 입력방법과 병행하여 허용할 수 있다. 이 경우 [0] 버튼을 다른 용도의 컨트롤버튼(예를 들 어 모음컨트롤버튼)으로 활용하는 것이 용이하게 된다. If only one alphabet with the meaning of 1000 is placed on the [0] button,

= [0]. An alphabet having a meaning of 1000 may be treated as a group alphabet. in this case

= [*] + [*] + [*] +

. Or an alphabet with the meaning of 1000 is 70

), It is possible to perform the control processing by selecting the upper arc troll before the various vowel controls. In other words,

= [Point control] +

As shown in FIG. Other alphabets with an upper dot may allow this upper-point control processing in parallel with other input methods. In this case, it is easy to use the [0] button as a control button for other purposes (for example, a vowel control button).

= [#] +

가 된다. 이 경우도 선출 원의 일본어의 경우와 같이 입력시, = [*] + [*] +

을 병행하여 허용 할 수 있다. 1000의 의미를 가지는 알파벳을 1그룹알파벳에 속하게 할 경우, 경 우

= [*]+[*]+[*]+

혹은

= [#]+[#]+

가 된다. 즉 [*] 버튼에 2nd, 3rd, 4th 컨트롤이 배치되어 있는 것으로 그리고 [#] 버튼에 3rd, 4th 컨트 롤이 배치되어 있는 것으로 생각하면 된다. 아랍인들이 우에서 좌로 가로쓰기를 하는 점을 고려하여, 즉 [#] 버튼에 2nd, 3rd, 4th 컨트롤을 배정하고, [*] 버튼 에 3rd, 4th 컨트롤을 배치하는 것도 가능하다. If the control is separated and the 3rd control (here, a 100-unit control) is used with the [#] button, the alphabet

= [#] +

. In this case, as in the Japanese case of the election source, = [*] + [*] +

Can be allowed in parallel. When an alphabet having the meaning of 1000 belongs to one group alphabet,

= [*] + [*] + [*] +

or

= [#] + [#] +

. In other words, it can be considered that 2nd, 3rd, and 4th controls are placed on the [*] button and 3rd and 4th controls are placed on the [#] button. It is also possible to assign 2nd, 3rd and 4th controls to the [#] button and 3rd and 4th controls to the [*] button, taking into account the fact that Arabs transpose from right to left.

This means that in Arabic, it is possible to input the consonants mainly used on the average of about 1.7 tatami (without ambiguity), and Arabs know the meaning of the numbers held by the native language alphabet, There is a great advantage in that the alphabet can be input without displaying the unit alphabet (i.e., the representative alphabet). In other words, when applying the method of this application through the keypad with only numbers, it is possible to determine which alphabet is the representative alphabet, which control alphabet is the control button for which unit of alphabet, , You can enter most of the alphabets (Arabic consonants) that you need in real life if you know only the rules such as the order of selection of each subsequent control and how to input control buttons.

As indicated in the earlier application, vowels can also be controlled. If both [#] and [*] are used for consonant control processing, the alphabet with a meaning of 1000, as in the Japanese original of the earlier application, (0) button as a control button for vowel processing, and the subscript type vowel (vowel control, subscript control) can be selected by repeating selection method. The vowel control (subscripted vowel) is selected according to the number of times the button is pressed in the order of frequency of use. If only one [*] is used as a consecutive control button for consonants, you can use [#] as a vowel control button, or use both [#] and [0].

In the examples of FIGS. 3-1 and 3-2, alphabets (1 unit alphabet) having the meaning of 1 to 9 are used as the representative alphabet of each group, but alphabets having the highest frequency of use in each group may be represented by the representative alphabet . In order to reduce confusion, the alphabet of any unit of 1 unit alphabet (alphabet with 1-9 meaning), 10 unit alphabet (alphabet with 10 ~ 90 meaning), 100 unit alphabet (alphabet with 100 ~ 900 meaning) As a representative alphabet. FIG. 3-3 shows an example in which 10 alphabetic characters are placed in the center of each group as a representative alphabet, and the remaining alphabet (100 unit alphabet, 1 unit alphabet) assigned to the left and right is inputted by control processing method .

Likewise, alphabets selected by subsequent controls can also be alphabets of each unit according to their frequency of use. For example, if the 100-unit alphabet is the most frequently used, and is used as the representative alphabet, and then the one-unit alphabet is used frequently, the 2nd control (in this case, one unit control) So that the 10-unit alphabet can be entered in combination with the 3rd control (ie, the 10-unit control) and the representative alphabet.

Since it is possible to input the succeeding alphabet through the control processing method in the entire display keypad in the prior art, similarly, consonants can also be inputted by the subsequent control processing method on the keypad of the prior art and the vowel can be input by the subscript control processing method Do. 3 * 4 Within the keypad, it is possible to distribute control buttons for consonant input to the [*] and [#] buttons when the subscript control buttons for vowels are set to [0].

2.4 Korean

2.4.1 Application of Various Controls

Figs. 4-1 to 4-3 show how to assign basic consonants and basic vowels in pairs to each button, and input the basic consonants and basic vowels displayed on the keypad by the repetition selection method. In Fig. 4-1, the humming, verse, and extended vowels are input by the control processing method. In Fig. 4-2, only the humming and verb sounds are inputted by the control processing method. Fig. 4-3 shows an example of inputting the sound, sound, basic vowel, and extended vowel by the control processing method.

2.4.2 Program Implementation

Figures 4-4 are merely an example of a flow chart for implementation and more efficient programming is possible. For example, in Figure 4-4, a slightly more efficient implementation is possible by checking for consonants that can be made double-spaced if the consonant portion of the backing comes in.

An example of Korean presented in the prior application can be applied to other languages having similar characteristics (a structure in which consonants and vowels appear alternately). For other languages, it is necessary to reflect the characteristics of the emergence of other languages.

For example, if we want to construct a Hindi input system using a pair of basic consonants and basic vowels, it can be implemented similar to Korean, reflecting the characteristics of Hindi. In the case of Hindi, the appearance of consonants and vowels The rules are simple and can be implemented more easily.

2.5 Hindi

By assigning the Hindi consonants to 9 groups and assigning them to the [1] - [9] buttons in the applicant's initial application, the vowel assigned to the [0] button is selected with the [0] button 1. For consistency, Group, and the representative consonants are always selected as one and ten vowels as two. The vowel ___ (ri), which is not placed on the keypad and is not normally used, can be handled by the control processing method. In grouping the consonants into 10 groups, it is possible to group them by taking into account the similarity of pronunciation as presented in the prior application. The following is an example of grouping into 10 groups.

And the first vowel of Hindi ___ (a) can be omitted between consonants and consonants. In other words, consonants come out continuously. In this case, it is very easy to display "consonant + consonant" even if "consonant + ___ (a) + consonant" is input. Of course, it is possible to directly input the consonant + consonant, but in this case, the possibility that the same consonant is consecutively selected and two consonants can be recognized as one vowel is increased. Therefore, it can accept both quantities (automatic elimination of vowel ___ (a) or the user's omission).

2.6 Myanmarese

There are 33 consonants in Myanmar. It can be grouped into nine or ten groups as in the case of Hindi, a representative alphabet can be defined, and the remaining consonants can be input by the following control processing method.

3. How to handle multidimensional intersection control

Fig. 2-2 shows an example in which alphabetical letters of "a" are assigned to each button in alphabetical order in accordance with the above table. In the example of the earlier application, 4nd and 5rd controls could be assigned to the control buttons assigned 2nd and 3rd controls. However, in this example, only the 2nd and 3rd controls are assigned to minimize the number of input strokes and maximize the control buttons. see.

The method of inputting the subsequent alphabet in Fig. 2-2 is as shown in the prior application. For example, when you apply the input after control, it becomes as follows. Next, we show how to input the long, long, and final letters of each alpha bet. In Figure 2-2, the buttons available as control buttons ([*] button, [#] button) are all used as follow-up control buttons. Therefore, there is no control button for the transformation alphabet. However, if the target alphabet's basic alphabet is a subsequent alphabet, the succeeding control button that has not been used as a subsequent control button after the subsequent alphabet input is used as the modified alphabet control button (this is referred to as the "opposite control button" .

For example, if you want to use the same control button as the control button on the opposite side of the keyboard, you can press the [+] or [+] do. In this case, it is regarded that the opposite control button which is not used as a follow-up control button is used as a deformed alphabet control button in order to input the control processing method by considering it as a basic alphabetic variant. Here, as in the example, you can also apply the skip-based control processing method of the prior art. From the viewpoint of the chain control processing method, by pressing the control button on the opposite side one time, the "next control" for inputting the alphabet (for example) .

There are two types of alphabets in the alphabet of the line, namely, a whisper and a counterpoise. In the case of a long sound, you can press the control button on the opposite side once, and in the case of a full tone, press the opposite control twice. + = [+] + [+] + [#], PU = + "opposite control button" = = + + [+] + [+] ] + [#].

Next, if the target alphabetic base alphabet is the representative alphabet, the above method can not be applied as it is. In this case, it is possible to input the target alphabet by putting the modified alphabet of the representative alphabet in the succeeding alphabet in addition to any button of the subsequent control buttons.

For example, if you use the [*] button to enter the variant alphabets of the representative alphabet (long sound, whisper, or half tone), you can use a = a + [*] + [*] + [*]. That is, the variant alphabets of the representative alphabet (long sound, whispering, and consonant sounds) are regarded as 4th successive alphabet, which can be input by using the [*] button. The above is summarized as follows.

In order to expand the use of the control button by utilizing the opposite control button and to use it for more alphanumeric input, it is called "cross control processing method" or "zigzag control processing method" or "multidimensional cross control processing method" I call it. This can also be applied when using more than two buttons as control buttons.

It is obvious that the column of the column except the column of the first column in the above table can also be used for inputting another alphabet or various symbols. In the above example, the opposite control button is applied once. In other words, when you press the [+] button, the opposite control button is repeatedly used as a follow-up control button, such as + = [+] + [+] ([#] Button) is applied to the opposite [*] button. This is referred to as "two-dimensional cross control processing" or "two-step cross control processing" for convenience.

That is, if only one control button is used for one alphabet input, this can be called "one-dimensional control processing". This can be seen as using the control buttons as "one-dimensional". However, in the two-dimensional (cross) control processing method, two different control buttons are used for one alphabet input. In other words, when you input, you are considered as this variant letter, and you entered it as = + "opposite control button" = + + [#] + [#] + [*] Although it was defined as a control button for inputting the first and second letters of the first and second letters of the alphabet, it is as if the opposite control button ([*] button) It can be utilized. It can be seen that the two control buttons are used "two-dimensionally" as opposed to one-dimensionally using one control button for one alphabet entry.

+ = Press [+] + [+] + [#] + [*] for the previous control button. It is possible. In other words, if it is not possible to repeatedly use the control button (eg, the [#] button in the example) used for the last input of the button, the opposite control button for the opposite control button will be used again You can enter a modified alphabet or a subsequent alphabet. This is called "three-dimensional cross control processing" or "three-step cross control processing" for convenience. This means that it is possible to infinitely extend the number of possible inputs of alphabetic or other alphabetic inputs that can be entered in the keypad using the cross control processing method. Moreover, there is a great meaning that the subsequent alphabet or the modified alphabet having a relation with the inputted alphabet can be input naturally by the control processing method.

The above-mentioned contents are as shown in FIG. 2-3 in the form of a graph in the form of a line having two variant alphabets In Figure 2-3, the circles are indicated by circles "...", As you can use to enter other letters or symbols in the empty space in the table above, Alphabets or symbols) can be input by the multidimensional control processing method. In FIG. 2-3, the [*] button and the [#] button are used at right angles to each other.

By assigning the 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th controls to the [*] button at the beginning of the alphabet, which is not the representative alphabet among the 50 alphabetic alphabets, and pressing the [*] button to enter the alphabetic characters such as long notes, In comparison with the method of utilizing, it can be seen that the two-dimensional control processing is also applied to the method of the prior application. That is, it is entered as I = I + {DEVIATION} = I + [*] + [#] because two control buttons are used. The difference was that the control buttons were only used with the control buttons (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th) and only the control alphanumeric keys (long, In the processing, the subsequent control button after the input of the subsequent alphabet is again used as the deformed alphabet control button. In order to distinguish the use of the main control buttons (eg, the subsequent control buttons in the example) from the two-dimensional control processing method of the prior art, the "two-dimensional recycling control processing method" or the "two- ".

The method of the prior application has the advantage of simple and consistent input method, but has a disadvantage in that the number of input strokes is relatively increased. In order to make it easier to see the difference from the present invention, in the prior art, the control buttons are used only as the follow-up control buttons (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th) and the control buttons of the modified alphabets It is shown in Fig. 2-4. In Figs. 2-3 and 2-4, the portion indicated by the shaded color can be extended and applied.

In the application of the cross control processing method above, an example of the post-control input is shown, which is also applicable to the control processing method in the prior art, as well as to the control line input or the post input, You can also type. For example, I = "opposite control button" + I = [#] + [*] + However, in applying the cross control processing method, it may be convenient to input the control later.

This can be applied not only to Japanese but also to all other languages. For example, if you apply the control processing method to exclude the representative alphabet in Arabic and use [*] and [#] to enter subsequent alphabets, use multidimensional intersection control processing methods to enter subscripted vowels . Also, when Thai [*] and [#] buttons are used as control buttons for entering consonants and subsequent vowels respectively, multidimensional cross control processing can be used to enter the sign.

4. Korean input method

4.1. How to use vowel elements in Korean

There was a method of assigning the alphabet to each button and assigning the alphabet to each button in combination with each piece (eg →, ↓, ↙, ↘, ⊃, O, etc.). Also, in Korea, there is a case of separating Korean vowels into three vowel elements (ㅡ,., ㅣ =>, ie, a vowel) and inputting alphabet in the keypad by combining each vowel element.

In Korean, vowels can be divided into several vowel elements. For example, you can think of three vowel elements (for simplicity, simply "three vowels") divided into four vowel elements (for simplicity, "four vowels"): , And vowels exist as a vowel itself. Therefore, it is conceivable to use the vowel element in the Korean input method in the keypad. Anyone who knows Korean can understand all the various vowels of Korean by combining three vowel elements or a combination of four vowel elements.

Hereinafter, the present invention will be described in detail with reference to Examples.

4.1.1. 10 consonant three vowel method

First, the basic alphabets for inputting Korean are 10 consonant algebra (basic consonant), 3 vowel elements, and auditory control for inputting by the control processing method (input by the combination of basic consonant and control) Control, and so on. It is necessary to assign and input the 3-by-4 keypad with 12 buttons. Therefore, it is necessary to input 9 consecutive basic consonants of 10 basic consonants (for convenience, " 9- Nine consonants are assigned to nine buttons except for the "consonant" (or more simply, "-9 consonant")), and three vowel elements and three shuffle controls, Two groups can be assigned to the remaining three buttons. The basic consonants assigned to the nine buttons are input with the assigned button 1, the vowel element is input with the assigned button 1, the control grouped with the vowel element "." Or the 9-button vowel consonant is input with the assigned button 3 can do. This is referred to as "10-consonant 3-vowel method" or "3-vowel method for sound / sound control" for convenience. Here, selecting the control grouped with the vowel element ". &Quot; or the nine-button deconvolution consonant with the assigned button number 3 can be seen as applying the iterative selection method described below.

It is needless to say that ten basic consonants are assigned to each of the ten numeric buttons in order to utilize the Korean keypad for memorization. Figs. 4-5 illustrate this embodiment. In Fig. 4-5, " hehe " is grouped together with the vowel element ". &Quot; as a 9-button declination consonant and assigned to the number button [0], which means that " Is low, so even if you can not enter it with 1 button, it will be less inconvenient and it will be the last one in order so it will be natural for Koreans. In Fig. 4-5, the remaining basic consonants are also assigned to the respective numeric buttons in a pre-order, providing an advantage of providing good positional identifiability (readability) to the user.

(1) + [#] + [#] + [*] + [*] when the input is applied after the control = ]. This is because, in the applicant's earlier application, it is possible to select the shudder control and the shudder control as a repetitive selection method using the property that the vowels "ㅡ" and "ㅣ" In the case of "ㅔ" or "ㅖ", the vowel "ㅣ" may appear consecutively, but the vowel element "." Is preceded by "##", the system knows that the control is not selected, but the vowel is entered. Even if you do not display the control in the first button, you should be aware that the user can only select the control by pressing the corresponding button. By grouping and assigning the sham control to the collection "-" You can remember to select the shake control by pressing the button twice assigned to the "-" button, and by assigning the tune control along with the set "ㅣ", you intuitively select the button assigned to the vowel " This property is also one of the factors to be protected as a right in the applicant's invention and applies equally to the four-vowel method described later. This is not limited to the embodiment shown by the applicant, but may be used in other applications equally, and it is also obvious that this is also included in the rights category of the applicant's invention. For convenience, we will call it "the method of processing the sound / horn control by using the button element (" ㅡ "," ㅣ ") button.

By assigning the vowel element "." To the [0] button and implicitly placing it in the number "0" (the red dot in the number "0") in the example of FIGS. 4-5, the vowel element "." can do. As a result, Korean alphabet input system can be constructed by simply arranging only one alphabet on the keypad. Likewise, as shown in FIG. 4-9, it is composed of ". +. + - + -". By designating "." Of red in red, it is possible to construct a concise keypad by assigning only the capital letters.

Harsh / Neutral Control Processing In 10 consonant 3 vowel sounds, you can enter by only pressing the button assigned to the basic consonant sound twice (that is, by the secretive repetition selection method) without inputting only the shaken sounds by the control processing method. have. This will be referred to as "three-vowel method for repeated chorus selection punctuation control for convenience". (That is, by the secretive repetitive selection method) by pressing the button assigned the basic consonant of hyphenation twice, without depending on the control processing method for only the trueness As shown in Fig. This is referred to as "iterative selection of repeated iterative selection punctuation control processing" for convenience. Alternatively, both the tremor and the horn can be input by the iterative selection method without inputting by the control processing method. If both the shouting and the horn are input by the repetition selection method, the repetition selection order may be the basic consonant (1) - the truer (2) - the loudness (3) (2), and consonant (3) can be regarded as the input of the basic consonant combination, and the treble sound can be regarded as inputting to the button 3 to which the basic consonant belongs), basic consonant . For the sake of convenience, the former case is referred to as the "first preceding verb repeatedly selected three-vowel method", and the latter case is referred to as the "pre-verb repeatedly selected three vowel method". Some of the explanations in this paragraph are collectively referred to as "three-vowel method"

In addition, while maintaining the three-vowel method of the sound / sound control process, it is also possible to apply the "three-vowel method" May be applied. We can apply the recursive selection method with only the tremor, the recursive selection method with only the tune, or the method of selecting the repetition method with the triplet, while maintaining the three-vowel method, Various combinations such as application of the repeating selection method are possible. On the other hand, it is possible to apply the control processing method of only the treble sound, the control processing method of only the tune, or the control processing method of both the tune and the tremble, have. Alternatively, it is possible to input only the sounding by the control processing method, and the sounding sound can be inputted only by the iterative selection method. On the contrary, the sounding sound is inputted only by the control processing method, You may. There may be more combinations similar to those shown in the example, and this will be referred to as " three-vowel method of repeating selection of sound / sound control processing for convenience ". The case where the input method of the shaking sound and the truce is not specially specified is generally referred to as "ten consonant three-vowel method" for the sake of convenience. It is also possible to allow the user to set a convenient input method in inputting hypothetical and tremolous sounds.

The frequency of ambiguity that occurs when applying the repeated selection method to the input of the tremor and the percussion is about 140 characters and one letter in the input system of Samsung Electronics. It occurs much less than it happens in the Korean alphabet. It is also possible to arrange and arrange the digits or the tones to the respective numeric buttons input by the repetitive selection method or the control processing method, and this is also included in the scope of the present invention.

4.1.2. 10 consonant 4-vowel method

4-5 and Figs. 4-9 can be expressed as shown in Figs. 4-6. 4-6, the same input method as in Fig. 4-5 can be applied. As shown in Fig. 4-6, this means that the vowel element " , ":" And ":" are grouped together with the vowel element "." And assigned to the same button, and vowel elements "." And ":" Can be regarded as one button and two buttons respectively assigned by the repetition selection method, but the vowel element ": " is not explicitly placed on the button. Of course, the result is the same even if you explicitly assign it as shown in Fig. 4-6 and select the alphabet displayed on the keypad by the iterative selection method. However, even if the vowel element ":" is not displayed on the button, the user intuitively inputs the combination of the vowel element "." (Ie ":" = "." + "." = [0] + [0]) . In the end, too, 4-5 also use 4 elements ("ㅡ", ".", ":", "ㅣ"), , ":", And the 9-button declutching consonants assigned to them (in the example of FIGS. 4-5) are assigned to an arbitrary button by a repetition selection method Select it, but you can see that the vowel element ":" is not displayed on the button. This is the same result as the above-mentioned " 10-consonant 3-vowel method ", but for convenience, " 10-consonant vowel element repetitive selection 3-vowel " Consonant point vowel element repetition selection vowel vowel ". Truth and tremor can be entered by various methods described above. As a matter of fact, in order to explain the same result or specifically with a separate name, Fig. 4-5 also shows that, using the four vowel elements and applying the iterative selection method, the vowel element ":" (The algorithm of the input method and the input system is the same as that shown in FIG. 4-6, even though it is not shown in FIG. 4-5). This is because the existing Korean input system of the Samsung Electronics uses only three vowel elements Whereas the input system proposed by the applicant is intended to emphasize what can be seen in other perspectives (the use of four vowel elements).

Figures 4-7 show that the vowel element ": " is not grouped with the vowel element ". &Quot; but is grouped into different groups. In other words, the four vowel elements ("ㅡ", ".", ":", And "ㅣ") are assigned to different buttons and will be referred to as "ten consonant 4-vowel method" . The 4-vowel method is relatively simple because it has a lot of points in connection with the 3-vowel method. It is obvious that the content applicable to the 4-vowel method described in the 3-vowel method can be applied as it is in the 4-vowel method. Terms can also be used similarly to the terms used in the three-vowel method.

In the 4-vowel method, the remaining consonants except for the two basic consonants of which there are no sound and hyphenation among 10 basic consonants are assigned to 8 buttons, and each of the 4 vowel elements and the sound control, (Not shown in the figure) are grouped by 2 for each of the two unassigned voices (called "8-button vowel consonants" or "10-8 consonants" or simply "-8 consonants" for convenience) , The assigned control or missed consonants can be input with the assigned button 2 (ie input by repeat selection method).

Here, it is also possible to utilize the basic consonants for memorization by assigning 10 basic consonants to each number button. It is also possible to place a vowel element "." In a similar [0] button with a similar shape and display it in the number "0" to enable a concise placement on the button (or, ), And assigning the vowel element ":" to a similar button [8] and displaying it inside the number "8" (or omitting the representation in numerals, There is an advantage that only one alphabet can be arranged externally per button. As shown in Figure 4-7, when the buttons to which the vowels "ㅡ" and "び" are assigned are the [*] button and the [#] button, when you enter various vowels in Korean, It is effective.

In the case of the 4-vowel method, it is also possible to apply the iterative selection method in the same manner as in the case of the 3-vowel method in the input of the shouting sound and the hyphenation sound, collectively referred to as "sounding / verb repeated selection 4-vowel method". In addition, it is possible to apply the iterative selection method mixedly as in the case of the three-vowel method, which is collectively referred to as the "four-vowel method of repeating selection and mixing of sound / sound control processing.

The keypad of Figs. 4-7 can also be expressed in terms of repeat selection methods as shown in Figs. 4-8. 4-6 and Figs. 4-8, the difference between Figs. 4-5 and Figs. 4-7 becomes clear. Fig. 4-8 shows the result of moving the vowel element ":" selected by [2] button 2 in Fig. 4-6 to the [8] button, 6 and Fig. 4-8 are slightly different, but they can be unified. It is also possible to divide the vowel element ":" composed of two points into a vowel element ":" in the horizontal direction and a vowel element ".." in the vertical direction. , ".", ":", "..", "ㅣ"). However, as compared with the four-vowel method of FIGS. 4-7, there are few excellent points in terms of the number of teeth, improvement of recognition ability, and the like.

Collection element "." And ":" can be assigned to the [*] and [#] buttons, but in this case, you can not place only one alphabet on the surface by marking the vowel elements in numbers, as shown in Figure 4-7 .

In the example of Fig. 4-7, the input is as follows: ㅕ =: + ㅣ = [8] + [#], ㅑ = ㅣ + 8], [8] + [8], and he = [8] + [8] when the 8-button dropout consonant is input by the repetition selection method. If the vowel element ":" is a vowel element "." If you allow input with 2 placed buttons, you can input "3" as button 3 with "." Assigned as ".

As an input example, in the case of "wah" or "wah", the dot-shaped vowel element ".." between the vowels "ㅡ" and "び" The system may temporarily recognize that "u + ..." is entered, but since the vowel "ㅣ" can not appear after "u", the system can recognize that "w" is entered. In the case of "10 vowel point repetition selection 3 vowel method" or "wo", inputting vowel element between "ㅡ" and "ㅣ" by inputting vowel element " It can be understood that the element ":" is input once.

Some of the above-mentioned contents will be described again as follows. First, in the Korean input method using the repeat selection method, the method using the three vowel elements (ㅡ,., ㅣ) consists of ten consonant algebra, three vowel elements, and two controls ) 15 groups of elements are grouped and assigned in a 4 * 3 keypad to apply a repetition selection method, in which "three vowel elements" and "two controls and one consonantal note (9-button vowel consonants)" are grouped It is assigned.

The method of using four vowel elements (ㅡ,.,:, ㅣ) is to group and assign 16 consonant algebra, 4 vowel elements, and 2 control elements in 4 * 3 keypad , "4 vowel elements" and "2 controls and 2 consonant sounds (8 button vowel consonants)" are assigned to each group.

In both methods, we have shown that 10 consonant sounds are assigned to 10 number buttons for natural use of simple codes (especially syllable-based initials).

The three-vowel method proposed by the applicant (collectively referred to as the various three-vowel methods entitled above) and the four-vowel method can be applied to a given language (Korean in this case) with little or no ambiguity It shows how you can enter. This is because, in the inputting of the alphabet displayed on the keypad using the repetition selection method, in the case of inputting Korean in particular, among the " language restriction repetition selection method " "Which is the most common Korean input method.

This is due to the fact that in the applicant presented in the earlier application, when a pair of basic consonants and basic vowels is assigned to each button in the Korean language, and when the iterative selection method is applied, the appearance rules of consonants and vowels in Korean And that the ambiguity in the iterative selection method can be greatly reduced by using the combining rule). 4-5 to 4-8 using three vowel elements or four vowel elements in Korean When the vowels (elements) "ㅡ" and "ㅣ" in the Korean language do not appear consecutively in succession (examples of the prior application , "ㅖ") can be understood from a similar point of view by using the property of knowing whether the input is a vowel or a control, .

4.1.3. Complete control processing 3-vowel / 4-vowel method and elimination Consonant assignment buttons Full control processing 3-vowel / 4-vowel

Even when the humiliation and hyphenation are inputted by the control processing method in Fig. 4-5, ambiguity may arise in cases such as " A &quot;, &quot; Values are all the same). In the example, "ㅡ" is used in place of the vowel "ㅣ", and other similar cases will be understood by those who know Korean. However, this case does not occur in actual words, and can be effectively overcome through the setting of the &quot; batting delay time &quot; and " after-delay time " There may be similar cases in the four-vowel method of FIGS. 4-7. In Fig. 4-7, there is no case such as " Ahhh <=> Yahhi ", but there may be cases such as " However, this is not so many cases and can be overcome through time delay. The number of occurrences can be investigated on the basis of the actual frequency of use of Korean consonants and vowels, but it is expected that the occurrence of ambiguity rarely occurs because it is expected to occur in Korean characters in hundreds of letters.

Of course, as mentioned in the prior application, in the case of the 3-vowel method as shown in Fig. 4-5, if the 9-button drop-out note ("h" in the example drawing) is regarded as a variant alphabet It is possible. For example, he was typing ㅎ = ㅇ + {shout} = [8] + [*] + [*]. This is referred to as "complete control processing 3-vowel method" for convenience. Likewise, in the 4-vowel method similar to 5, 8-button declination consonants ("H" and "K" in the illustrations) are controlled by the control processing method (for example, "K" , And "ㅎ" is regarded as a variant of "ㅇ") can be input without ambiguity. For the sake of convenience, it can be called "the complete control processing 4-vowel method".

However, entering the 9-button / 8-button elimination consonants by the complete control processing 3-vowel / 4-vowel method hinders naturalness with respect to the use of simple codes. Accordingly, in the present invention, it is proposed to input a 9-button declination consonant (in the example, " hehe ") in a three-vowel method by using a combination of buttons and controls assigned with corresponding alphabets. For example, in the three-vowel method of FIG. + {Shout} = [0] + [*] + [*]. This means that the vowel element "." Is entered as a button 1 with the corresponding alphabetic assigned consonant. As a variant of the alphabet. This method can also eliminate ambiguity entirely, and by using the [0] button for the input of "ㅎ", it is possible to maintain the naturalness of the use of the simple code. This is referred to as the "three-vowel method of complete control processing using a lock-release consonant assignment button" for convenience. This is equally applicable to the four-vowel method. When you apply this method, you can recognize "he" as a "hi + hi" temporarily when the preceding letter ends with a letter with a seed sound (eg "Angle") and then " However, since it is not possible to come back consecutively for the vowel "ㅡ" + "ㅡ", the system can recognize that the user has selected the control and can combine the " Since ". + ㅡ + ㅡ" is entered as "ㅎ", the system can recognize it. If the preceding letter ends with a vowel (eg "ㅣ", "ㅡ", "a", "ㅜ", etc.) that can be combined with the vowel element "." Without a seed sound, The system temporarily recognizes that the value "0 **" at "0" is temporarily combined with the preceding vowel and the vowel "ㅡ" + "ㅡ" You can see that this control has been selected and can not be combined with the preceding vowel element ".", So the system will know that you have entered "ㅎ". If the letter ends with a vowel with a preceding letter that can not be combined with the vowel element "." (Eg, a vowel other than "ㅣ", "a", "ㅜ"), press the [0] You can type "ㅎ" and the system will consider it and display it to you. [0] Even if the next "**" is input, it can be regarded that the input is finally "he".

Using the dropout consonant assignment button Complete control processing It can be seen that the control buttons for inputting consonant consonants in the 3-vowel method (including the 4-vowel method) must use the button assigned to the vowel "ㅡ". As mentioned in the earlier application, "ㅔ" and "ㅖ" exist in Korean. Use the consonant assignment button for complete elimination. Likewise, if you assign "ㅁ" to the button [8] in Figure 4-7, you can enter ㅁ = [8] + [*] + [*]. Absolute consonant assignment button use Complete control processing The input case in the 4-vowel method is the same and is omitted.

4.2. Temporal language restriction release delay time

In the earlier application, it is also possible to apply the "lag delay time" and the "lag delay time" even when three or more alphabets are assigned to one button. For example, if you set the pause delay time to 0.1 seconds on a standard English keypad and the [2] button is pressed twice within 0.1 seconds, you can make the system think that you have entered B.

Similarly, when the [2] button is pressed three consecutive times (ie, [2] + [2] + [2]), the first input value and the second input value (ie, the first [2] (For example, 0.1 second) and the delay time interval between the second input value and the third input value is within the set time (for example, 0.1 second) as the delay time Ie, [2] + within 0.1 second + [2] + within 0.1 second + [2]). (2) + [2] + [2] when the [2] button is pressed three consecutive times So that the system can recognize it.

The prior art and various delay times mentioned in this application are summarized as follows.

Flush delay time ≤ This delay time ≤ Temporary language restriction release delay time

The three delay times may be set to be the same, but it may be desirable to set a longer delay time than the delay time and a longer delay time than the delay time.

4.3. The response between the client system and the server system

In an earlier application (filed in 2000 with priority claim), the alphabet entry program on the keypad could be mounted on the terminal (client) side or on the server side. In the case of being mounted on the server side, the numeric input value on the client side is transmitted to the server side and the input value is interpreted on the server side. In the whole system consisting of client (terminal) and server, it is possible to interpret the input value on the client side and transmit the string to the server side. It is also clear that the same applies to all letter input methods of the applicant.

4.4. 4 * 3 Use of a separate button other than the keypad

We have proposed a way to perfectly handle Korean input in 4 * 3 keypad. However, you can assign a vowel or vowel element using a separate button other than the 4 * 3 keypad. For example, if the vowel element ". &Quot; is assigned to a separate button in Fig. 4-5, the assigned consonant " heh " Likewise, if the vowel elements ". &Quot; and ": " are assigned to separate buttons (two can be placed on one button and two can be placed on two buttons) ㅁ "can be selected by 1 button assigned.

Also, a separate button may be used, but a phase shift button, a down shift button, or a left shift button which is not frequently used in the character input mode may be used.

4.5. Korean Input of Gore alphabet

In the present invention, furthermore, a method for inputting Korean Gore through a keypad is presented.

In the Korean language, the vowels are represented by the lower ("ㆍ"), the consonant is by the half (the triangle is indicated by "ㅿ"), (Indicated by "ㆆ" in the form of "ㆆ"), and old ("ㅇ" in the "ㅇ").

In Gore, the case of vowels is often used in relatively modern languages. For example, you can see the name used in the name of "a. ㅁ ㅁ." And in the famous word processor "ㅎ ㅎ", which was made by Hangul and Computer Co. ("ㄱ. +. "Is a single letter," ㅁ +. "Is a single letter, and" ㅎ + 글 "means" ㅎ +. + ㄴ ". As shown in the example, since the vowel space is used in many kinds of mutually, it can be usefully used for the input of the telephone book and the like.

In the applicant's earlier application, the vowel has the same shape as the vowel element ".", So if you can enter a lower button with the button "1" assigned to the vowel element ". Since there is no case where another vowel comes out next to the vowel, there is no change in the input rule (if there is such a case, the vowel's vowel is not used frequently, . Of course, if the button to which the vowel element "." Is assigned is pressed twice, it can be recognized by the system to enter "ㅕ" or "ㅖ" instead of two consecutive vowels. Similarly, if the vowel element "." Is pressed twice consecutively after the vowel "ㅣ", the system recognizes that the vowel "ㅑ" or vowel "." Is to be entered.

The consonants of Gore can also be regarded as the modified alphabet of the basic consonant (consonant). For example, a frivolous "ㅿ" is regarded as a variant of "ㅅ" (eg shoddy), and a hiragin "ㆆ" is regarded as a variant of "ㅇ" Can be regarded as a variant alphabetic character ("ㅇ") of the character "ㅇ". In the case of "ㅸ", the input method can be defined (eg, automata processing to enable the combination of "ß" and "ㅇ"), the alphabet that is not actually used in modern Korean, Quot; and " shouting " are both present, the present invention is not described in detail.

If you give just one example, you can enter "ㅸ = ß + **** = 6 ****" or "ㅸ = f + #### = 6 ####". As mentioned in the input of various symbols, it is the same as inputting various alphabets by repeatedly using the control buttons, but inputting various symbols by repeatedly pressing the control button. "6 *** = PUP", but you can enter a GORE ("G" as a variant of "F") with "6 ****". Likewise, you can enter various symbols by repeatedly using the control buttons (in this example, the [*] and [#] buttons to which the vowel "-" is assigned.

Entering consonants of Gore is equally applicable to other earlier applications of the applicant. However, in the method of using the vowel element (ㅡ,., ㅣ) among the initials of the applicant, there is an advantage that the subordinate can be input naturally and easily.

Through the present invention, it is possible to input from the modern Korean through the keypad to the Gore alphabet used intermittently. Currently, Samsung Electronics' input method using the vowel element is not supported to enter the vowel below. Therefore, in the present invention, the most significant difference is that a user can input a vowel that is used in a special case in a relatively modern language.

4.6. Characteristics when applying concurrent input method

In the prior art, "short / full parallel input method" or simply "parallel input method" is described. This is because, for example, when a parallel input method in which a full input method is set as a basic input mode is applied, the system checks input values every time an input value is input, and determines that an input value does not form a full code of a specific full input method As soon as the system recognizes, the system treats the input value as a simple code and treats it (for the sake of convenience, it is called "full priority concurrent input method"). On the contrary, when a parallel input method in which a short input method is set as a basic input mode is applied, the system checks the input value every time an input value is input, and the input value no longer exists in the index of the simple code to be searched The system considers the input value to be a full code and processes it (for the sake of convenience, it is called the "shortened priority bottleneck input method").

In the full input selection method, it is easily possible to treat the input value as a short code at the moment when the input value violates the full code generation rule in the full priority parallel input method.

When the iterative selection method is applied as a full input method, it can not be explicitly known whether the input value violates the full code in the full priority concurrent input method. However, when applying the language restriction repetition selection method as a full input method, the system can consider the input value as a short code at the moment when the input value violates the word generation rule of a specific language.

In the method using the three vowel elements (ㅡ,,, ㅣ) in Korean (examples in Figs. 4-5), the syllable-based initial codes are used as short codes (that is, When "12 ~" is input as an input value when a full-priority parallel input method is applied, the input value forms a Korean syllable (character) when the second input value "2" is input The system can not recognize that it can not achieve a full code, so the system can treat the input value as a simple code. However, when a user inputs a simple code (a syllable-based initial code) in a parallel input method in a form similar to that of FIG. 4-5, in most cases, the second input value There is a good characteristic that the input value at the moment of input is a simple code.

This is also the context in which the system regards the input value as a simple code (short code) at the moment when the input value violates the word generation rule of Korean in the Korean restriction input method using the three vowel elements of Korean. If the input value of " 100 ~ " is input (full-priority concurrent input method) in Fig. 4-5 using three Korean vowel elements, .. ", but if the fourth input value is a numeric button without inputting the vowel element" ㅡ "or" ㅣ ", the input value can not be a full code At that moment, the input value is recognized as a simple code (short code), and a simple code index can be referenced to output a phrase corresponding to the input value (visual means or auditory means). As a result, if the maximum input value is input in the case of applying the full-priority parallel input method in a form similar to that of 4-5, the system can know whether the input value is a full code or a simple code city).

Likewise, in FIG. 4-7 using four vowel elements (-,.,:,), When the user enters "18 ~" in applying the full priority line input method, The input value can not be recognized as a full code if a numeric button (corresponding to a consonant) is input as the third input value, and therefore, The system can treat input values as simple codes. When up to three buttons are entered, the system has a nice feature of being able to see whether the input is a full code or a simple code.

In FIGS. 4-5 and 4-7, the numeric button assignments of the basic consonants (consonants) are different. However, since FIGS. 4-5 and 4-7 are merely illustrations, . In Fig. 4-5, "h" is implicitly assigned to the [0] button, and in Fig. 4-7, the vowel element "." Is implicitly assigned to the number "0", but this is also the same . For convenience, the input method using three vowel elements is called " 3-vowel Korean input method (more simply, 3-vowel method or 3-vowel method) " The input method using the vowel element is called "4 vowel Korean input method" (more simply, 4 vowel method or 4 vowel method).

4.7. Compatibility between the 3-vowel keypad and the 4-vowel keypad and application on the keypad and memorized keypad for memorization

The keypad of Figs. 4-5 and the keypad of Figs. 4-7 are slightly different from the buttons assigned to the basic consonants. However, the basic consonant arrangements of the two consonants may be the same, and in this case, (Eg, the method described in FIGS. 4-5) or the 10-consonant 4-mode method (eg, the method described in FIGS. 4-7) ). Furthermore, the user can use the 10-consonant 3-vowel method or the 10-consonant 4-vowel method in the "memorizing" keypad in which Korean consonant sounds are assigned to each number button. If you are familiar with the 3-way or 4-vowel method, you can use the simple code on the keypad where the consonantal notation is not displayed on the keypad, and the Korean input by the 3-vowel method or the 4-vowel method. The use of simple codes on the keypad with only numeric keys or consonant notes on 10 number buttons for memorization, and the use of Korean input by the 3-vowel method and the 4-vowel method are not covered by the scope of applicant's invention Included is self-evident.

4.8. Input of consonants

When applying the complete control processing method (applying the control after the input) by inputting the consonant consonant "he" in the 3-vowel method in the first sentence, input it without ambiguity by "ㅎ = 0 ** =. ㅡ ㅡ = ㅗ ㅡ" I can do it. In addition, it is said that it is possible to input with the [0] button 1 if the dropping consonant "ㅎ" appears at the beginning of the word (since the vowel element '.' Does not appear at the beginning of the word). In addition, the vowel element "." Can not be combined with the vowel (that is, the vowel except for the vowels'. ',' Vowel ',' He said that he could input [1] button [1].

When you input "he" to [0] button 3, the vowel element "." , And "ㅎ" is followed by a combination of vowels (".ableable vowels"). As described above, it is pointed out that ambiguity such as " , It is possible to enter "0" or "0 *" by applying the complete control processing method. In addition, when inputting without ambiguity, it is recommended to input "0 **" rather than "0 *" for the regularity of the input method. In the inputting of the consonant consonant "he" here, when the repetition selection method is applied by using the button assigned with the consonant consonant, "he" is followed by ". It can be seen that ambiguity can occur only in special cases. Conversely, if "ㅎ" is followed by a consonant, you can enter "ㅎ" without ambiguity by pressing [0] button 3. In other words, if you enter "ㅎ" after consonant, you can input "ㅎ" without any ambiguity by applying either "0 **" or "000".

You can see that you can enter "0 *" if "ㅎ" is followed by "combinable vowel". (Because "0" button can be input by pressing "0" button if non-combinable vowel follows), there is no case where ". + ㅡ" is combined after ".

In order to maximize the input of the consonant consonant "ㅎ", when the beginning of the word and "ㅎ" after the "non-combinable vowel" are entered, Quot; can be entered as " 0 * " or " 0 ** ", and when the consonant is followed by " hehe "

Of course, it is also possible to always input "H = 0 **" for the regularity of the input method. At this time, it is possible to coexist with the input method of "heh" summarized above. For example, at the beginning of a word, it becomes "0 = hehe", then "*" is followed by "0 * =" and once again "*" is pressed, "0 ** = he" . If "*" is pressed again, "0 *** =" is displayed again. If "*" is pressed again, "0 **** =" is displayed.

Similarly, if you press "0 *" followed by "*." To enter ".He" followed by ".ABLEABLE COLUMN", you will get the same "0 ** = ** = ㅎ '), and when "*" is pressed again, it may become "0 *** = h".

It is obvious that the above can be equally applied to the case of using three sets of Korean words (eg, "ㅡ", "a", "ㅣ") described below. Also, the input of "he =. + ㅡ + ㅡ = 0 **" is made in the shape of "ㅎ = ㅗ + ㅇ", so that he can input it as if he is writing "he". Furthermore "." (+ ㅡ + ㅡ) for the consistency of the input rules even if you enter "ㅎ" after the vowels that can be combined with the vowels that you can combine with ", For convenience of the user,". + "Can be displayed as" ㅗ "for convenience. This is referred to as" intermediate input "for convenience. When "1" is input from "KiHi = 1 # 0 ** #" to "1 # 0", "A" is displayed and when "*" is inputted once again, it becomes "AH." However, When "1 # 0 *" is input, "KS" is displayed and once "*" is pressed, "KS5601 (Eg, "ㅎ" becomes the first consonant of the next letter), and if the "#" is further pressed, it becomes "kishi." The vowels ending in "." After input, "ㅡ" Is input and treated as a collection of words "ㅗ" when inputting "ㅡ" and "ㅡ" just before "ㅡ" and "ㅡ". When the delete button is pressed after "1 # 0 * = default" It can be set to "1", which is a state of "1 # 0." This is the same as inputting "= = +.

The above contents are defined by inputting a combination of "ㅗ = X + Y" in a specific input method, and "X" inputted after a series of vowels are inputted in the input method (Vowel), and if the consecutive input "Y" next succeeds, the final input "X + Y" is recognized as a vowel "ㅗ" and processed. The "X" can be a vowel element "." As illustrated, or it can be "a", "ㅓ", "ㅜ", ... etc. as in the method using three Korean vowels , And " Y " may be " - ".

From the above results, we can see that "ㅗ + ㅡ" is treated as "ㅎ" when the word collection "ㅗ" is entered after the word collection "ㅡ". That is, after inputting "ㅗ" as "0 *" at the beginning of the word without using the input of "ㅎ" by using the button "0" *) "Is input," 0 ** "can be recognized as" ㅎ "and processed. Here, if a letter "ㅗ" is input after the letter "ㅗ" is inputted, "ㅗ (letter collection) + ㅇ" can be recognized and processed as "ㅎ". This is also because "ㅗㅇ" is not a normal Hangul character, so the combination of "ㅗㅇ" is treated as "ㅎ". However, "ㅗ + ㅇ" does not become "ㅎ" when "ㅗ" is not a vowel, as in "study". In the case of "Kihi", which is illustrated above, "1 # 0 * = default" is entered, and if "ㅇ (= 8)" is entered consecutively next time, "Kiho (= #) "Is entered again, and it can be recognized and processed as" Kihi ". In the example, you hear the input of "he", but you can input any character with the above means. However, it would be natural to input a formally related "he".

Although the above three-vowel method is mainly described, the four-vowel method can be applied to the input of consonant consonants. In the example of Figs. 4-7 and 4-8, when inputting "ㅁ" assigned with ".." in the button [8], when the disappearing consonant "ㅁ" Can not be combined with the assigned vowel element ".." (ie, vowel and vowel elements other than vowel 'ㅡ', 'ㅣ'), followed by "ㅁ" It can be input. Likewise, if the consonant "ㅁ" comes after the consonant, you can enter "ㅁ" without ambiguity with the corresponding button 2. You can also enter "8 *" if the missing vowel "ㅁ" follows the vowel to which the assigned vowel elements can be joined. Of course, even in the case of the 4-vowel method, the application of the control processing method which regards the application of the complete control processing method using the dropout consonant assignment button and the disappearance consonant as the modified alphabet of the other consonants It is possible.

In addition, it is possible to apply the control processing method using a basic consonant in which there is no sound / noise in inputting symbols.

4.9. Symbol input example

As far as the input of the symbol is concerned, it is possible to input the basic consonant in which there is no sound / no sound, and the vowel element buttons (especially the "ㅡ" It would be convenient. That is, it can be seen that the method of inputting the sound / hyphenation is applied.

For example, the following symbols can be input on the basis of FIGS. 4-5. The following contents have already been presented in the prior art. In addition to the character input method presented in the present invention, It is obvious that they can be applied similarly (i.e., using a control processing method).

▶ Exclamation point (!) = 2 **: Easily reminiscent of "Ex = 2 * ..." of "Exclamation point"

▶ Slash (/) = 2 ##: Easily associate with "Me = 2 # ..." of "Divide"

▶ tilde (~) = 4 **: wavy appearance in the shape of "d" and "le"

▶ Sorry (@) = 4 ##: Reminds me of "d + l" in the loop shape of the "@" symbol

▶ Question mark (?) = 5 **: It is easily reminded in "water = 5 * ..." of "question mark"

▶ Period (.) = 5 ##: Can be easily reminded in "Do = 5 # ..." of "Period"

▶ E-mail (,) = 5 ###: Enter "period" and press "#" again

▶ Colon (:) = 5 ####: Enter "comma" and press "#" again.

▶ Semicolon (:) = 5 #####: Enter "colon" and press "#" again.

If you are using a character input system that does not use the [*] or [#] button as a vowel button, you can enter an exclamation point by combining the buttons with "ㄴ" will be. In systems where the [*] button or the [#] button is used as a control button instead of as a control button in a system that is used as a control button, repeated presses of the buttons and control buttons assigned to the " You will be able to enter an exclamation point in combination. For example, if you enter a modern word that takes precedence over Gore, and the button assigned to "ㄴ" and any control button (eg the [*] button) is pressed twice maximum, enter "exclamation point = ㄴ + ***" .

A period (.) + "ㅣ" = a comma (,), which also uses the property that the vowel "ㅣ" can not be joined normally after a certain symbol (a period in the example). If you want to enter the vowel "ㅣ" after the semicolon, enter a period (.), Make a certain amount of time (for example, delay time for language restriction release) to elapse, confirm the period and enter "ㅣ" (.) After inputting a certain button (eg right arrow or 'blank + delete'), you can confirm the period and enter the vowel "ㅣ" to enter ". This is also true in the case of the input of the Gore Hangul described above.

It is self-evident that other symbols other than the exclamation point above can be similarly applied in the other input system (a combination of a button and a control button assigned with an associatable Korean consonant). In addition, This is possible.

The symbol input example optimized for the Hangul input method presented in the present invention is shown above. That is, various symbols are inputted by using the consonant button and the vowel button (the buttons assigned to the vowels "ㅡ" and "ㅣ") where there is no dither / hyphenation as much as possible. However, it is also possible to use the consonant button with the sound / hyphenation, as shown by the fact that it is already entered as a pure chord "ㅸ = 6 ****" or "ㅸ = 6 ####" Can be input.

Even if the vowel button is repeatedly pressed and various vowels are selected / input as shown in the examples 10 and 11 below, the symbol can be input. For example, in FIG. 4-5, when the "*" button 1 assigned to the vowel "ㅡ" is selected as "ㅡ", the second tar is selected, and the third tar is selected as the vowel "", "" And "" are selected according to the number of times the button is pressed repeatedly), "5 *** = Mu".

Normally, when the "maximum possible number of iterations" (ie, the [*] button is pressed three times), the initial state (ie, "pressed once" It is often the case that the selected state is cycled, that is, "5 **** = m", which is mainly taken care of when more than the desired number of times is pressed by typos. It is usually enough to use the delete function of the input value unit presented in the previous application) or "5 **** = 5 *** + * = Mu" However, The system can detect that an unmatched alphabet (vowel) has been entered as shown in the input, so that the entire input value can be recognized as one specific alphabet (eg, corresponding lattice, gore, or specific symbol).

That is, in this case (the vowels "ㅡ", "ㅜ", "ㅠ" are selected according to the number of repetitions of the corresponding button in the order of - there are actually three vowels displayed on the [*] button, (For example, the case where only the vowel "ㅡ") is displayed) and "question mark (?) = 5 ****". When the [*] button is pressed consecutively after "5 ****", a series of symbols (in the example above) is displayed when the [] is pressed after the period , A comma (,), a colon (:), a semicolon (;), and the like). Therefore, it is possible to input "1 = **** *****" and "l = 1 *****" as an example, not a symbol.

This means that "ㅡ", "ㅜ", "ㅠ" are selected according to the number of repeated presses of the [*] button assigned to the vowel "ㅡ", and "symbol control 1" "Symbol Control 2", "Symbol Control 3", ... can be selected in the same context. That is to say, "5+ {symbol control 1} = 5 **** = question mark (?)". Similarly, "?", "?", "?" Are selected according to the repetition number of times the button "*" is assigned. &Quot;, " 5th " ... &lt; / RTI &gt; For example, "5+ {2nd} = 5 **** = question mark (?)". That is, in the [5] button, "ㅁ" is used as the representative alphabet "?" Is implicitly defined as a {2} following alphabet. This can be seen in a context similar to the one shown in the applicant's prior application (the application number is not explicitly stated), which shows the use of the button as a control button.

If the button assigned to the vowel "ㅡ" is used only as an input of "ㅡ", the maximum possible number of iterations of the vowel "ㅡ" following the consonant is 1, so input it as "question mark (?) = 5 **" This can be seen as possible. If the maximum possible number of repetitions is one or more times (in the case of three times in the above example), various symbols can be inputted. Of course, even if you do not recognize the symbol in combination with the button here, you can recognize only the input of the vowel button as a symbol. For example, if three vowels are input, such as "ㅡ", "ㅜ", "ㅠ", depending on the repetition of the [*] button assigned with "ㅡ" Without "**** =?" To identify a specific alphabet (eg, symbol). However, this is not a good way to use the [*] button to enter only the promised symbols when a symbol and the [*] button are pressed continuously. When recognizing with a consonant button, you can recognize a combination of the [5] button in the example as well as other buttons (eg, the numeral buttons assigned to consonants) as a specific symbol It is obvious that the input of various symbols can be implemented with a small number of input strokes.

As mentioned above, the applicant can refer to the button as a control button, and the control button may be pre-input or post-input according to the input rule. In other words, the question mark (?) May be input as "5 **" or "** 5". For example, if "**" is entered after "a" is entered, then the system will recognize the input value as "a?" In the moment the last "ㅁ" is input in "+ + + + do. When "** 5" is input after "Sens", the last input "5 **" is sensed at the moment when the last "ㅁ" is input from "Gam ㅡ ㅁ", and input value can be recognized as "Sensing" have. The same goes for the other cases.

In summary, in the method in which a specific vowel button is repeatedly used and a predetermined alphabet is selected according to the number of presses, a series of vowel buttons input And a specific (consonant) button (a series of vowel buttons may be pre-input or post-input according to a predetermined sequence) as an input of the promised alphabet (symbol).

This can be applied not only to alphabets (including symbols) but also to various function inputs. When applying to the function input, as shown in "Application of multi-dimensional intersection control" of the applicant's original application (inputting the function by crossing combination of N + 1 control buttons when entering alphabet by N-dimensional intersection control processing method) , It is preferable that the input of a specific function is made such that various alphabets (symbols and the like) are inputted by repeated depression of the control button, and the setting is made at the end. (Eg 5 **** = question mark (?), 5 ***** = exclamation point (!), 5 ****** = enable enter function)

If "5 ***** = Enter function is enabled" and "5 ****** = exclamation point (!)", Enter function is activated by "5 *****" When the button is pressed, the system invalidates (cancels) the executed enter function and interprets the entire input value "5 ******" as an exclamation point (!), Which is unnatural and confusing to the user to be. This means that it is desirable to input the function using the repeated pressing of more than (N + 1) times when the vowel button used as the control button when using various alphabets (including symbols) is used a maximum of N times to be.

4.10. Input of arbitrary vowels (eg vowels "a") using vowel element "."

We can see that we can input Gore "under" naturally by using the vowel element ".". The vowel element "." Is similar to the following in appearance, so it can give the user an affinity. If you enter a vowel as a vowel element ".", You can start vowel combination (eg after consonant input) in the vowel combination process (ie vowel processing) If the [0] button is pressed between the activation of a certain function, it is treated as a downward motion.

Basically, entering a vowel using vowel elements is a combination of vowel elements to form a single vowel. The vowel combination process means from the start of the vowel combination to the end of the vowel combination. The vowel combination start state means that after the consonant input, after the activation of the function such as blank, or when it is recognized that the vowel currently input to the recognized vowel is not combined. For example, when "*" is pressed in the vowel input value "1 # * ... = ...", the vowel element "ㅣ" It is recognized as a new vowel combination starting state. Similarly, the vowel end condition means when a new consonant is recognized, when a function activation such as a blank is recognized, and so on. For the sake of convenience, the vowel combination process between the consonant and the consonant (from the start of vowel combination to the end of vowel combination) is described as an example.

For example, "105 = a +. + ㅁ" will be one letter with vowels as vowels. When "1" is pressed and the consonant is recognized and "0" is pressed, the system recognizes the beginning of the vowel combination process. For the input value "10 ~", the system displays "a +." (The process of inputting a word, a sentence, a sentence, or a sentence). However, if "5" is pressed and the consonant processing starts and the vowel combination process is ended, the input value "0" can be processed downward. That is, the input value "105" is recognized as "a => a +. => A +. + K". The expression "+" here means that the word is expressed as a single letter with a vowel (ie, '.') As a vowel.

Among the three vowel elements "ㅡ", "." And "ㅣ" used in the 3 vowel method, "ㅡ" and "ㅣ" exist as vowels in themselves, but only vowel elements " Represents Korean vowels. Here, we can use the vowel element "." To show that we can input a single vowel (eg, "a"), which is often used in modern languages, without typing any unused underscores in modern Korean.

In inputting a single vowel of modern Korean by using the [0] button assigned to the vowel element ".", Inputting a modern Korean vowel "a" with the highest frequency of use and similar pronunciation (virtually the same) Lt; / RTI &gt;

Having the vowel element "." Enter the vowel "a" with the assigned button is similar to entering the vowel with the button assigned to the vowel element ".". For example, when "1" is pressed when "105" is input, the system recognizes the consonant as "a", and when the next "0" is pressed, the system first ('0 **' or '000' And if it is input, consonant processing is performed. For the input value " 10 " ) Can be recognized as an intermediate step of inputting "G", "B", "G", or "G", but if consonant input "5" is input next And other functions), the system can terminate the vowel combination process and recognize the input value " 0 " as the promised vowel "a". That is, the input value "105" is recognized as "a => a +. => Sense". If another vowel (for example, 'ㅣ') is entered here, it is obvious that the total input value becomes 105 # = Kami.

The process of "105 = sense" shown in the example is actually the same as the process of processing "1 = 05 =" = => = => sense "1 # 05". When "5" is pressed after "1 # 0", the end of the vowel combination process is recognized and the vowel "a" is confirmed for the input value "# 0". However, when the input is "a = ㅣ +. = # 0", the system outputs the input according to the input value, which is similar to the process of writing the vowel "a".

It is true that the input of the vowel "a" frequently used as the vowel element "." Is less natural than the combination of the vowel elements "ㅣ" and "." In sequence. However, the vowel element "." It is not a problem since you can enter "a" as a combination of "ㅣ" and "." (Ie, '# 0'

Here, the input under the gore can be input as " 00 ". Likewise, if you press up to "100", the system will display "a +. +." , But if the activation of other functions that can end the consonant or other vowel combination process is recognized without coming up with a combinable collection button at the next input value, the system will change "100" to " . "1005" = "a + lower child + ㅁ". If you do not need the input of gore below, you can input other vowels such as vowel "ㅓ", which is frequently used, into [0] button 2.

Some users may prefer less vocabulary because of lack of intuition about entering "a" without entering a vowel with "." Vowel. For this user, it is possible to input the lower one with [1] button 1, and to input the collection "a" with [0] button 2. The processing procedure is the same as that described above, so it is omitted. In this case, it is also possible to input "a = l +. = # 0" at the same time. Entering the vowel "a" into the second [0] button (ie, '00') assigned to the vowel element "." Is also more convenient than entering "ㅣ +. = # 0" The degree is high.

You can choose whether you want to enter "a" in one of the buttons (button [0] in the example drawing) assigned with the vowel element "." Shown above or enter one gore below and enter " It can be set according to the user's preference. Furthermore, it is also possible to input other vowels other than "a", which can also be set by the user.

Since the vowel "a" is an overwhelmingly used vowel in Korean, it is preferable to input "a" rather than another vowel in inputting any vowel used in the modern language by using the vowel element "." . The vowel "a" has about 22% of the total number of Korean vowels. Also, if the frequency of usage is "a", "ㅣ", "ㅡ", these three vowels are about 50% of the total usage frequency of Korean. In other words, by allowing the user to input "a" as the vowel element ".", It means that about half of the vowels actually used can be input as one specific button.

Although the above description is based on the three-vowel method, the same applies to the four-vowel method. In other words, in Fig. 4-7 and Fig. 4-8, the vowel element ". &Quot; Can be treated as a promised vowel (eg, 'a'), and if the vowel element ".." is recognized (ie, press the [8] button) 'ㅓ'). In addition, it can be applied to an input system using a vowel element currently used in Korea.

Since the vowel combination process means from the beginning of the vowel combination to the end of the vowel combination, it is not possible to combine the other vowels in addition to the vowel input. It means that you can not enter "dog" by combining vowel "with" "10" and vowel element "ㅣ" with vowel again. "10 #" becomes "ㅓ" because the vowel combination process is started when "0" is input, and the vowel combination process is continued when "#" is pressed. In other words, the above description can be applied only to vowel input that is used singly, not additionally to the vowel, which is a combination of vowel elements (eg, "vowel" or "vowel termination" In "a").

In this case, the vowel element "." Which can not exist as a vowel in the original singly vowel is a vowel element, and a vowel element (or vowel vowel) A collection that can be changed by combination of vowel elements such as "a", "ㅑ" ... as a vowel created by combination of "ㅡ", "ㅣ" . Here, "ㅡ", "ㅣ" is both a vowel element and a collection of elements at the same time.

In the above, input a vowel by using the Korean vowel element "ㅡ", ".", "ㅣ", and process the input of the [.] Button starting the vowel combination with "a" Quot; " for two presses of " Since the Korean keypad of the present invention has compatibility, it is possible to additionally apply the content applied in the vowel input using the three modern Korean vowels (e.g., " a ", " . That is, "ㅘ =. + ㅡ +." , It can be entered as "ㅙ =. + ㅡ +. +", "ㅝ = ㅡ +. +.", And "ㅞ = ㅡ +. +. + び".

4.11. A vowel input method using three modern Korean vowels (eg, "a", "l", "ㅡ") and a Korean input system using it

The most commonly used vowels in Korean are three vowels in the order of "a", "ㅣ", "ㅡ". Especially the vowel "a" is the most used vowel. In the following, we show how to handle Korean vowels using three vowels including "ㅡ", "ㅣ", and any one vowel (vowel "a" in the example). As shown in the previous application, the Korean alphabet uses the 13 alphabets of the three vowels of "10", "a", "ㅣ" and "ㅡ" as the basic alphabet, so that in a keypad with 12 buttons, And one vowel. However, in addition to these examples, it is also possible to combine the vowels presented next in different cases (in addition to the various consonant input methods presented in the earlier application, the consonant input method in other systems, Input method) can be similarly applied. In the following, it is clear that the contents of other chapters of this application are also applicable to the following.

In consideration of the invention in the prior art, Figs. 4-10 and 4-11 are examples in which a vowel " a " and a consonant " hehe " In FIG. 4-10, in order to keep the keypad simple, the number "0" in the number "0" of the [0] button is displayed, which is the same as FIG. In the example of FIG. 4-10, the vowels "-", "a" and "-" can be selected / input by the [*] button, the [0] button, and the [#] button, respectively. Of course, this is just one example, and it is easy to see that it can be modified. For the sake of convenience, hereafter, the [*] button or the vowel "-" button, the [0] button or the vowel "a" button, the "#" . In particular, the [0] button assigned with the consonant "ㅎ" is also called the "ㅎ" button in some cases.

Hereinafter, in FIGS. 4-10 and 4-11, since the [0] button is primarily applied as the "a" button, consonants ("he" in the example drawing) are assigned to the button assigned to "a" The same is true for the case where it is not. It can also be applied when consonants are assigned to the remaining vowel buttons or when they are assigned with any control. However, the input of the consonants assigned with the vowel "ㅡ" and "ㅣ" should not affect the input of the vowel ("ㅋ = a + ㅡ + ㅡ = 1 **" Then the vowel "ㅡ" does not appear in succession and does not consequently affect the input of the vowel - a property that is treated "decisively" as mentioned).

Table 1 shows a case where the remaining vowels are input using the three vowels presented in the present invention.

In Table 1, the Korean vowel is entered using the three vowel elements "ㅡ", ".", "ㅣ", but "." Is the same as entering the vowel "a" in button 1 of the assigned button. In Table 1, for example, it is defined as "ㅜ = ㅡ + a", which uses the property that the vowel "ㅡ" ") To be recognized by the system as a vowel" ㅜ ". It is natural to input "0 #" because it is decomposed into "a" and "l" in case of the vowel "ㅐ", but "ㅐ = # 0 # ". Defining combinations for the rest of the vowels can be similarly thought. According to the definitions in Table 1, it is possible to input 21 Korean vowels without ambiguity.

In the state where any one of the vowel buttons is pressed in Table 1 and the vowel process (i.e., the vowel combination process) starts, when the corresponding input value of Table 1 is detected, the system identifies the vowel do. For example, after one of the input buttons [1] - [9] in Figure 4-10 is pressed, or after a consonant input is recognized by a series of inputs (eg "1 ** = , The system recognizes that the vowel processing process is started and presses the input of the corresponding vowel button and the subsequent input of the corresponding vowel button (e.g., [#], [0] It is possible to identify a vowel corresponding to the input value according to Table 1 by sensing the input of a series of input values (vowel buttons).

However, in the case of a vowel with a circle in the (vowel) confirmation (possibility) in Table 1, it can be confirmed that the corresponding vowel is the input of the corresponding input value, but in the remaining cases, have. For example, if "0 #" is pressed, the system can recognize the input of "ㅓ" according to Table 1, but if "#" is pressed one more time, # "As a vowel" ㅔ ". Since there is no case in which the system recognizes the entire input value as a different input value after "0 ##" in Table 1, the system does not recognize the input value "0 ##" as the collection "ㅔ" It can be recognized with certainty.

" 혹 은 "ㄱㆍ" 혹은 "ㄱ@" 혹은 "가" 등의 형태 중의 임의의 한가지로 출력될 수 있다. 다음 입력으로 자음버튼이 입력되거나 자음의 입력이 인식되면(예를 들어 "1" 이 추가로 입력), 전체 입력값 "101"에서 중간에 입력된 "0"을 모음 "ㅏ"로 확정적으로 인식하고, "각"을 출력할 수 있는 것이다. 여기서 "ㅏ = 0" 으로 입 력하도로 하였으나, "#0" 으로 역시 "ㅏ"를 입력할 수 있도록 하는 것을 허용할 수 있다. Similarly, in the case of a vowel without a circle in the confirmation (possibility) column in Table 1, it can be recognized as another vowel according to the next input value. Since the vowel "a = 0" can also be a collection of "ㅓ", "ㅕ", "ㅗ", "ㅛ", ... etc. according to the following input, the vowel [0] When (for example, "10"), the output form is "

"Or" a "or" a "or" a. "When the consonant button is input or the input of the consonant is recognized (for example," 1 "Quot; 0 &quot;) as a vowel " a &quot;, and outputs " angle &quot;. Here, " a = 0 " However, it is possible to allow the input of "a" also to "# 0".

") 하여 줄 수 있으며, 확정적으로 인식되는 순간 다시 적절하게 표시(예. "각")하여 줄 수 있는 것이다. 마찬가지로 "10"이 입력된 후 단어의 종료(예. 공백, 입력의 종료 등)가 인식되면, 시스템은 기 입력 된 "10 = 가"로 확정적으로 인식할 수 있는 것이다. 표1에서는 일부의 경우만 입 력중 출력형태를 예시하였다. Here, the problem of the system "recognizing" the vowel for a certain set of input values (including all cases where the vowel is recognized temporarily and definitively), and the recognition of what is "completely" It is a matter of. (Depending on the system, it may not be necessary to output the recognized contents, and whether to output the recognized contents or not is an optional matter). For the temporarily recognized contents (here, the recognized contents) As you can see, it can be output in an appropriate form (eg "

(Eg, space, termination of input, etc.) after a "10" is entered, as well as a " Is recognized, the system recognizes the input "10 =" as a definite one. In Table 1, only the output type is shown in some cases.

FIG. 11-1 is a drawing presented by the applicant of the present invention, in which a controller interprets an input value input through a keypad in a client by referring to a memory, and displays the interpreted result (character string) display unit, or transmits it to the server side through a sender. The problem of displaying the interpreted character string on the display (eg, liquid crystal display) and the problem of transmitting it to the server side is an optional problem apart from the process of interpreting the input value. In the hardware configuration, unlike the illustrative drawing, it is a problem that may include the control unit to the memory, and is not absolute. Figure 11-2 also shows an example in which input values are transmitted from the client side to the server side and the input values are interpreted at the server side.

Here, instead of the vowel "ㅡ", a right arrow "→" is applied, and a downward arrow "↓" is applied instead of a vowel "ㅣ". In Table 1, the arrows "→" and "↓" are applied instead of the vowel "ㅡ" and "ㅣ", respectively. It would be better to display the vowels "ㅡ" and "ㅣ" rather than the "→" and "↓" keys on the keypad buttons, respectively, instead of the vowels "ㅡ" and "ㅣ". This is the same in the following "how to input a vowel using four vowels". Further, it is possible to use shapes such as a horizontal line and a vertical line similar to the vowels "ㅡ" and "ㅣ".

As shown by the applicant in the previous application, having the user enter a subordinate with a "." Assigned to the [0] button in Figure 4-5 will eventually use the [0] button as the "down button" In combination, three combinations of the vowel "ㅡ", "ㅣ", and ". (Lower child)" are input. The method of inputting all the vowels with the three vowels "ㅡ", "a", and "ㅣ" is also the same as the method of inputting the vowels (indicated by "." [0] button) is essentially the same as the case of entering the most frequently used vowel "a".

Accordingly, it is self-evident to be able to use the various properties presented in the applicant's earlier application. For example, it is possible to input a lattice sound / light consonant sound by repeated depression of a button to which a basic consonant is assigned, input of a vowel by repetitive pressing of a vowel button, a lattice sound by a control processing method Input of consonants / vowels, input of consonants assigned to the vowel (eg "hehe"), and so on. It is also possible to process continuous input "00" as a vowel with the start of vowel processing.

For example, if the two inputs of the [0] button are assigned to the vowel "ㅓ", the input of "1001" is recognized as "A" And recognizes the end of the vowel process when the 4th "1" input is input, recognizes the continuous input of "00" Can be recognized as "ㅓ", and can be recognized as "け" for the input value "1001". In Figs. 4-10 and Fig. 4-11, inputting the lattice sound is performed by the control processing method in which the post-control input is applied, as " bk = a + {shake control} = a + . When inputting "1 *", the system recognizes the system as "that", but consecutively enters "*" to see the system as deterministic as the total input value "1 ** = will be. If "*" is input as the fourth input value after "101", the system recognizes the input value as "gag". This is quite natural as a Hangul AutoMatta on a two-beater keyboard. Next, when "*" is input as the fifth input value, the last input "1 **" in "... 1 **" is recognized as " "Is recognized as" + ㅋ ". (Note: When using the Unicode system, 'ㅋ' should be displayed as a single letter with a trailing edge of 'a', but it is indicated as '+' because it supports only KSC 5601 completion type in the electronic document editor of the Korean Intellectual Property Office) Quot; 1 " to " bk ", i.e., when the [l] button is pressed on the PC keyboard It means that it can be processed and recognized as if it were.

Similarly, in the case of inputting a consonant sound, "ㄲ = a + {slant control} = 1 ## = a + ㅣ + ㅣ". The input of "ㅎ" can also be entered as "ㅎ = ㅇ + {shake control} = ㅇ + ㅡ + ㅡ = 8 **" by considering "ㅎ" as a modified 퍄 벳 You can enter "ㅎ = a + ㅡ + ㅡ = 0 **" without ambiguity by considering "he" as a variant of "a". Also, in the beginning state of a word, "he" is a combination of a [0] button and a collection of vowels (such as "ㅡ", "ㅣ", "a", " 0] button can be input to the [0] button 1 after the vowel other than the vowel other than the vowel that can be combined with another vowel is identified. It is also possible to make it possible to recognize "0 **" or "8 **" as "ㅎ" even if you can enter "ㅎ" with button 1 assigned to "ㅎ." Likewise, (Eg, "a = 1", "b = 111", "ㄲ = 1111" or "a = 1", "= = 1" = 111 "," ㅋ = 1111 ", which is very rare but may have ambiguity.) Also, as mentioned earlier, A simple repetition selection method according to a predetermined selection order can be applied to the input of a consonant, for example, a consonant sound "he" for the basic consonant "o" and a consonant sound "d" for the basic consonant "b" For example, a = 1, b = 11, b = 111 or a = 1, b = 11, b = 111 or c = (Ellipsoid) or ㅇ = ㅇ, ㅎ = ㅇ + ㅇ (Based on Figure 4-10, ㅇ = 8, ㅎ = 88) Compared to input without ambiguity, inputting by "3+" input method or simple repetitive selection method causes ambiguity, and it is bigger in terms of input number The proposed vowel input technique may be applied to a particular consonant input It can be applied in a liquor applied separately, as well as the said, more information can be equally applied in the content of type "trestle" elements of a collection. "" Described above is apparent.

Since consonants and vowels can be identified "deterministically" with respect to the input values when applying the above consonant and vowel input methods, the construction of Hangul syllables (chunk letters) Yes, it can be easily handled by applying a vowel-joining automaton on a two-barrel keyboard. When the above is applied, the system is able to identify consonants and vowels as a deterministic input method, and since there is no difficulty in understanding it, a flow chart is not suggested.

And that "ㅓ" can be input by pressing the [a] button (that is, the [0] button) twice by repetitive pressing of a specific vowel button. That is, "00 = ㅓ" or "0 # = ㅓ". If you want to enter "ㅓ" only as "00", you can define "0 #" as "ㅐ" instead of "ㅓ" and enter "ㅐ = 0 #". However, when "0 ## = ㅔ" is pressed, when "0 #" is pressed, there is a point that "ㅐ" which is different in shape from "ㅔ" can be displayed. For example, if you press up to "10 #", it will be recognized (and displayed) as "Dog" and if you press "#" again, it will be recognized as "10 ## = Crab". At this time, the user can be reminded that "" "is pressed once more after inputting" dog ", and the middle point (or small horizontal line) of" ㅐ "is pushed inward to become" ㅔ ". As mentioned in the previous application, you can define the input of "ㅑ" as pressing "a" button twice consecutively, that is, "ㅑ = a + a" (Here we have to enter "ㅓ = a + l").

In Table 1, it is defined as "ㅘ = a + ㅡ + ㅣ + a = 0 * # 0" and it can also be defined as "ㅘ = [ㅗ + a] = a + ㅡ + a = 0 * 0". Inside the "[...]" is a disassembled representation of the diphthong to aid understanding. If you apply this, then when the [0] button is pressed after the vowel "ㅗ = a + ㅡ = 0 * (the lower vowel, ie, the vowel" ㅗ " It becomes difficult to input the assigned consonant ("H" in the example) into the [0] button 1. However, it is possible to input "ㅎ" by other means (eg, 0 **, 8 **, 0 *, etc.). Similarly, it is possible to define "ㅙ = [ㅗ + ㅐ] = a + ㅡ + a + = = 0 * 0 #". The definition of "ㅘ = a + ㅡ + a (= 0 * 0)" and the definition of "ㅙ = a + a + (= 0 * # 0 #) ", and can be applied at the same time as defined by" ㅙ = a + ㅡ + ㅣ + And may be set according to the user's selection. It is defined as "ㅘ = a + ㅡ + a (= 0 * 0)" and "ㅙ = a + a + (= 0 * # 0 #) "with" ㅘ = + + ㅡ + + + + (= 0 * # 0) . The definition of "ㅘ = a + ㅡ + a (= 0 * 0)" and the definition of "ㅙ = a + a + 00) "(that is, even if it is not defined as" ㅓ = a + a (= 00) ").

For reference, the vowel elements in the Korean keypad shown in Fig. 4-5, which are illustrated in the prior application, are arranged from left to right in the order of "ㅡ", ".", And "ㅣ". This serves to increase the naturalness of the input do. If you look closely at "ㅡ", "." And "ㅣ", you can see the diphthongs "ㅢ", "ㅟ", "ㅝ", "ㅞ". . . It is possible to observe the shape of the diphthong. On the other hand, if the keys are arranged in the order of "ㅣ", ".", And "ㅡ" as in the keypad of Samsung Electronics, the bell sound is not observed well. Also, there is a disadvantage in that the input of the echo sound can not be naturally input as it flows from the left side to the right side. Likewise, entering "ㅘ = a + ㅡ + a (= 0 * 0)" is one way to reduce the number of strokes than to type "ㅘ = a + a + l + a (= 0 * It also has meaning, but it increases the naturalness of the input. On the Korean keypad shown in FIG. 4-10, Korean vowels are arranged from left to right in the order of "ㅡ", "a", "ㅣ". Entering "... # 0" #] Button) and then press the left button ([0] button).

Furthermore, it is possible to apply "ㅓ = 00" to a diphthong input such as "ㅝ" or "ㅞ" as in the case of "a = 0". For example, in Table 1, "ㅝ = ㅡ + a + l + = = * 00 #" is defined, but "ㅓ" ㅜ + ㅓ] = ㅡ + a + a + a = * 000 ". It is also defined in Table 1 as "ㅞ = ㅡ + a + a + ㅣ + ㅣ", but "ㅓ" in "ㅞ" is "a + a = 00" ] = ㅡ + a + a + l = = * 000 # ". As with "ㅘ" and "ㅙ", "ㅞ = ㅡ + a + a + (= 000)" and "ㅞ = ㅡ + a + It can be applied separately from the definition of "ㅓ = a + a = 00", and can be applied at the same time as "ㅝ" and "ㅞ" are defined in Table 1, and only one of them can be selectively applied. If you define "ㅓ" as "ㅓ = a + a (= 00)" instead of "ㅓ = a + ((= 0) You can enter it.

When "1 * 00" is pressed when "ㅝ = ㅡ + a + a + a (= * 000)" or "ㅞ = ㅡ + a + However, if the [0] button is pressed again, it will be recognized as "Guo". If [#] is pressed once more, it will be recognized as a "chest". Likewise, in this case, too, since "000" means input of a normal vowel (ie, "ㅝ"), the vowel "(= * 00) Consonant) "It is obvious that you can not input" heh "with 1 assigned button.

- 숫자 '0' 안에 'ㅏ' - 가 배치) 을 "아래아(.)"처럼 연상하여 나머지 모음을 입력할 수 있는데, "ㅑ"는 음 가를 기준으로 조합하여 입력하게 되는 점이 있다. 마찬가지로 표1에서 "ㅒ = ㅣ +ㅏ+ㅏ+ㅣ (=#00#)" 으로 되어 있으나, 이를 "ㅒ = [ㅑ+ㅣ] = ㅣ+ㅏ+ㅣ (= #0#)" 으로 정의하여 입력할 수 있다 ("ㅐ = ㅣ+ㅏ+ㅣ"가 아닌 "ㅐ = ㅏ+ㅣ"로 입력한다 는 전제). 마찬가지로 모음 "ㅑ = ㅣ+ㅏ+ㅏ"로 하는 것과 "ㅑ = ㅣ+ㅏ"로 하는 것, 그리고 모음 "ㅒ = ㅣ+ㅏ+ㅏ+ㅣ"로 하는 것과 "ㅒ = ㅣ+ㅏ+ㅣ"로 하는 것은 동시에 적용될 수도 있고 선택적으로 적용될 수도 있다. "ㅑ = ㅣ+ㅏ"로 "ㅒ = ㅣ+ㅏ+ㅣ"로 하면 모음 "ㅑ"와 "ㅒ"의 입력타수가 표1의 경우보다 1타씩 줄어들게 된다. 이 내용을 선출원에서 기술하지 않은 이유는 모음 "ㅑ"와 "ㅒ"는 사용빈도 가 많지 않은 모음이므로 입력타수 감소에는 많은 영향이 없기 때문이다. Similarly, "a" can be entered with the [a] button ("0" button in the drawing) assigned with "a" and entered as "a = l + a (= # 0)" And Section 4.11). (= 0 #) "instead of" ㅓ = a + ((= 0 #) "and" ㅐ = a + It is possible to input another alphabet by a combination of "ㅣ + a" if it is defined as "a = a (= 0)" instead of ㅣ + a (= # 0) For example, it is defined as "ㅑ = ㅣ + a + a (= # 00)". Input rules can be defined to input "ㅑ = ㅣ + a (= # 0)". The sound of the vowel "+" is known as "ㅣ + a" if the person has been educated above a certain level. However, if a vowel is input by using the vowels "ㅡ", "a", "ㅣ" which are the most frequently used vowels,

- You can enter the rest of the vowel by associating it with "a (-)" in the number '0'. Similarly, in Table 1, "ㅒ = ㅣ + a + a + ㅣ (= # 00 #)" is defined as "ㅒ = [ㅑ + ㅣ] = ㅣ + (Assuming that "ㅐ = a + び" is entered instead of "ㅐ = ㅣ + a + ㅣ"). Similarly, the vowel "ㅑ = ㅣ + a + a", "ㅑ = ㅣ + a" and the collection "ㅒ = ㅣ + a + May be applied simultaneously or selectively. If "ㅑ = ㅣ + a" and "ㅒ = ㅣ + a + ㅣ", the number of input vowels of vowels "ㅑ" and "ㅒ" This is because the vowels "ㅑ" and "ㅒ" are not frequently used, and thus there is no significant effect on the reduction of the number of input strokes.

In the vowel input using "ㅡ", "." And "ㅣ" three vowel elements, if a "." Button is input after an arbitrary consonant (eg, "a" "ㅡ" is entered, ". + ㅡ" is recognized as "ㅗ" and "high" is displayed. In other words, a complete type of Hangul is not displayed in the middle of the input. However, if you enter a vowel by combining modern Korean vowels ("ㅡ", "a", "ㅣ" in this example), you can press any button assigned to "a" There is an advantage in that when you lose, you can display Hangul in full form like "a". Even if "ㅓ = a + a" is applied, "." Is displayed for "10" input, and if "0" is pressed once again, a complete form of Hangul can be displayed as "" ". Of course, the problem of recognizing and identifying a particular alphabet (or Hangul character) by a specific procedure (algorithm) and the problem of displaying this recognized specific alphabet (or Hangul character) are separate problems.

Also, it is a matter of course that the problem of how to display the code form representing the Korean character or the Korean character in the proper form on the keypad button for the input method (input procedure) and the input method is a separate problem. For example, the vowel element "." In the [0] button, as shown in Figure 4-5. The representation on the keypad buttons is deformable, as it is possible to enter a vowel by considering the [0] button as the "a" button on the keypad (the red dot in the number "0"). We have already mentioned in the earlier application that this input method can be applied to keypads that are not markedly Hangeul. An example of a variation of some keypad notation is shown in FIG. 4-12. FIG. 4-12 is a keypad for displaying "A" and "B" simultaneously by putting "+" in the number "0 (Zero)", ) Is a keypad example that allows you to associate "a" with "ㅓ" by putting a "- a" shape in front of ".". In addition, as shown in Fig. 4-14, a keypad example in which "a" and "ㅓ" are attached to the figure "0" to be. The type of temporary display during input may also be varied. Figure 4-15 shows an example of "a" and "ㅓ" respectively. In other cases, the number " 0 " may be displayed separately as shown in FIG. 4-15, and various modifications other than the application of the vowel combination method of the present invention are possible. It is self-evident. In the illustrative drawing, " heh " is indicated by a light gray color, which means that " heh "

를 표시할 수 있다 (도 4-13 에서와 마찬가지로 "ㅏ"를 우선 연상할 수 있도록 하여 좌측 왼편의 수평선을 회색으로 한 사례로 회색으로 표시된 부분이 없는 경우도 포함함). 또는 해당버튼을 이용하여 1상하향모음을 입력하는 경우

형태를 버튼상에 표시할 수 있다. 다른 경우에서와 마찬가지로 입력 중간에 표시되는 형태로 사용될 수도 있음은 마찬가지이다. 해당 버튼을 이용하여 우선적으로 입력되는 모음에 따라 첫번째 제시한

형태의 좌우대칭형 또는 두번째 제시한

형태의 상하대칭형이 이용될 수 있다. (이러한 형상이 [0] 버튼에 표시될 경우) 다른 사례에서와 마찬가지로 숫자 "0" 이 함께 표시되거나 함께 표시되지 않을 수 있고, 역시 "ㅎ" 도 함께 표시되거나 표시되지 않을 수도 있다. 제시하는 형상은 어느 광고에 나오는 "우주의 질서와 땅의 조화" 또 거기에 인간중심(人間中心)의 사상을 담고자 한 것이다. When inputting one or more of "one up / down vowel (a, b, c, t)" using a specific button (eg, [0] button) As follows. As a variation of the "- a" form shown in Figure 4-13

(As in FIG. 4-13, "a" is reminiscent of "a", and the horizontal line on the left-hand side is gray). Or if you enter 1 up / down vowel using the corresponding button

The shape can be displayed on the button. As in other cases, it can be used in a form that is displayed in the middle of the input. By using the corresponding button, the first

Symmetrical or second proposed form

Upper and lower symmetrical shapes of the shape can be used. (Such a shape is displayed on the [0] button), the number "0" may or may not be displayed together, as in other cases, and may also be displayed or not displayed together. The form presented is the "harmony of the order of the universe and the earth" in any advertisement and the idea of human centeredness.

형태 또는

형태에서 각각 왼쪽, 아래쪽에 흐린 회색으로 표현된 분은, 다른 키패드 도면에서 "ㅎ"을 표시할 수도 있고 표시하지 않을 수도 있다고 한 것처럼, 표시될 수도 있고 표시되지 않을 수도 있음은 쉽게 알 수 있다.

형태에서 좌측의 회색부분을 제외하면, 도4-10 에서 동그라미 또는 숫자 "0" 안에 "ㅏ" 가 있는 형상과 유사하게, "ㅏ"에 동그라미 또는 숫자 "0"이 걸쳐있는 형상이 된다.

형태는 도4-13에서 "-ㅏ" 에 동그라미 또는 숫자"0"이 걸쳐 있는 모양인데, 마찬가지로 도4-12의 "+"에 동그라미 또는 숫자 "0"이 걸쳐있는 모양으로 변형될 수도 있음은 자명하다.

Form or

It can be easily seen that a person who is expressed in gray and gray on the left and the bottom in the form may or may not display, as if he or she may or may not display "he" in another keypad drawing.

Except for the gray portion on the left side of the shape, the shape is such that a circle or number " 0 " spans " a &quot;, similar to the shape in Fig. 4-10 having a " a " in a circle or number " 0 &quot;.

The shape is a shape in which a circle or a numeral " 0 " spans "- a" in FIG. 4-13 and likewise may be transformed into a shape in which a circle or a number "0" It is obvious.

As mentioned, the characteristics of Hangul can represent plain vowel sounds (eg, "a"), lattice voices corresponding to the vowels (eg "ㅋ") and vowel consonants (eg "ㄲ" (Eg, "a") is displayed on the keypad and the remaining consonants are naturally associated with the input (eg, the control processing method, the repetitive selection method, the transformation alphabet 3+ all input methods, etc.). One of the great characteristics of Hangul is that it is possible to construct a concise keypad (placing a minimal number of keys on a button) as exemplified by the characteristics of Hangul, the most scientific character system on earth Of course. However, it is obvious that the keypad assigned with the basic consonants (plain consonants) in the modified alphabets (lattice notes, light consonants, and consonants) is also included in the scope of the present invention. "ㅇ" and "ㅎ" can be displayed together on the keypad when the consonant consonant "ㅎ" is regarded as a modified alphabet (lattice or consonant) of "ㅇ" If considered as a modified alphabet (as mentioned in the earlier application, "ㅎ" can be the basic consonant in this case), "ㄴ" and "" "can be displayed together. It is also apparent that the keypad shown on the keypad button in combination with the plain alphabet and the modified alphabet in the illustrated figure is also within the scope of the present invention. In other words, it is also possible to display only the lattice notes along with the planar sounds on the keypad, and only the light consonants can be displayed on the keypad buttons together with the planar sounds, It is also possible to display all of them. In addition, it is obvious that all of the lattice sounds are displayed in addition to the plaintext, or only the loud consonants of some of the consonant sounds are displayed together with the plaintext.

Applicants have explained that the earlier application and all Korean keypads presented in this application are compatible. The structure of Hangul consists of a vowel on the left side of the consonant (ie, left cow model) and a vowel on the upper side of the consonant (ie, a box model). And in the notion of Koreans, "a" has the idea corresponding to the number "1", "b" corresponds to the number "2", and "c" corresponds to the number "3". This is because, in the case of constructing the serial number for item classification, (1), (2), (3), (4), ... I can write numbers like, "a", "me", "da", "la", ... Or ㉠, ㉡, ㉢, ㉣, ... It is also easy to learn from writing. "A", "b", "c", ... The letters ㉠, ㉡, ㉢, ... The presence in this KSC5601 character set is also proof of this. That is, the numbers 1, 2, 3, 4 ... In the order of "a", "b", "c", "d" ... It is obvious that assigning the best is the optimal form that conforms to our characters and numerical notions.

Another example is the use of a number (one, two, three, four, five, ...) instead of a number in the position of a consonant in the initial form of a ciphertext in the Joseon Dynasty. For example, "poetry" is represented by "seven ㅣ" and "mercur" by "five ㅓ". In fact, it is very easy for Koreans to find the original sentence by looking at the word or phrase that represents the number corresponding to the position of consonants in Hangul. This also applies to people who do not know these rules. For example, when the TV program called "Survival History Quiz" showed "3 ㅐ 5 ㅓ 4 ㅣ" in the sentences written in the Joseon Dynasty and asked what it meant, "all participants" matched that the original sentence was "bald." (Of course, the quiz participants did not know the rule that the first consonants were numbered)

Therefore, as shown in the drawing presented by the applicant, assigning a letter to a number button (in order) and assigning a vowel to a button at the bottom correspond to the numerical concept of Korean people associated with consonants, It is self-evident. In Korea, however, keyboards of Samsung Electronics using the three vowel elements "ㅡ", "." And "ㅣ" are widely used. Due to the influence of Samsung Electronics' keyboard, some companies have a desire to place a collection button (or a collection element button or a collection button) at the top of consonants. Although it is not preferable, it is also possible to arrange the [*], [0], and [#] buttons at the bottom of the keypad at the top of the numeric buttons [1], [2] Can be constructed. The sub-box pattern layout is contrary, but the consonants can be assigned to the numeric buttons in order. It is self-evident that the illustrative drawings are also included in the applicant's prior art category. In the example drawing, you can see the letters "Hangul" or "Hangul" ("Hangul"). "Hehe" is expressed in gray, which means that "hehe" may not be displayed. However, placing 10 digits on 10 numeric buttons ([1] - [0] buttons) by displaying "ㅎ" on the [0] button means accepting the current Korean standard keypad (KSC-xxxx) .

In the above example, all the vowels are input by using the three vowels "a", "ㅡ", "ㅣ" that are most frequently used in the Korean language (about 50% It will be appreciated that the same applies in all similar cases. For example, "a" includes applying any vowel except for "ㅡ", "ㅣ", "a", etc. (eg, any other vowel, including "ㅓ" or "ㅗ"). If you apply "ㅓ" instead of "a", you can make "ㅠ = ㅡ + ㅓ + ㅓ". In the above table, you can use a vowel ("ㅓ" . However, since the vowel "a" is overwhelmingly used (as mentioned, 22% of the total vowel frequency) than the other vowels, the case where the vowel "a" is not used is not good in terms of input efficiency.

Table 1 can be further generalized by treating the vowel with three vowels (and three vowel buttons) of (element) vowels "ㅡ", "ㅣ", and "X" In the table below, among the 21 Korean vowels, the vowel used as the vowel "X" among the 19 vowels excluding the vowels "ㅡ" and "び" is the button assigned to the vowel "X" It is obvious that tarot can be input.

collection Three collections to be combined X X One A ㅣ + X 2 ㅐ ㅣ + X + ㅣ 3 ㅑ ㅣ + X + X 4 ㅒ ㅣ + X + X + ㅣ 5 ㅓ X + ㅣ 6 ㅔ X + ㅣ + ㅣ 7 ㅕ X + X + ㅣ 8 ㅖ X + X + ㅣ + ㅣ 9 ㅗ X + - 10 ㅘ X + ㅡ + ㅣ + X 11 ㅙ X + ㅡ + ㅣ + X + ㅣ 12 ㅚ X + ㅡ + ㅣ 13 ㅛ X + X + - 14 ㅜ ㅡ + X 15 ㅝ ㅡ + X + X + ㅣ 16 ㅞ ㅡ + X + X + ㅣ + ㅣ 17 ㅟ ㅡ + X + ㅣ 18 ㅠ ㅡ + X + X 19 ㅡ ㅡ 20 ㅢ ㅡ + ㅣ 21 ㅣ ㅣ

This can be further generalized and the vowel can be entered by a combination similar to the above table using any three Korean vowel buttons. For example, the vowel "A", "B", "X" can be entered as an element vowel and the remaining vowels by a combination similar to the following. It is also clear that the vowels " A ", " B ", and " X " It would be desirable to use three vowels including "ㅡ", "ㅣ" and "a" for the convenience of the user and minimization of the number of inputs.

collection Three collections to be combined X X A A B B One A B + X 2 ㅐ B + X + B 3 ㅑ B + X + X 4 ㅒ B + X + X + B 5 ㅓ X + B 6 ㅔ X + B + B 7 ㅕ X + X + B 8 ㅖ X + X + B + B 9 ㅗ X + A 10 ㅘ X + A + B + X 11 ㅙ X + A + B + X + B 12 ㅚ X + A + B 13 ㅛ X + X + A 14 ㅜ A + X 15 ㅝ A + X + X + B 16 ㅞ A + X + X + B + B 17 ㅟ A + X + B 18 ㅠ A + X + X 19 ㅡ 20 ㅢ A + B 21 ㅣ

As suggested, the vowels can be entered efficiently using three Korean vowels ("a", "ㅡ", "ㅣ") (and three vowel buttons) An example of the vowel input method is as follows. The following is an example of using vowels "ㅓ", "ㅡ", "ㅣ". Here, it is assumed that the control processing method is not applied to the input of the consonant on the side. (In the following example, "ㅡ" or "ㅣ" may appear consecutively in the vowel input rule)

collection collection
decomposition Three collections to be combined (B), it is not applicable (A) (B) One A ㅣ + ㅣ ㅣ + ㅡ or ㅓ + ㅓ 2 ㅐ ㅣ + ㅓ
(ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ (X)) ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ 3 ㅑ ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅡ or
ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅡ 4 ㅒ ㅑ + ㅣ
A + ㅓ ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ or
ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅓ ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ or
ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ 5 ㅓ ㅓ 6 ㅔ ㅓ + ㅣ ㅓ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ ㅟ (B), ㅠ (B) 7 ㅕ ㅡ + ㅓ
(ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ (X)) 8 ㅖ ㅕ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅓ + ㅣ 9 ㅗ ㅣ + ㅡ or
ㅓ + ㅓ 10 ㅘ ㅗ + a ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅡ 11 ㅙ ㅘ + ㅣ
ㅚ + ㅓ ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ
ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅓ ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ
ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅓ 12 ㅚ ㅗ + ㅣ ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ 13 ㅛ ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅡ 14 ㅜ ㅡ + ㅡ 15 ㅝ ㅜ + ㅓ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅓ
ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅡ or
ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ (B-1) 16 ㅞ ㅝ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅓ + ㅣ or
ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅓ + ㅓ ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ or
ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ ㅝ (B-2) 17 ㅟ ㅜ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ ㅔ (B), ㅠ (B) 18 ㅠ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅡ ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ ㅔ (B), ㅟ (B) 19 ㅡ ㅡ 20 ㅢ ㅡ + ㅣ 21 ㅣ ㅣ

In the "Vowel decomposition" section above, digesting the diphthong is marked to help understand. The presentation of several (many) input rules for a vowel with (A), (B) and "or" shows that various examples are possible.

One of the characteristics of the above example is to input "a" and "ㅑ" by repeatedly pressing the "ㅣ" button and input "ㅜ" and "ㅠ" by repeated pressing of the vowel "ㅡ" button. That is, when the "ㅡ" button is pressed once, "ㅡ" is displayed, and when the button is pressed twice, the button is pressed, and when the button is pressed three times, the button is pressed. (As described in the applicant's earlier application, it is convenient to press the same button repeatedly and provides a natural feeling of input because it can have the feeling of adding a stroke according to the depression of the button)

Another feature is to input the remaining vowels using the horizontal line form and the vertical line form of the vowels "ㅡ" and "ㅣ". At this time, "ㅓ", "ㅢ", "ㅜ" are both a combination of "horizontal line type and vertical line type". Among these vocabulary, "ㅢ = ㅡ + ㅣ" is input. The vowel "ㅓ" can be entered by itself with the button "1" assigned to "ㅓ", and the vowel "ㅜ" can be input naturally by pressing the "ㅡ" button repeatedly. Also, the vowel "ㅟ = [ㅜ + ㅣ]" and "ㅕ" can also be expressed as "ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ" ㅕ = ㅡ + ㅓ "instead of" ㅡ = ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ ". "ㅐ" is also "ㅑ = ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ" and not by "ㅐ = ㅣ + ㅓ".

The characteristic of the above example is that it naturally inputs a vowel containing a vowel "ㅓ" (eg vowels ㅔ, ㅕ, ㅖ, ㅝ, ㅞ and furthermore ㅐ, ㅒ, ㅙ, I can do it. If you enter "ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ" in the case of "ㅕ", the number of the others becomes 3, and it becomes difficult to input "ㅟ = [ㅜ + ㅣ] = ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ". Of course, if you say "ㅟ = ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ", you can say "ㅕ = ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ", but "ㅜ" ㅡ), it seems that it is not good in terms of simplicity of input rules, user convenience, WYSWYG etc.

In the above table, the meaning of "(B) is not applicable" applies to only one vowel because the vowels "ㅔ", "ㅟ" and "ㅠ" are all "ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ" It means that you can do it.

The above example can be modified and changed to "ㅗ" or "에" according to the repetition of the "ㅡ" button or to "ㅓ" or "ㅕ" according to repetitive pressing of the "ㅣ" button. (Either or both of them). However, it will not be as good as the naturalness of the input and the convenience of the user, as shown in the above example.

In the above example, the input method except for the input case in which the vowel "ㅡ" or "ㅣ" appears consecutively at the start of the vowel process, is to input the modified alphabet (vowel / vowel consonant) by the control processing method (Provided that it does not conflict with the input rules of the case of inputting the modified alphabet by the control processing method). Likewise, the input cases in Table 1 can be selectively applied to the above examples in cases where they do not conflict with the above examples (ie, they are not defined identically for other vowels). It is apparent that the present invention can be applied to the entirety of the present invention.

Next, enter "ㅓ", "ㅕ", "" "," ㅑ ", etc. by repetition of the vowels" ㅡ "and" ㅣ " This is an example of using the three vowel buttons "a", "ㅡ", and "ㅣ" to input the remaining vowels using a vertical line combination.

collection collection
decomposition Three collections to be combined When (B) is applied, (A) (B) One A A ㅣ + ㅣ ㅛ (A), ㅑ (A-4) 2 ㅐ A + l ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ 3 ㅑ A + ㅡ or
ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ or
ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅡ or
ㅣ + ㅣ ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅡ 4 ㅒ ㅑ + ㅣ A + ㅡ + ㅣ ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ 5 ㅓ A + a 6 ㅔ ㅓ + ㅣ A + a + l ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ ㅟ (B), ㅠ (B) 7 ㅕ ㅡ + a or
ㅡ + a + or
A + a + a or ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ ㅟ (A) 8 ㅖ ㅕ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ or
A + a + a + a 9 ㅗ ㅣ + ㅡ 10 ㅘ ㅗ + a ㅣ + ㅡ + a 11 ㅙ ㅘ + ㅣ ㅣ + ㅡ + a + ㅣ 12 ㅚ ㅗ + ㅣ ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ 13 ㅛ ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅡ 14 ㅜ ㅡ + ㅡ 15 ㅝ ㅜ + ㅓ ㅡ + ㅡ + a or
ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅡ ㅡ + ㅡ + a + or
ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ (A-2) 16 ㅞ ㅝ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅡ + a + ㅣ or
ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅡ + a + a + ㅣ or
ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ 17 ㅟ ㅜ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ ㅔ (B), ㅠ (B) 18 ㅠ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅡ ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ ㅔ (B), ㅟ (B) 19 ㅡ ㅡ 20 ㅢ ㅡ + ㅣ 21 ㅣ ㅣ

The frequency of use of vowels "ㅓ", "ㅡ", "ㅣ" is about 40% of the frequency of use of the whole vowel and the frequency of use of vowels "a", "ㅡ" and "ㅣ" is about 50% "," ㅡ ", and" ㅣ "can be effective on the input side. And vowels containing a vowel "a" (eg, "ㅐ", "ㅑ", "ㅒ", "ㅘ", "ㅙ", etc.). However, there is a disadvantage that it can not input "ㅕ = ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ" in order to input "ㅟ = ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ". Therefore, if you type "ㅕ = a + a + a", it will be "a", "ㅓ", "ㅕ" depending on the push of the "a" button.

As described above, it is possible to apply only one of the input methods to one vowel or to apply various ones at the same time. Likewise, if there are a number of vowels with the same input value (the same vowel combination in the above example), then only one can be done.

In the case of "ㅝ" input (A), "ㅝ = ㅡ + ㅡ + a" means that there is no Korean vowel to be combined with vowel "ㅜ" It can be seen that the number of batters can be reduced. However, it is a disadvantage in terms of simplicity and consistency of input rules. Therefore, "ㅝ = ㅡ + ㅡ + a" can be input at the same time as "ㅝ = [ㅜ + ㅓ] = ㅡ + ㅡ + a +" as in (B) At the same time, it is possible to use the combination of the horizontal lines and vertical lines of the vowels "ㅡ" and "ㅣ" in the input of ".".

Also, as mentioned above, it is apparent that there is compatibility between the keypads of FIGS. (For example, the input method described in 4-10 can be applied in 4-9)

In a similar case, we also use three vowels of modern Korean, using "vowel", "" "," ㅣ " , "" "And" ㅛ "are input by repeated pressing of the" a "button, and" ㅗ "and" ㅛ "are entered by a horizontal line / (Ie, a, ㅑ, ㅓ, ㅕ, ㅗ) with a combination of "ㅡ" and "ㅣ" (ie, "ㅗ = ㅣ + ㅡ" , ㅛ, ㅜ, ㅠ), and the remaining vowels are entered as a combination of these vowels.

collection collection
decomposition Three collections to be combined When (B) is applied, (A) (B) One A A 2 ㅐ A + l 3 ㅑ A + a 4 ㅒ ㅑ + ㅣ A + a + l 5 ㅓ ㅣ + ㅣ 6 ㅔ ㅓ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ 7 ㅕ ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ 8 ㅖ ㅕ + ㅣ ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ 9 ㅗ ㅣ + ㅡ 10 ㅘ ㅗ + a ㅣ + ㅡ + a 11 ㅙ ㅘ + ㅣ ㅣ + ㅡ + a + ㅣ 12 ㅚ ㅗ + ㅣ ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ 13 ㅛ ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅡ 14 ㅜ ㅡ + ㅡ 15 ㅝ ㅜ + ㅓ
ㅠ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ or
ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ 16 ㅞ ㅝ + ㅣ
ㅠ + ㅣ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ or
ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ 17 ㅟ ㅜ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ 18 ㅠ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅡ 19 ㅡ ㅡ 20 ㅢ ㅡ + ㅣ 21 ㅣ ㅣ

In the above example, a combination of the vowels "ㅡ" and "ㅣ" is used only for "ㅗ" and "ㅛ", which are not input by repeated pressing of the "ㅡ" button among the 10 basic vowels. The combination of "ㅡ" and "ㅣ" is used for the input of "ㅔ" as "ㅔ = ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ". If you make a combination of vowels "ㅡ" and "ㅣ" instead of "ㅕ = ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ" and you say "ㅕ = ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ", "ㅔ = [ㅓ + ㅣ] =" ㅣ + + ㅣ. "In addition to the 10 basic vowels, all vowels are entered as a combination of 10 basic vowels to be input above, except" ㅞ = [ㅜ + ㅔ] = ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ "and" ㅔ "in" ㅞ "as" ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ ".

In the above, input rules such as "ㅗ", "ㅛ", "ㅔ", etc. in the input of vowels using the combination of "ㅡ" and "ㅣ" Of course, can be applied.

The following is an example of inputting a Korean vowel by using three Korean vowels (and three vowel buttons). First, the 21 vowels used in modern Korean are classified according to the vertical / horizontal form for convenience.

"ㅡ" is called "horizontal vowel" for convenience, and "ㅣ" is called "vertical vowel" for convenience. "ㅘ", "ㅙ", "ㅚ", "ㅝ", "ㅞ", "ㅟ", and "ㅢ" including "ㅡ" and "ㅣ" are called "vertical and horizontal vowel." , "ㅛ", "" "," ㅠ "are referred to as" horizontal (basic) vowel ", and a form with a small stroke added including" ㅣ " The "a", "ㅐ", "ㅑ", "ㅒ", "ㅓ", "ㅔ", "ㅕ", "ㅖ"

In addition, the 10 basic vowels (a, ㅑ, ㅓ, ㅕ, ㅗ, ㅛ, ㅜ, ㅠ, ㅡ, ㅣ) "" "," ㅑ "," ㅑ "," "", "ㅓ" and "ㅕ" are the right, ㅠ "is the downward vowel, and the basic vowels" ㅡ "and" ㅣ "can be called the vowel vowels. If you divide it further, you can say that "a" is a "1-right-hand vowel" with one small stroke added to the right, "ㅑ" The other vowels (ㅓ, ㅕ, ㅗ, ㅛ, ㅜ, ㅠ) can be called as well. Upward vowels and downward vowels can be combined to form an "upside-down vowel." The right vowel and the upward vowel can be combined to form an "upper vowel vowel", and vowel vowel vowels can be similarly called. The vowels "ㅗ" and "ㅜ" can be collectively referred to as "1-up and down vowel", and the vowels "a" and "ㅓ" collectively can be referred to as "1-vowel vowel". Similarly, "ㅛ" and "ㅠ" can be combined to form a "two-up-down vowel", and "ㅑ" and "ㅕ" Among the vowels other than the 10 basic vowels, "ㅔ" and "ㅖ" can be classified as similar.

* Upward vowels can be input according to repetitive pressing of the buttons assigned with "ㅡ" based on the unvoiced vowels "ㅡ" and "ㅣ", and downward vowels can be input. Or both the up and down vowels may be input. Likewise, it is possible to input a right-handed vowel in accordance with repetitive pressing of a button assigned with an unvoiced vowel "ㅣ", input a right-handed vowel, input a one-sided vowel, It is also possible to have all the vowels entered. It is a matter of course that the selection order according to repetitive pressing can be determined in consideration of the dictionary order or frequency of use. For reference, the order of use of Korean vowels is "a, ㅣ, ㅡ, ㅓ, ㅗ, ㅜ, ㅕ, ㅐ, ㅔ, ㅢ, ㅘ, ㅚ, ㅛ, ㅑ, ㅝ, ㅟ, ㅠ, ㅖ, ㅙ, ㅒ ", and the top nine vowels represent 90% of the preliminary use frequency.

First, the method of combining vowels using the three vowel elements "ㅡ", ".", And "ㅣ" based on Figs. 4-5 is now widely used. Of course, you may or may not be able to put "he" in the [0] button. In the present method (a combination of a combination of a combination of a set used by Samsung Electronics), a complete Hangul character is not formed in the middle of inputting characters such as "high", "bridge", " . (Eg, "a => a. => A. = => Bridges" when typing "bridge"). That is, this occurs when inputting left upward vowels (left vowels and upward vowels). Therefore, it is possible to solve this problem by inputting the upward vowel and the left vowel by repeatedly pressing "ㅡ" and "ㅣ". For example, if you define that an upward vowel is to be entered in response to repeated presses of a button assigned to "ㅡ", "ㅡ" => "ㅗ" => "ㅛ" If you press "1 ***", it will become "a => that => high =>" bridge. "This means that in the middle of the input as in the existing method," a "or" a " Likewise, when a leftward vowel is input by repeatedly pressing the button assigned to "ㅣ", it is possible to make "ㅣ => ㅓ => ㅕ" by pressing the corresponding button repeatedly. It can be seen that the convenience of the input is higher than the conventional method of inputting "ㅗ", "ㅓ", etc. By combining the remaining vowels with the existing methods, However, when the "ㅣ" button is repeatedly pressed to input the leftward vowel, the input of "ㅔ", "ㅖ", etc. is not natural. Using a combination of equilibrium vowels, we can say that "ㅔ = ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ (input middle ㅡ + ㅣ = ㅖ ") as" ㅖ = ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ "as you can.

The user can input " up / down vowel " by repeatedly pressing the button assigned " - ". For example, "ㅡ" would be "ㅡ => ㅗ => ㅜ" (=> "ㅛ => ㅠ"), depending on the repetition of the assigned button. The order in which the " up / down vowel " is selected in accordance with the repetitive pressing may be arbitrarily determined. It can be decided in consideration of dictionary order and frequency of use. It is preferable to select "1-up / down vowel" which is relatively frequently used rather than "2-up / down vowel" having a small frequency of use. Since the number of times of repetitive pressing to input a specific vowel is too great for convenience of input and intuitiveness, for "2-up / down vowel", input is made by a combination of 1-up vowel vowel and " . For example, "ㅛ = [ㅗ + ㆍ] = ㅡ + ㅡ + (= ** 0)". Also [ . . . ] Is a decomposition of the vowel for the sake of understanding. Here, " ㆍ " may be considered as a vowel element or as a follow-up control. It is natural to think that there is "ㅛ" in the succeeding alphabet of "ㅗ". In other words, after inputting "ㅗ", select the succeeding control (in the example, [0] button 1) to input the subsequent alphabet of "ㅗ" (note control processing method, chain type control processing method). (= 0 **) can be used. However, when referring to 4-5, " ㆍ " is displayed in the middle of the input so that full Hangul characters are displayed . "ㅠ = [ㅜ + ㆍ] = ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅡ + ㆍ (= *** 0)". Although the number of "ㅠ" input is increased by one compared to the existing input method, "ㅠ" is a vowel with few use frequency, so it does not affect the increase of the total input number.

Likewise, it is possible to cause the upward vowel to be input by repeatedly pressing the button to which the " - " is assigned, and to allow the downward vowel to be input by repeatedly pressing the button assigned " If the upward vowel is to be input, the "ㅡ" => "ㅗ", => "ㅛ" will correspond to the repeated pressing of the button assigned to "ㅡ" "ㅜ" => "ㅠ" will be. Likewise, it is possible to input a left vowel or a right vowel by repeatedly pressing the button assigned "ㅣ".

The same applies to buttons assigned "ㅣ". In other words, if the left and right vowels are input according to the repetitive pressing of the buttons assigned to "ㅣ", "ㅣ => a => ㅓ" (=> "ㅑ => ㅕ"). For example, if you display the input values, "ㅣ = #", "a = ##", "ㅓ = ###",. . . . Putting "ㅑ" and "ㅕ" in parentheses means you may or may not be allowed to type. There are three inputs ("###") in the input of the vowel "ㅓ", which is used for many uses here. ㅕ = [ㅓ + ㆍ] = ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ + = (== ###) with "ㅑ = [a +]] = ㅣ + ㅣ + # 0) ". Also, the input of "ㅔ", "ㅐ", "ㅖ", "ㅒ", etc. is not self-explanatory. Of course, it is possible to apply the existing input method (Samsung Electronics method) or combination of vertical / horizontal vowels to inputs such as "ㅔ", "ㅐ", "ㅖ", "ㅒ" There are a lot of rules. If you use a combination of horizontal and vertical vowels, you can use "ㅔ = ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ" and "ㅐ = ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ", but if you use a small stroke or short stroke ("ㅔ" There is some unnaturalness in combining the "ㅡ" with the middle stroke). In order to overcome this, it is possible to make "ㅣ" => "a" => "ㅓ" => "ㅐ" => "ㅔ" depending on the repetition of the buttons assigned to "ㅣ" ㅖ "can be input by a combination of" ㅐ "," ㅔ "and" ㆍ "respectively. There is also a disadvantage in that the number of repeated presses (eg, 5 times) is often increased in the input of a vowel, which is also a vowel (eg, "ㅔ"). It is also natural for me to input "ㅐ = [a +]] = ..." and "ㅔ = [ㅓ + ㅣ] = ..." in the input of "ㅐ" and "하지" There are also drawbacks that can not be achieved.

In the above-mentioned additional example, in order to apply the control processing method to the input of the modified alphabets (lattice note, light consonant, and consonant consonant) since the vowel is inputted by repeatedly pressing the vowel button, The maximum number of iterations for generation should be one more. For example, if the "ㅡ" button is pressed repeatedly, "ㅡ" => "ㅗ" => "ㅜ" (= 1 ****) ". This is the same in other embodiments. There is a disadvantage in that it is necessary to repeatedly press a number of times to input one character. It is always possible to input a consonant with repetitive pressing of a consonant button like the repetition selection method.

And that the following description is at the core of this application. Since the input method and keypad of Samsung Electronics is widely used and Samsung Electronics is the biggest company in Korea, the applicant's prior technology using "Korean 3 vowels and combinations" does not conflict with existing technology with Samsung Electronics Despite the lack of expertise in patenting, SMEs are concerned about adopting the applicant's technology even if they want to adopt it. The following additional examples are presented.

We have pointed out that the input of "ㅐ" and "ㅔ" in the example using the vowel elements of "ㅡ", "" "and" ㅣ " In addition, when the up and down vowels and the left and right vowels are inputted by repeated pressing of the "ㅡ" and "ㅣ" buttons, there is also a point that the input number increases. In the following example, we use the modern Korean vowel "ㅡ", "a", "ㅣ" or "ㅡ", "ㅓ", "ㅣ" I can see the case. All the keypads in Figures 4- * are compatible. In particular, in drawings that show "ㆍ" on the [0] button and "a" on the drawing (or "+", "-", "H", " You can think of the [0] button marked "ㆍ" as a button marked "a", and the [0] button marked "0" as a "ㆍ". Quot ;, " a " or the like in the example drawing is used to input " ㆍ " which can be regarded as " vowel element " or " subsequent control ".

In order to explain the present embodiment, the same parts as those in the case of using "ㅡ", "揃", and "ㅣ" are mainly described as parts avoiding explanations and overcoming cases pointed out as disadvantages. First, we use "ㅡ", "a", "ㅣ". You can enter "ㅐ" and "ㅔ" by repeatedly pressing the "ㅣ" button. The order of selection by repeated pressing of the " I " button can be arbitrarily determined. For example, if "ㅐ" is selected first, "ㅐ = ㅣ + ㅣ (= ##)" becomes "ㅔ = ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ (= ###)". Inputting "ㅐ" as "ㅣ + ㅣ" means that two vertical lines can be seen in the shape of "ㅐ", so it can adapt naturally to the user. As you mentioned, you can remind the user that "ㅐ" is followed by "ㅣ" once again and a small stroke of "ㅐ" is pushed to the left. As an input example, "dog = 1 ##" becomes "dog = 1 ###".

"ㅒ" can be input in a combination of "ㅐ" and "ㆍ" (the order of combination can be arbitrarily determined), and "ㅖ" can be naturally input in combination of "ㅔ" and "ㆍ". For example, referring to FIG. 4-5, "ㅒ = [ㅐ + ㆍ] = ㅣ + ㅣ + (= ## 0)" and "ㅖ = [ㅔ + ㆍ] = ㅣ + ㅣ + (= ### 0) ". (= # 0) "and" ㅖ = [ㅔ + ㆍ] = ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ " ㅣ + a (= ### 0) ". 4-10 to Fig. 4-13, the user should set the [0] button containing "a" in the circle or number "0" to "ㆍ" or the " BET) button, "you can easily know what you need to enter. This is the same in the following. Another example is "ㅒ = [ㅐ + ㅡ] = ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅡ (= ## *)" and "ㅖ = [ㅔ + ㅡ] = ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅡ (= ". This also shows that the "-" button is used like a control button (subscript control or follow-on control). Likewise, the order in which they are combined with the "ㅡ" button can be as long as they do not conflict with the input values of the other vowels, or the "ㅡ" This shows that the diphthongs other than the vowels inputted by the repetitive pressing of the same button can be inputted by various combining methods.

"A" => "ㅓ" (=> "ㅑ" => "ㅕ") as a repetitive push of the button assigned to "a". That is, "1-sideways vowel" or "sideways vowel" is inputted by repeated depression of the button to which "a" is assigned. The selection order according to repetitive pressing can be determined in consideration of the dictionary order and frequency of use. (1) to (4), (4), (5), and (5), the input method of FIG. "" "=>" ㅓ "=>" ㅕ "=>" ㅑ "depending on the repetition of the buttons assigned to" a " Of course. Here, too, the number of repetitive pressing is increased when a vowel such as "ㅑ", "ㅕ" is input. (= 0 *) "and" ㅕ = [ㅓ + ㅡ] (= 00 *) "using the input of" ㅑ "and" ㅕ " The input of the "left and right vowel" using the repeated pressing of the button assigned to "a" can be applied to the case of inputting using the three vowels "ㅡ", "ㅓ", "ㅣ" For example, using "ㅓ" => "a" (=> "ㅕ" => "ㅑ") using the repeated pressing of the button assigned to "ㅓ" Or "ㅓ") allows you to enter a "left-right vowel" including the vowel assigned to the button by repeatedly pressing the assigned button. You can enter another vowel by repeatedly pressing the button assigned to "ㅣ" In addition, by allowing a vowel with similarities in shape to be entered, it is possible to place the least number of keys on the keypad, For example, if you press a button with "a" assigned once, "a" will be entered, and if you press twice with "a" Quot ;, which is a form in which the right and left sides are changed around the vertical line, is inputted, so that the user can easily remind the rule that the " a "

The input of a left-right vowel, a left-right vowel, or a left-right vowel as a repetitive push of a button assigned with "a" (or "ㅓ") is shown in a graph form as shown in FIG. Compared to the conventional method of combining vowel elements, "" ", which is frequently used, can be input in one, while" ㅕ ", which is a relatively frequently used vowel (or" ㅕ " "), The total number of strokes is much smaller than that of the conventional vowel combination method. Also, since the vowel can be input by repetitive pressing of the same button, the convenience of input is also increased. Similarly, when the vowel "ㅗ" or the vowel "ㅜ" is used instead of the vowel "a", it can be easily seen that the up / down vowel (or 1-up / down vowel) can be input by repeatedly pressing the corresponding button.

When the user presses the button assigned to "a" (or "ㅓ") repeatedly to input a two-sided vowel ("ㅑ", "ㅕ"), the number of times of pressing is repeatedly pressed to input one vowel There is a disadvantage. (= 00 *) as shown in the previous application, and "ㅑ = [+ + ㅡ] = a + ㅡ (= 0 * have. This shows that combinations of vowels other than vowels ("a", "ㅓ") that are basically input by repeated presses can appear in various ways.

It can be easily understood that in the input of the vowel "ㅘ", "ㅘ = [ㅗ + a] = ㅡ + ㅡ + a (= ** 0)". It is possible to input an upward vowel or an up / down vowel or a 1-up / down vowel by using the repeated pressing of the "ㅡ" button. "Upper or lower vowel" shall be indicated as "Upper vowel". Likewise, if you press the button assigned to "ㅡ" repeatedly to input a 1-up / down vowel such as "ㅡ" => "ㅗ" => "ㅜ" (= **) as "ㅛ = [ㅗ + ㆍ] = ㅡ + + (= ** 0)" as a combination of "+" (= 00 *) "has the same code value as" ㅘ (= 00 *) "when inputting" 0 " Therefore, it is possible to make "ㅡ" => "ㅗ" => "ㅛ" by inputting the upward vowel by repeatedly pressing the "ㅡ" button. That is to say, "ㅛ = ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅡ (= ***)" and it does not conflict or overlap with "ㅘ = ** 0". Downward vowels can be entered as shown in the previous application (eg, Table 1 and other examples). For example, you could say "ㅠ = ㅡ + a + (= * 00)" with "ㅜ = ㅡ + a (= * 0)

In the input of the remaining vowels, "ㅟ = [ㅜ + ㅣ] = ㅜ + ㅣ = 0 #", "ㅝ = [ㅜ + ㅓ] = ㅜ + ㅓ (= * 00) (= * 000 #) If "ㅡ" is used to input all the up and down vowels with the assigned button, "ㅡ" is repeated for the assigned button "" "=>" ㅜ "=>" ㅛ "=>" ㅠ "according to the press. There is a disadvantage that the number of input is increased in the input of" ㅛ "," ㅠ " (= *** 00) "in the input of the vowel" ㅝ "," ㅝ = [ㅜ + ㅓ] = ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅡ + (= *** 00) "instead of" ㅝ = [ㅜ + ㅓ] = ㅡ + ㅡ + + + = - ). "In other words, after inputting" ㅜ ", press" a "button once to input" ㅝ "," a "to" a "," ㅓ " At the same time, "+", "-", "H" 4-12 to Fig. 4-14, there is an advantage in that it is possible to input "ㅝ" more naturally. In the input of "ㅛ" and "ㅠ" (= * ##) ", for example," ㅛ = ㅣ + ㅣ + = (= ## *) " ) ".

Some of the above contents are summarized in table format, as shown in Figure 4-29. One vowel was entered, and only some vowel input cases where the same button was repeated more than three times were summarized. Not all the explanations are listed in a table, and the contents of the table are not drawn up as a drawing. The most important characteristic of the present embodiment is that when the user attempts to define a rule for inputting a vowel by repeatedly pressing the three vowel element buttons, the input of "ㅐ" and "ㅔ", which are the most unnatural and difficult to process, , "" "Or" ㅓ "by repeatedly pressing the" a "button, or" ㅡ "by repeatedly pressing the" ㅡ "button, , "ㅗ", "ㅛ", and so on. The vowels input by repetitive pressing of the vowel button, which is a core part in this embodiment, are indicated by gray fill in the graph. It is shown that it is possible to input the remaining vowels naturally by using these vowels which can be input by repetition pressing in this way, and it is shown that various combinations of one vowel are possible in the input of the remaining vowels. It will be apparent to those skilled in the art that the vowel combinations in other embodiments may be selectively or additionally applied, and that there may be many variations, as long as they do not conflict with the input of a particular vowel.

collection collection
decomposition Three collections to be combined 4- * Example Button Input Value on Keypad One A A 0 2 ㅐ ㅣ + ㅣ ## 3 ㅑ
A + a A + a + a or
A + a 000 or
0* 4 ㅒ ㅑ + ㅣ or
ㅐ + ㆍ or
ㅐ + ㅡ A + a + a + or
ㅣ + ㅣ + a or
ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅡ 000 # or
## 0 or
## * 5 ㅓ A + a 00 6 ㅔ ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ ### 7 ㅕ
ㅓ + ㅡ A + a + a + a or
A + a + a 0000
00 * 8 ㅖ ㅔ + ㆍ or
ㅔ + ㅡ ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ + a or
ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅡ ### 0 or
### * 9 ㅗ ㅡ + ㅡ ** 10 ㅘ ㅗ + a ㅡ + ㅡ + a **0 11 ㅙ ㅘ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅡ + a + ㅣ **0# 12 ㅚ ㅗ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ ** # 13 ㅛ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅡ *** 14 ㅜ ㅡ + ㆍ ㅡ + a *0 15 ㅝ ㅜ + ㅓ ㅡ + a + a + a * 000 16 ㅞ ㅜ + ㅓ + ㅣ ㅡ + a + a + a + ㅣ * 000 # 17 ㅟ ㅜ + ㅣ ㅡ + a + ㅣ *0# 18 ㅠ ㅡ + a + a * 00 19 ㅡ ㅡ * 20 ㅢ ㅡ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅣ * # 21 ㅣ ㅣ #

In the above embodiment, "ㅐ" is input by repeatedly pressing the "ㅣ" button and "ㅓ" is input by repeated pressing of the "a" button. On the keypad assigned to "a" and "l", "ㅐ = [a + l] = ..." As shown in FIG. Of course, in the embodiment related to Table 7, " ㅐ = [a + l] =. As shown in FIG. However, "ㅐ = [a + l] = ..." Can be input as "ㅣ" => "ㅓ" (=> "ㅔ") by repeated pressing of the button assigned to "ㅣ". In other words, "1-left vowel" is input by repeated pressing of "ㅣ". Here, "ㅓ = ㅣ + ㅣ (= ##)", so "ㅔ" is a combination of "ㅓ" and "ㅣ" naturally "ㅔ = [ㅓ + ㅣ] = ㅓ + . For example, "1 = ############################################################################################################################################################################################################################################### You only need to know the input rules.

Likewise, an upward vowel is input by pressing the "-" button repeatedly. That is, "ㅡ" => "ㅗ" => "ㅛ" is input according to repetitive pressing of the "ㅡ" button. The user will only know the input rule that a small stroke is filled in the upper side (i.e., the consonant side) by repeated pressing of the button assigned with " do. The inputs of the downward vowels "ㅜ" and "ㅠ" can also be input in the manner described in the earlier application and other embodiments (eg, Table 1). For example, you could say "ㅠ = ㅡ + a + (= * 00)" with "ㅜ = ㅡ + a (= * 0)

Quot; = [a + l] = a + l (= 0 #) " for the input of " The input of "ㅕ", "ㅒ", "ㅖ" is combined with "ㅓ", "ㅐ", "ㅔ" and "ㆍ (buttons with" a "assigned to" 0 "in the example keypad) Can be input. (= 0 # 0) "to" ㅕ = [ㅓ + ㆍ] = ㅣ + ㅣ + a (= ## 0) [ㅔ + ㆍ] = ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㆍ (= ### 0) ". (= 0 # *) "to" ㅒ = [ㅓ + ㅡ] = ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅡ (= ## * [ㅔ + ㅡ] = ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅡ (= ### *) ". "ㅑ" can be input by changing the method of repetition of "a" or a subsequent alphabet by repeating the selection method and inputting "2" of the button assigned "a". That is, "ㅑ = a + a (= 00)". It can also be seen here that "ㅒ = [ㅑ + ㅣ] = a + a + ㅣ (= 00 #)". The remaining vowels can easily be entered in combination with the vowel input described above. (= ** #) as "ㅘ = [ㅗ + a] = ㅡ + ㅡ + a (= ** 0)" and "ㅙ = [ㅗ + ㅣ] (= * 0 #) "as" ㅟ = [ㅜ + ㅣ] = ㅡ + ㅣ (= * 0 #) "as" ㅗ + a + ㅣ] = ㅡ + ㅡ + + ㅓ + = ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ (= * 0 ##) "to" ㅞ = [ㅜ + ㅓ + ㅣ] = ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ (= * 0 ###) " can do.

In the above embodiment, the vowels are input by using three vowels "ㅡ", "a" and "ㅣ", and "ㅣ", "ㅓ" Enter "ㅔ" or "ㅣ" and "ㅓ" (because it can be "###" because it is "ㅔ = ㅓ + ㅣ") and press " , "ㅑ", "" "," ㅗ "," ㅛ "and so on with the repeated pressing of the assigned button" ㅡ " Input method. In the end, "ㅔ", "ㅐ", etc. which were unnatural in inputting vowels by using "ㅡ", "ㆍ", "ㅣ" It is shown that the combination of three modern Korean vowels can be used and the other vowels can be input naturally by using repetitive pressing. After inputting "ㅡ", the user repeatedly presses the assigned button once to enter "ㅗ". After inputting "ㅣ", the button assigned to "ㅣ" is pressed again to enter "ㅓ" It is easy to understand because it is consistent. The vowels other than the vowels input by repetitive pressing were easy to understand and naturally input by various methods. The rest of the vowels could be entered as a combination of the underlying vowel and the subsequent control buttons ([0] button). The user has already explained that the button to which "a" is assigned (the button marked "a" in the figure "0" in the example drawing) can be remapped as "ㆍ" in some cases. Some of the above contents are summarized in the table format as shown in Table 8, and in the form of a graph as shown in FIG. 4-30. Not all of the explanations are listed in a table, and the contents of the table are not drawn up as a drawing. In Figure 4-30, the vowel entered by the repetitive pressing, which is the most important part, is indicated by gray fill. When there are several methods for inputting the same vowel, all of them can be applied, or they can be selectively applied. For the sake of intuitiveness of the input method, the avoidance contents when the same button is pressed three times or more on one input of the character are summarized, and as for the input of the specific vow, It is also apparent that the method of FIG.

collection collection
decomposition Three collections to be combined 4- * Example Button Input Value on Keypad One A A 0 2 ㅐ A + l A + l 0# 3 ㅑ A + a 00 4 ㅒ ㅑ + ㅣ or
ㅐ + ㆍ or
ㅐ + ㅡ A + a + l or
A + l + a or
A + ㅣ + ㅡ 00 # or
0 # 0 or
0#* 5 ㅓ ㅣ + ㅣ ## 6 ㅔ ㅓ + ㅣ ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ ### 7 ㅕ ㅓ + ㆍ or
ㅓ + ㅡ ㅣ + ㅣ + a or
ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅡ ## 0 or
## * 8 ㅖ ㅔ + ㆍ or
ㅔ + ㅡ ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ + a or
ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅡ ### 0 or
### * 9 ㅗ ㅡ + ㅡ ** 10 ㅘ ㅗ + a ㅡ + ㅡ + a **0 11 ㅙ ㅘ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅡ + a + ㅣ **0# 12 ㅚ ㅗ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ ** # 13 ㅛ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅡ *** 14 ㅜ ㅡ + ㆍ ㅡ + a *0 15 ㅝ ㅜ + ㅓ ㅡ + a + ㅣ + ㅣ *0## 16 ㅞ ㅜ + ㅔ =
ㅜ + ㅓ + ㅣ ㅡ + a + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ *0### 17 ㅟ ㅜ + ㅣ ㅡ + a + ㅣ *0# 18 ㅠ ㅡ + a + a * 00 19 ㅡ ㅡ * 20 ㅢ ㅡ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅣ * # 21 ㅣ ㅣ #

Next, we show an example of combining vowels using three vowels "ㅡ", "ㅓ", and "ㅣ". Since "a", "a" and "ㅣ" are applied to Table 8 and related embodiments, detailed description is avoided. It is assumed that "ㅓ" is placed on the [0] button (ie, the [0] button is the "ㅓ" button) in the case of the 4 *

"=" "(=>" ㅐ ") can be input by repeatedly pressing the button assigned to" ㅣ "because the vowel" ㅓ "can be input with the button 1 assigned to" ㅓ " . (= ###) "as it is" ㅐ = [a + l] ", it is natural that" ㅐ = [a + l] = + + ㅣ = do. Can be naturally input to the vowel "ㅔ = [ㅓ + ㅣ] = ㅓ + ㅣ (= 0 #)". = (ㅐ + =) = + + ㅣ + + + + (= ## ## ## 으로 ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## # 0) ". "ㅕ" can be entered by pressing repeatedly the button assigned to ".". "ㅚ = [ㅗ + ㅣ] = ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ (= ** #)" and "ㅘ = [ㅗ + a] = ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ = = [ㅗ + a + ㅣ] = ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ (= ** ###). If we say "ㅠ = [ㅡ + ㆍ + ㆍ = = ㅡ + ㅓ + ㅓ (= * 00)", we get a conflict with ㅝ = [ㅜ + ㅓ] = ㅡ + ㅓ + ㅓ = All. In this case, "ㅠ" can be "ㅠ = ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ (= * ##)" as a combination of horizontal and vertical vowels. It is also applicable to the other embodiments that "ㅠ = ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ (= * ##)" in the input of the vowel "ㅠ"

Alternatively, as shown above, it is possible to input the up / down vowel with "ㅡ => ㅗ => ㅜ => ㅛ => ㅠ" by repeatedly pressing the button assigned with "ㅡ", and "ㅘ = [ㅗ + a ] = ㅗ + a (= ** ##) "and" ㅝ = [ㅜ + ㅓ] = ㅜ + ㅓ = *** 0 ". The remaining diphthongs can be treated as input to the vowels that constitute the diphthongs, and avoid further explanation.

For the input of the remaining vowels, the examples of other embodiments can be similarly used. Table 9 summarizes the above contents in the table, and FIG. 4-31 shows in a graph form. The most significant feature of the above embodiment is that when the remaining vowels are combined using the three vowels "ㅡ", "ㅓ" and "ㅣ", the "ㅣ" => "a" > One point to input "ㅐ", a point where "ㅓ" and "ㅕ" are entered as repetitive pressing of the button assigned "있다", and thus the overall vowel combination method is presented . And the remaining vowels can be input in various ways using a vowel input by one press and a repeated press.

collection collection
decomposition Three collections to be combined 4- * Example Button Input Value on Keypad One A ㅣ + ㅣ ## 2 ㅐ A + l ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ ### 3 ㅑ A + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅓ ##0 4 ㅒ ㅑ + ㅣ or
ㅐ + ㆍ ㅣ + ㅣ + a + ㅣ or
ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅓ ## 0 # or
###0 5 ㅓ ㅓ 0 6 ㅔ ㅓ + ㅣ 0# 7 ㅕ ㅓ + ㅓ 00 8 ㅖ ㅔ + ㆍ ㅓ + ㅣ + ㅓ 0 # 0 9 ㅗ ㅡ + ㅡ ** 10 ㅘ ㅗ + a ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ ** ## 11 ㅙ ㅘ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ ** ### 12 ㅚ ㅗ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ ** # 13 ㅛ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅡ *** 14 ㅜ ㅡ + ㆍ ㅡ + ㅓ *0 15 ㅝ ㅜ + ㅓ ㅡ + ㅓ + ㅓ + ㅓ * 000 16 ㅞ ㅜ + ㅓ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅓ + ㅓ + ㅓ + ㅣ * 000 # 17 ㅟ ㅜ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅓ + ㅣ *0# 18 ㅠ ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ * ## 19 ㅡ ㅡ * 20 ㅢ ㅡ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅣ * # 21 ㅣ ㅣ #

The embodiment related to Table 9 using "ㅡ", "ㅓ" and "ㅣ" is applied to the embodiment corresponding to the embodiment related to the contents of Table 8 among the embodiments using "ㅡ", "a" to be. The embodiment related to Table 7 as the embodiment using "ㅡ", "ㅓ", "ㅣ" has many parts similar to those of Table 7, so a detailed description will be avoided and briefly mentioned. "ㅓ => ((=> ㅕ => ㅑ)" by pressing repeatedly the button assigned to "ㅓ". That is, the left and right vowels are input by repeated depression of the "ㅓ" assignment button. It is the same that "ㅣ => ㅐ (=> ㅔ)" is repeatedly pressed for the button assigned to "ㅣ". However, since "ㅔ = [ㅓ + ㅣ] = ㅓ + ㅣ (= 0 #)", it is possible to make "ㅣ => ㅐ => ㅒ" have. (=> ㅛ => ㅠ) "(=> ㅛ => ㅛ) (" = => ㅗ => ㅛ " In other words, there should not be a vowel that "ㅓ" is followed by "ㅗ" but should be "ㅘ = [ㅗ + a] = ㅡ + ㅡ + a (= ** 00) &Quot; ㅘ = ** 0 ". The input of the remaining vowels can be similarly applied, and tables and graphs are omitted.

The features of the above embodiments (Table 7, Table 8, Table 9, and related description) are summarized as follows. (Or a 1-sided bar) as a repetitive push of a button assigned with "a", and a point " ㅣ "," ㅓ "," ㅔ ", or" ㅣ "," ㅐ "," ㅔ "are input by repeated pressing of the button assigned to" ㅣ ". In order to input a vowel by using three vowels "ㅡ", "ㅓ" and "ㅣ", the input of the left and right vowels (or 1 - left vowel) "," A "," ㅐ ", or" ㅣ "," ㅐ "," ㅒ "are input by repeatedly pressing the button assigned to the button. It is also possible to enter a vowel by using "ㅡ", "X", "ㅣ", and to input an upward vowel (or an upward vowel or a 1- vowel vowel) by repeatedly pressing the button assigned to "ㅡ" .

A set entered by pressing once or repeatedly the buttons assigned to "ㅡ", "a", "ㅣ" or "ㅡ", "ㅓ", "ㅣ" in Table 7, Table 8, Other vowels can be used selectively as long as they do not collide with vowel input in other embodiments. For example, after typing "ㅜ" in Table 8 (there are several ways to enter "ㅜ"), press the button assigned to "ㅣ" ([#] ㅟ "and press" ㅝ "again to enter" ㅝ ". This is natural because it inputs "ㅣ", "ㅓ", and "ㅔ" by repetition of the button assigned to "ㅣ" in Table 8. Likewise, after entering "ㅗ" in Table 9 (the input method of "ㅗ" may also be a method other than the method in Table 9), "ㅚ" is input by pressing the button assigned to "ㅣ" Press to enter "ㅘ", press again to enter "ㅙ". It is natural that "l", "a", "ㅐ" are inputted by repeatedly pressing the button assigned "ㅣ" in the embodiment related to Table 9. The use of repetitive pressing rather than the depression of the left and right buttons in the input of the diphthong tone may help improve the convenience of the input. Since the input method of "ㅚ", "ㅘ", "ㅙ" in the related example of Table 9 does not conflict with the input method of "ㅚ", "ㅘ", "ㅙ" In the embodiment, the "ㅚ", "ㅘ", and "ㅙ" input methods in the embodiment related to Table 9 can be applied. Similarly, since the "ㅟ", "ㅝ", "ㅞ" input method in the embodiment of Table 8 does not conflict with the input method of "ㅟ", "ㅝ", "ㅞ" In the embodiment, the "ㅟ", "ㅝ", and "ㅞ" input methods in the embodiment related to Table 9 can be applied.

If you press the button assigned to "ㅡ" repeatedly to input "1 - up / down vowel", "ㅡ => ㅗ => ㅜ" is repeatedly pressed. (ㅘ = [ㅚ + ㅣ] = ...) "in Table 9 is applied as shown in Table 8," ㅘ = [ㅗ + a] = ㅡ + ㅡ + ** = 0) ", so that" ㅛ = [ㅗ + ㆍ] = ㅡ + ㅡ + a (= ** 0) ". Likewise, you can do "ㅠ = [ㅜ + ㆍ] = ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅡ + a (= *** 0)". In Table 8 and the related embodiment, "ㅕ = [ㅓ + =] = ㅣ + ㅣ + a (= ## 0)". In addition, "ㅑ" is entered by repetitive pressing of the "a" button (pressing twice). By solving this, "ㅑ = [a +]] = a + a (= 00) In order to input 4 vertices (ㅑ, ㅕ, ㅛ, ㅠ) in the top, bottom, left, and right vowels, 1-up and down-left vowels (ie, a, ㅓ, ㅗ, You can see that the control or subsequent controls are combined in a regular way. Of course, the "a" button (the [0] button with "a" in the "0" in the example keypad) is used as the control button. In Table 8, "ㅖ", "ㅒ", etc. have been consistently entered as a combination of already corresponding vowels "ㅔ", "ㅐ" and "ㆍ (modified alphabet control or follow-up control) It can be seen that it is inputted by the rule. ("ㅒ = [ㅑ + ㅣ] = ..." can be entered as well.) The costumes "ㅔ" and "ㅐ" are called "2-vertical vowel" and "ㅔ" Vowel ". "ㅖ" can be called "2-left + 2 vertical vowels". In addition, "ㅐ" is called "1-wavy direction + 2 vertical vowels" and "ㅒ" is called "2-wavy direction + 2 vertical vowels".

Press "" "once to input" ㅣ "and press" "" once again to make it "ㅗ", so it is necessary to press repeatedly on the keypad button You do not need to display the input vowel together (eg do not include "ㅡ" in the [*] button). Of course, it is also obvious that all or a part of the vowels inputted by repeated pressing are displayed together on the keypad button. The user can only input "ㅣ", "ㅓ", ("ㅔ") as a repetition of the button assigned "ㅣ", "ㅡ" as a repetitive push of the button assigned " Point that can input 2-up / down-right vowel by combination of 1-up / down-right vowel and [0] button in the example drawing (think like "ㆍ") , "" "," ㅘ "," ㅘ "," ㅘ "and" ㅙ "by repeatedly pressing the" ㅣ "button after" ㅚ " It is only necessary to recognize points that can be input.

The contents of the above are summarized in the following table, and the graphs are shown in Figure 4-32. Not all of the explanations are listed in the table, and the contents of the table are not drawn as graphs. In the embodiment shown in Table 9, the input method of "ㅚ", "ㅘ", "ㅙ" in the embodiment related to Table 8 is applied, and the "up" 2 "," 1 "," 2 ", and" 0 "(" 0 "in the example) 10. However, only the part where "ㅓ => ㅕ" is input, "a", "ㅑ" is inputted by repetition pushing button assigned "ㅓ". I do not suggest using tables and graphs. As mentioned, " a &quot; is much less frequently used than &quot; b &quot;, making it less favorable in Table 10 and the related embodiments.

In Table 10 and the related embodiment, three ("3") buttons are required for the "ㅜ" input, but since the same button is repeatedly pressed (fingering distance zero) There is no big difference. In addition, among the nine vowels (a, ㅣ, ㅡ, ㅓ, ㅗ, ㅜ, ㅕ, ㅐ, ㅔ) (About 80% of the frequency) is input by pushing or pressing repeatedly on a specific vowel button, and the combination of adjacent buttons is used for inputting the remaining vowels (about 20% of the frequency of use) . In addition, since "ㅡ", "a", "ㅣ" which occupy 50% of the total frequency of use can be input in one stroke, the minimum number of strokes can be maintained by using the minimum number of buttons (three buttons) .

collection collection
decomposition Three collections to be combined 4- * Example Button Input Value on Keypad One A A 0 2 ㅐ A + l A + l 0# 3 ㅑ A + a 00 4 ㅒ ㅑ + ㅣ or
ㅐ + ㆍ or
ㅐ + ㅡ A + a + l or
A + l + a or
A + ㅣ + ㅡ 00 # or
0 # 0 or
0#* 5 ㅓ ㅣ + ㅣ ## 6 ㅔ ㅓ + ㅣ ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ ### 7 ㅕ ㅓ + ㆍ or
ㅓ + ㅡ ㅣ + ㅣ + a or
ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅡ ## 0 or
## * 8 ㅖ ㅔ + ㆍ or
ㅔ + ㅡ ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ + a or
ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅡ ### 0 or
### * 9 ㅗ ㅡ + ㅡ ** 10 ㅘ ㅚ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ ** ## 11 ㅙ ㅘ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ ** ### 12 ㅚ ㅗ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ ** # 13 ㅛ ㅗ + ㆍ ㅡ + ㅡ + a **0 14 ㅜ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅡ *** 15 ㅝ ㅟ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ *** ## 16 ㅞ ㅝ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ *** ### 17 ㅟ ㅜ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ *** # 18 ㅠ ㅜ + ㆍ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅡ + a ***0 19 ㅡ ㅡ * 20 ㅢ ㅡ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅣ * # 21 ㅣ ㅣ #

In the above, except for the collection of some of the nine vowels belonging to the upper use frequency of 90% (eg, some vowels such as "ㅜ" and "ㅐ" according to the embodiment) To reduce the fingering distance and improve the convenience of input. It is also possible to apply a keypad in which a vowel input by a repetitive pressing of a specific vowel button in the illustrative drawing is added to the corresponding button, and it is obvious that the keypad is included in the scope of the present invention. For example, in the embodiment using "ㅡ," "a," and "l", when "ㅣ" and "ㅓ" are input by repeatedly pressing the buttons assigned to "ㅣ" (Or "ㅓ ㅓ ㅔ") is displayed, and "" "and" ㅑ "are input by repeatedly pressing the button assigned to" a " (Or "ㅡ ㅗ ㅛ") when "ㅡ", "ㅗ", "ㅛ" is entered as the repetition of the button assigned to the button. However, Quot ;, and " l " (up to " a " or " up " according to each embodiment) with a high frequency of use but in a basic form is displayed on each button, It is one of the features of the present invention that it is easy to understand the input rules while constructing a simple keypad, To the airway.

It is possible to input a combination of the maximum repeatable number of times for the vowel sound and the vowel input plus one for the lattice sound and the light consonant input. For example, if "ㅣ", "ㅓ" and "ㅔ" are input by pressing the "ㅣ" button repeatedly, it takes up to 3 times to input a vowel, so "ㄲ = ㄱ + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ = 1 Quot; #### ". However, since the number of repeated presses for inputting one letter of the input becomes too much and unnatural, the input of the modified alphabet (lattice note, light consonant, and consonant consonants) Repeated selection by repetitive pressing or modified alphabet 3+ other input method can be applied. It is possible to make "ㄲ = a + ㅣ length = 1 # ~" by using "long press" which will be described later. However, inputting a character required for a normal Hangul input by long press hinders input flow not. (In the example, "ㅣ Length" is long press "ㅣ" and "# ~" is long press of [#] button)

The input of the consonant consonant " hehe " can be seen in the examples of Tables 8 to 10 that there is no vowel to input as " 0 * ". Therefore, if "ㅎ" is assigned to the [0] button, you can enter "ㅎ = [ㆍ + ㅡ + (ㅇ)] = a + ㅡ (= 0 *)". Of course, the consonant consonant "ㅎ" may be input ("button 2" assigned to "ㅇ") by repetitive pressing of the button assigned "ㅇ" consonant which is regarded as a basic alphabet by applying the repetition selection method. There may be ambiguity. In Table 7, "ㅑ = [a +]] = a + ㅡ (= 0 *)" is used. If this is not applied (there are other methods for "ㅑ" input in Table 7) 0 * "without ambiguity. If" ㅑ = 0 * ", it can be input without ambiguity with" ㅎ = 0 ** ". [0] button 3 If there is no vowel input, you can use the [0] button three times to input "ㅎ", as explained in the previous application, and ambiguity may also occur in this case. As mentioned in the first section, "ㄴ" is the basic alphabet and "" "is the variant alphabet (" ("). Or a subsequent alphabet), so that " d " It means that the input of the consonant assigned together with the button assigned to "a" can be input as "0 *" which does not exist as the vowel input value.

In the Korean automata of generalized 2-balloon keyboard, "ㅢ" is input by combining "ㅡ" and "ㅣ". However, since the keyboard uses a number of vowel buttons, only some vowels such as "ㅢ", "ㅝ", "ㅞ", "ㅘ", "ㅙ" Combination rule) is only a difference. Vowel combinations using three vowels ("ㅡ", "ㅣ", "a" or "ㅡ", "ㅣ", and " Figure 4-20 is a graphical representation of the vowel process according to the combination of vowels based on Table 1. In Figure 4-20, "start" means the beginning of vowel processing, for example " 10 * ... "is pressed, the vowel process starts at the next vowel" 0, "which is the consonant (ie," a = 1 " ㅡ] is input, when the [ㅣ] button is pressed, the system recognizes that the vowel combination process is started. When the next input value is pressed, If [a] is pressed after [a] + [a], the end of the vowel combination process started from the input of [a] It is normally aware of the full expression, and the input value to "pole" and the self-evident.

로 표시된 것은 ㆍ(아래아) 와 "ㅏ"를 동시에 연상시킬 수 있는 장점이 있음도 쉽 게 알 수 있다. Table 4-21 summarizes the above-mentioned contents in the form of a graph including the parts different from those in Table 1. In FIG. 4-21, the bar indicated by the dotted line and the bar indicated by the gray fill are overlapped. Since the input method of the bar indicated by the gray fill indicates that the input efficiency is improved, it is applied first. And may or may not be applied. In Figure 4-21, only a single vowel (eg, "a" to "a") or a collection "a" contained in some of the element collections (eg, "and" Is recognized as " a &quot;, and the vowel " a " On the [0] button

It is also easy to see that there is an advantage that it is possible to associate (a) and (b) simultaneously.

In the program implementation, consonants and vowels recognized by the input value on the keypad can be processed by inputting the input values of the two - arctic keyboard Korean automata program. However, in view of the infrastructure character of the character input system and various applications, Pointing out that it is not desirable for precise implementation.

In the above, although it is not a person in the industry, it is enough to understand the system if someone who knows Hangul and has basic knowledge of software is explained. A collection button (eg, a [0] button) assigned with a consonant (ie, a consonant) is referred to as a "(consonant consonant) collection button" for convenience. (Eg, "ㅋ = ㄱ + ㅡ + ㅡ", "ㄲ = a + ㅡ + ㅡ"), and the consonant consonants (eg, "he") are input It is also possible to input it by the control processing method (eg "ㅎ = ㅇ + ㅡ + ㅡ" or "ㅎ = a + ㅡ + ㅡ" or "ㅎ =. + ㅡ + ㅡ").

In the flow chart of FIG. 4-22, (1) to (4) are the same as the Korean automata in the generalized two-round key board, and only the portions (A) and (B) It is a part that reflects the characteristics of the input method according to the power system. (B) shows that when a consonant assignment collection button (eg, [0] button) which can not be combined after a series of collection buttons are pressed, the input of the consonants assigned to the collection button is recognized. In FIG. 4-22, the portion indicated by the dotted line in portion (B) may be omitted. In FIG. 4-22, if the first input value is a drop-off consonant collection button, it is very simple to process the input of the consonant consonants assigned to the collection button, so that the flow diagram is not expressed in order to keep the flow chart brief. Likewise, when the vowel button is pressed as the initial input value, the process of vowel combination as a letter is not distinguished for convenience. The flowchart of FIG. 4-22 shows an overview of the Hangul input technique and the vowel input technique, which are presented in the present invention as simple as possible, in an easy-to-understand and understandable manner. In actual implementation, It is obvious that the present invention is also included in the scope of the present invention. For example, in the computing environment where the current complete character system is used, the details may vary slightly depending on whether to use the "Unicode" system or the "KSC5601 completion type" system. 4-23 shows a process of processing a Hangul automata on a two-barrel type keyboard, which is generalized by removing the characteristic portions (portions (A) and (B)) in the input method shown in FIG. 4-22. In the section for checking whether there is a vowel corresponding to the "vowel combination rule" in the section (3) of FIG. 4-22, the vowel combination rule (presented in Table 1, various graphs and explanation of the present invention) It is perfectly natural that this applies.

The applicant has shown that the vowel input method (vowel combination method) proposed by the present invention can be applied regardless of the specific consonant input method. However, if a flowchart is shown in which the iterative selection method is applied to the consonant input in the vowel, . Applicant applies the repeated selection method (selected in order of plaintext - lattice - vowel consonant, in the order of plaint sound - light consonant - lattice consonant), or the modified alphabet 3 + input method It is obvious that the same can be applied to all consonant input methods as well as similar (consonant identification by consecutive repetition of consonant buttons does not affect the combination of consonant buttons) . In section (4), consonants can be identified by a procedure specific to a particular consonant input technique in identifying consonants. (B) portion of course may be omitted. In case ambiguity occurs in order to maintain the flow chart concisely, it does not express the part that uses the right arrow [>] button or specific function button to determine the input letter, but it is already widely used and widely used. Even if it is not a worker, it does not display because it knows everybody. Similarly, it is also possible to use it in conjunction with the consonant input method of Samsung Electronics, which is inputting consonants by the repetition selection method.

Likewise, in the Hangul input system currently adopted by LG Electronics, the consonant button is combined with the "button" and "button" to identify the consonant (eg, "ㄷ = ㄴ + It is obvious that the vowel input technique proposed by the present invention can be applied to a consonant input technique for identifying a consonant by a combination of a button and a specific function button. Similarly, the input of consonant buttons and specific function buttons do not affect the vowel combination. The flow chart of this case is briefly shown in Figure 4-25 as well.

In the system for processing Korean characters by recognizing consonants and vowels of Korean (Hangul), it is believed that the vowel combination technique presented in the present invention can be used regardless of the specific consonant input technique It is self-evident. The flow chart is shown in Fig. 4-26. 4-26, the vowel combination technique of the present invention is applied even when consonants of a specific consonant input method can be identified when a consonant button or a collection button or a specific function button is pressed -26 (4)). &Lt; / RTI &gt; Likewise, it can be applied to all methods of combining Korean vowels by combining three Korean vowels (eg, "ㅡ", "a", "ㅣ") in any form of keypad assigned by mixing consonants and vowels Do. For example, in the example drawing, when the inputting of the consonant "ㅎ" is omitted ([0] button 3), it is already pointed out that ambiguity may occur. That is, the input of the consonant "ㅎ" It is obvious that the vowel combination method of the present invention is also applicable to the case where the time is delayed or the time can be fixed by using the [>] button or the like). If the consonant and vowel are assigned together and the consonant combination affects the vowel combination, it is possible to use the appointed time delay or the input of a specific function button (eg right arrow [>] button) It is very obvious that the vowel combination method of the present invention can be applied by intentionally confirming the input character and processing inputting in the word start state. When the " text end button " is pressed in the flowchart of FIG. 4-26, it is already well known that the user is surely recognizing the content being input and proceeding from the &quot; start &quot; 4-27 in the form of a flow chart, and FIG. 4-26 is a diagram in which only the portion for checking the depression of the letter completion button is added.

This can be seen as an indication that the invention is applicable to any of the parts described in the present application (examples), and this is also applicable to other parts of the present invention (e.g., A combination method, and the like). For example, as mentioned above, all of the input methods of the modified alphabets (lattice notes, light consonants, consonants, etc.) are applied repeatedly, It is also obvious that some of the methods can be applied selectively (eg, lattice sounds are input by control processing method, light consonants are input by iterative selection method, etc.). It is easy to see that it is also applicable to an input system which identifies a specific consonant (promised consonant) by using "long press" of a specific button as described below. Similarly, as in the input system employed by LG Electronics, when some consonants are input in combination with the push button and some consonants are input by the repetition selection method (consonant input does not affect the vowel composition) It is also obvious that the vowel combination method of the present invention is applicable. This is also the case when the consonant input method of the input system employed by LG Electronics is slightly modified so that "b" is placed on a separate button and the button is input as a button. (Currently in the LG Electronics recruitment system, "ㅂ = ㅁ + ing" is input)

4.12. A method of inputting Korean words using four modern Korean vowels (eg, "a", "ㅣ", "ㅡ", "ㅓ"

Likewise, as shown in Figs. 4-18 and 4-19, a Korean input system for processing a vowel can be constructed using any combination of four vowels including " - ", " For example, you can use four vowels, including the frequently used vowel "a" and "vowel". These four vowels have a usage frequency of about 60% of the total vowels. Table 11 shows an example using a combination of four vowels.

It is applicable almost the same as the explanation described in the case of using three vowels, so it will not be described in detail. In Fig. 4-18, the vowel " ㅓ " is shown in the numeral " 8 " and shown only in Fig. 4-19. When the consonant is not assigned to the button [0] button as shown in FIGS. 4-18 and 4-19, the consonants are allocated to the buttons assigned with "ㅡ" and "ㅣ" As described above, can be similarly applied to the case where there is a difference.

In Figures 4-18 and 4-19, the positions of the vowels "a" and "v" (assigned buttons) may be interchanged. The definitions of the vowels combined by the four vowels based on the drawings of Figs. 4-18 and 4-19 may be defined as a combination of "a" and "v" in Table 11.

The user can operate the [0] button assigned to the vowel "a" as if it were a down button, and the [8] button assigned to the vowel "v" as if the button had two buttons. This is evident in the shape of the number "0" and the shape of the number "8". The system detects the start state of the vowel processing and then interprets the input values as a vowel according to the rules set forth in Table 11.

Similarly to the above description, in the input of "a", "# 0" can also be recognized as "a", and in the input of "ㅓ", "0 #" can be recognized as "ㅓ" . Likewise, any vowel (eg vowel "ㅗ", "ㅜ") instead of "a" or "ㅓ" is used as four vowels with vowels "ㅡ" and "ㅣ".

An example of combining vowels by combining the four vowel buttons used in modern Korean by using the four vowel buttons including vowels "ㅡ", "ㅣ" and arbitrary vowels "X" and "Y" It can be as shown in the table. In the following table, among the 21 Korean vowels, the vowels "X" and "Y" among the 19 vowels except the vowels "ㅡ" and "び" are the buttons assigned to the vowels "X" (Ie, the [X] button and the [Y] button).

collection 4 collections to be combined X Y One A ㅣ + X 2 ㅐ ㅣ + X + ㅣ 3 ㅑ ㅣ + Y 4 ㅒ ㅣ + Y + ㅣ 5 ㅓ X + ㅣ 6 ㅔ X + ㅣ + ㅣ 7 ㅕ Y + ㅣ 8 ㅖ Y + ㅣ + ㅣ 9 ㅗ X + - 10 ㅘ X + ㅡ + ㅣ + X 11 ㅙ X + ㅡ + ㅣ + X + ㅣ 12 ㅚ X + ㅡ + ㅣ 13 ㅛ Y + - 14 ㅜ ㅡ + X 15 ㅝ ㅡ + Y + ㅣ
or ㅡ + X + X + ㅣ 16 ㅞ ㅡ + Y + ㅣ + ㅣ
or ㅡ + X + X + ㅣ + ㅣ 17 ㅟ ㅡ + X + ㅣ 18 ㅠ ㅡ + Y 19 ㅡ 20 ㅢ ㅡ + ㅣ 21 ㅣ

This can be further generalized and the vowel can be entered by a combination similar to the above table using any three Korean vowel buttons. For example, the vowel "A", "B", "X", "Y" It is also clear that the vowels "A", "B", "X", and "Y" can be entered with one button assigned to each vowel. It would be desirable to use four vowels including "ㅡ", "ㅣ", "a", "ㅓ" for the convenience of the user and minimization of the number of inputs.

In FIGS. 4-12 and 4-13, it is also possible to input the consonants by inputting "ㅎ = 0 ** = a + ㅡ + ㅡ" and inputting "ㅇ = 8 ** = ㅓ + ㅡ + ㅡ" Is the same. Here, the frequently used word "ㅇ" is assigned to the [8] button together with the vowel "ㅓ", which is inconvenient for input, but the arrangement of the consonant "ㅇ" can be appropriately modified.

The following is an example of a vowel input method using four vowels of modern Korean. In the case of using 3 vowels, enter "a" and "ㅑ" as repetitions of "ㅣ", input vowel "ㅡ" and "ㅠ" ㅣ "using the combination of the horizontal line and the vertical line. In the following example, we use the four vowels vowels "ㅓ", "ㅗ", "ㅡ", "ㅣ" to secure the naturalness of the input rules. You can naturally enter vowels that contain "ㅗ" or "ㅓ". Avoid detailed explanation because it is similar to the case of using 3 vowels.

collection collection
decomposition 4 collections to be combined (B), it is not applicable (A) (B) One A ㅣ + ㅡ ㅣ + ㅣ ㅑ (A-3) 2 ㅐ A + l ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ 3 ㅑ ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ or
ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅡ or
ㅣ + ㅣ ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅡ 4 ㅒ ㅑ + ㅣ
A + ㅓ ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅓ or
ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ 5 ㅓ ㅓ 6 ㅔ ㅓ + ㅣ ㅓ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ ㅟ (B), ㅠ (B) 7 ㅕ ㅡ + ㅓ 8 ㅖ ㅕ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅓ + ㅣ 9 ㅗ ㅗ 10 ㅘ ㅗ + a ㅗ + ㅣ + ㅣ 11 ㅙ ㅘ + ㅣ ㅗ + ㅣ + ㅣ + ㅣ 12 ㅚ ㅗ + ㅣ ㅗ + ㅣ 13 ㅛ ㅣ + ㅗ 14 ㅜ ㅡ + ㅡ 15 ㅝ ㅜ + ㅓ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅓ ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅡ or
ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ 16 ㅞ ㅝ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅓ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ or
ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ 17 ㅟ ㅜ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅣ ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ ㅔ (B), ㅠ (B) 18 ㅠ ㅡ + ㅡ + ㅡ ㅡ + ㅣ + ㅣ ㅔ (B), ㅟ (B) 19 ㅡ ㅡ 20 ㅢ ㅡ + ㅣ 21 ㅣ ㅣ

4.13. How to enter a specific (single) vowel as a continuous input of a specific button assigned to a specific vowel element (or element vowel)

In the illustrations (Figs. 4-5 to 4-9), it is assumed that the vowel element buttons are not allocated with sound / horn control and missing consonants but purely used with vowel element buttons. Therefore, it is assumed that there is a separate control button, or the murmur and the beep are selected by repeatedly pressing the button assigned to the basic consonant, and the non-consonant is selected by repeatedly pressing the button assigned consonant to be regarded as the basic consonant .

The frequency of use of Korean vowels is in the order of "a", "ㅣ", "ㅡ", "ㅓ", "ㅗ", and "ㅜ". These six vowels account for about 77% of the total. In the input method using a vowel element, it was shown that a single vowel can be input by using a vowel element "." Which does not exist as a vowel itself. Furthermore, it is possible to detect only one promise of a single vowel by detecting continuous input of the same vowel element button in the vowel combination process (from the start of vowel combination to the end of vowel combination).

If you press the button assigned to the vowel element "ㅡ" once, the vowel "ㅡ" is recognized and if it is pressed one more time in succession, "ㅜ" can be recognized. For example, in the case of entering "gum", you can enter "1 * 05" as a combination of vowel elements, but you can also enter "1 ** 5". Similarly, if the button assigned to the vowel element "ㅣ" is pressed once, "ㅣ" is recognized and if it is pressed once again, "a" can be recognized. For example, to enter "Sense", it means either "1 # 05" or "1 ## 5".

As described above, when a single vowel is input by using the button assigned to the vowel element ".", It is recognized as an intermediate process of inputting the vowels "ㅓ", "ㅕ", "ㅗ", "ㅛ" Until you know the end of the course, just "." . &Lt; / RTI &gt; However, when using the buttons assigned to the vowel elements "ㅡ" and "ㅣ", the vowel element (or element vowel) follows the consonant (i.e. The vowel element "ㅣ" does not appear consecutively (that is, "ㅣ + ㅣ") and does not come out consecutively (ie, ㅡ + ㅡ) It can be recognized and output definitively. For example, when you enter "1 ## (5)", you can see "a => = => (=> sense)" according to the input. If it can be recognized as such, it is possible to combine the other vowel elements in addition to the vowel element combination. That is, in the example shown in Fig. 4-5, &quot; 1 ** # = ear ", and " 1 ### = dog " When a certain element is recognized by repeatedly pressing the button assigned to the element, the other element can be combined to form another element. When the element of the element can not be combined, Value can be recognized as the end of the vowel combination process and recognized as the start state of the vowel combination process with respect to the current input value.

It is also possible to enter another single vowel by pressing the button assigned to the vowel element three or more times. For example, if the button to which "ㅡ" is assigned is pressed three times, you may be able to recognize "ㅠ" (you can also enter "gui" as "gui + ㅣ = 1 *** #") . Likewise, if the button to which "ㅣ" is assigned is pressed three times, it can be recognized as "ㅐ", or "ㅑ" can be recognized as it is mentioned (naturally, both 'ㅐ' and 'ㅑ' If you enter 'ㅐ' as 3, you can input 'ㅑ' as 4). Likewise, "." You can input "ㅕ" to "ㅕ" in 4 tattoo with this assigned button 3. (In this example, it is assumed that the button assigned to the vowel element "." Is not assigned with the vowel consonant but only the vowel element is assigned.) As mentioned in the input of the vowel consonant, By using the property that the vowel element "." Can not come out three or more times in succession, it can be recognized as "1000 = bark" and "10000 = bark" definitively. However, in the case of three or more inputs, there is no significant difference in inputting a combination of vowel elements or a convenient input, and the input method is insufficient in terms of intuition.

The above results show that the input convenience of some vowels with a high frequency of use is increased. If we rearrange it again, we can see that it applies the iterative selection method with the specific vowel (ㅜ, ㅠ, ...) with the similarity of shape as the succeeding vowel of "ㅡ". Likewise, it can be seen that the subsequent vowel of "ㅣ" is a recurrent selection method with a specific vowel (eg, a, ㅐ, ㅑ, ... or a, ㅑ, ㅐ). Likewise, it can be seen that the user can input a specific vowel (eg, ㅓ, ㅗ, ㅕ, ㅛ, ...) using the button assigned with "." In the method of using four vowel elements, it is possible to input "ㅓ" and "ㅗ" by repetitive pressing of the button assigned to the vowel element ".", And repeatedly press the button assigned to the vowel element ".." To input "ㅕ" and "ㅛ".

, "ㅣ", ",", ",", ",", ",", and "," are displayed in order of "ㅡ, , "ㅓ", and "ㅗ", which start with the vowel element "." Using the buttons assigned to the vowel element "." And only certain other vowels can be entered in a different order.

Here, the concept of the present invention can be utilized also in a method in which a stepwise anaerobic method does not use three or four vowel elements. For example, in an input system where six collection buttons are assigned to a collection of six elements such as "ㅡ", "ㅣ", "a", "ㅓ", "ㅗ", " You can enter 2 buttons for 2 buttons, 2 buttons for 2 buttons, 2 buttons for 2 buttons, 2 buttons for 2 buttons, 2 buttons for 2 buttons, 2 buttons for 2 buttons, and 2 buttons for 2 buttons. Likewise, you can input "ㅐ", which is more frequently used than the [a] button 2. The same vowel of the vowels "a", "ㅓ", "ㅗ", and "ㅜ" can not be consecutively displayed. If you can enter 10 basic vowels like this, the remaining vowels can be entered as a combination of these 10 vowels (eg 'ㅝ = ㅜ + ㅓ' or 'ㅝ = ㅠ + ㅣ', 'ㅞ = ㅜ + ㅓ + ㅣ '). Likewise, you can enter other vowels (eg, complex vowels, vowels vowels) with more than three vowel buttons.

This means that the vowel "ㅑ" can be input by the iterative selection method with the letter "" "as the basic vowel as the next vowel without putting the assigned button of the vowel element". " This also has the convenience of input by repetitive pressing without ambiguity, and it can give an affinity to the user with an input similar to the process of writing out as the button is pressed. It is needless to say that it is also possible to input by adding the button assigned to the vowel element "." Separately and combining it with the repeated pressing of the element collection button or the vowel element "." In the input system having seven vowel buttons. For example, "ㅕ" can be input by combining the [ㅓ] button 2 or the [.] And [ㅓ] buttons.

5. How to overcome ambiguity through indexing

When applying iterative selection method, ambiguity may occur because several words are represented by a single code. In the input example of Fig. 4-1, it is pointed out that there is ambiguity that "Koi" can be recognized as "Koi" and "Koi" as "Koi". However, in general, words are entered word by word, for example, there is the word "very" but not "word". In Fig. 4-1, both have the same code value. Accordingly, the terminal (client) or the server side prepares and registers an index for a specific keypad and words that may cause ambiguity about a specific alphabet input method. If "very" or "very long" is entered as the correct word and "very" is registered as the correct word in the index when the two can not be distinguished by the time delay or the like, Quot; target word ") is " very great ". This applies only when the system has ambiguity that can not be distinguished. If it can be distinguished by the time delay value defined by the system (terminal side or server side system) or by the user-defined time delay value, Do. In other words, if the user intentionally breaks (using a delay or blank, the right-hand side button, or some other specific button) and enters the word "this word", the word is the target word, &Quot;

The way to prepare the index may be to register only the correct word ("very" in the example) for a word where ambiguity can occur, or only the right word . It is also acceptable to register both the correct word and the correct word, and the system only needs to know whether the word in the index is the correct word or the correct word.

This can be applied in all cases where the iterative selection method is applied to the keypad. For example, in the input method of Samsung Electronics in Korea, ambiguity such as "Country <=> Guka" is generated and can be applied to it as well. In addition, similarly to FIG. 4-1, when a pair of alphabet is placed on each button and a syllable completion button is pressed in units of syllables (letters) while allowing selection of one consonant, two consonants, three consonants and one vowel . When the user inputs "very", the user can refer to the index at the moment when the word is terminated (for example, a blank space, etc.) and change it to "very" even if the "

At this time, if the index of the word exists in both the client side and the server side, the client side index is first searched to identify the correct word, and when the identification is unsuccessful, the server side index is searched secondarily, Words can be identified.

The distinction between units of a word can be identified by the elements that distinguish words from words as one can think of. For example, between whitespace and space, between word start and space, between whitespace and end of input, between whitespace and mode switching, and so on. Since the correct word is determined by reference to the index, the index reference is made and the correct word can be determined when an element that distinguishes the word is input.

This can be applied to all cases where ambiguity occurs by applying the iterative selection method. For example, ambiguity may arise when a consonant belonging to a button having the same ending and the same initiality is used in Samsung Electronics' method currently used in Korea. "Country" <=> "Guka" is an example. When inputting a code by alphabet, the syllable (character) unit is entered without recognizing it, so in many cases, unconsciously entering "Country" becomes "Guka". In this case, if neither of the two words can be known by the time delay, the system (terminal or server) can find the target word by referring to the index. However, in this case, even if the "ㄱ" and the "ㄱ" beginning of the "station" are pressed successively, in most cases the target word is often "country" It is also effective to identify the target word by reference.

It is also clear that this is applicable not only to the Korean language but also to all the languages where the iterative selection method is used. For example, if an ambiguity occurs in English input or in English mode on a different language keypad, whether [AB] or [BA] is entered as [2] - [2] - [ "Is registered with the correct word in the index, it can be recognized and provided as a target word to the user. If all of the plural words in which the mood is generated are registered in the index with the correct word, the user can be provided with a frequently used word primarily, and the user can finally determine the target word.

If there is ambiguity about the input of a certain word, if all the words corresponding to the input are recognized as correct words even if referring to the index, the user may be given feedback by an appropriate method (visual or auditory) .

A method for allowing the user to confirm a target word is to arrange a plurality of words recognized as correct words in the display window in order of frequency of use (or priority order), and to scroll down or down using the number buttons corresponding to the displayed order So that the user can confirm the target word. Another method is to display the next most frequently used word by selecting a control (hereinafter referred to as " Next word control " for convenience) that displays only the most frequently used words and displays the next word if it is not the target word And if it is not a target word, the user can again select the next word control to continue searching for the target word. In this case, after the target word is searched, the target word is determined by inputting any other button (for example, selection of another alphabet, or blanking, mode switching, .

The selection of the next word control can be applied to both the "whole part selection method" and the "repetition selection method (reference / simple)" described in the earlier application. If the next word control is positioned at the position of the reference grid of a particular button, the next word control with that particular button 1 will be selected.

6. Simple code utilization method and shortening input method / parallel input method

6.1 How to Generate Alphabetic Simple Code

When accessing the information system using the information communication terminal, the input of the alphabet is necessary. Alternatively, the alphabet to be input can be input as a numeric code. In a compact information communication terminal, a keypad type interface is often adopted. The code used here refers to all kinds of codes, such as a telephone number, a stock code (listed company) code, a city code, a department code, a train station code, and a bank code. The advantage of coding various names is that they can simplify the input.

The information communication terminal includes all types of information communication terminals such as a PC, a mobile communication device, a smart phone, a PDA, a bidirectional character transmission / reception device, and an ATM (automatic teller machine). It also encompasses terminals that do not have a communication function, such as an electronic notebook. The information system includes all kinds of systems such as ARS as well as a system that can be visually accessed through a GUI. In addition, the system is narrowly referred to as a server-side system, and broadly includes a client software of a terminal corresponding to a server system.

It can be used for memorizing various codes by using the alphabet arranged on the keypad. When used for memorizing a code, there may be a method by simple naming, initial naming, and full naming. A summary of the contents is as follows.

Simple naming is a code that specifies the number of words or phrases you want to encode (a word or phrase collectively referred to below as a "phrase"). For example, in the case of Korean, in the case of a company name code, "1799" associated with codes a, b, c, and c is added to the simple code based on FIG. In this case, a simple code of a specific word can be more easily recognized by displaying the a, b, c, and c associated with the simple code " 1799 " . In the case of simple naming, the code associated with an alphabet belonging to a word to be coded is determined by a code, so it is not necessary to set the code of the "added electronic" in the example to "1799". For example, the simple code of "stock" can be a simple code with values associated with ell, l, l, and d. In the case of additive e, there are other examples, such as "1729" Quot; 1749 " associated with a, b, c, or i, or " 13294293 " associated with the entire alphabet that constitutes " added electronic ". For the sake of simplicity, it is referred to as " full associative simple naming " for simplicity of code associated with the entire alphabet constituting a phrase, and for convenience, designating a simple code in association with some alphabets of a specific phrase. In any case, simple naming (ie, simple code) can be viewed as specifying the code associated with the alphabet that constitutes the phrase in phrase units. This can be applied to languages other than Korean. For example, in "captain" you can use the simple code "2786" associated with the "CPTN" character, which is some associated simple code, which will be referred to as "consonant association simple code" for the sake of convenience.

When a consonant-related simple code is generated for a word starting with a vowel such as "escape", it becomes "727" corresponding to "SCP", which becomes the same as the consonant association simple code of "scape". Therefore, in order to minimize the overlap between the simple code and the simple code corresponding to the defined simple code, we can think of a simple code that associates the first vowel with the consonant to add convenience to the use. For convenience, it is called "first vowel + simple code based on consonant". This first vowel + consonant association simple code is also advantageous in that it can mechanically generate simple codes for specific words as well as other simple codes.

Words as well as phrases can also be coded by simple naming. The "8314" mapped to ㅇ, ㄷ, ㄱ, 활용 can be used as a simple code by using a letter (syllable) that best implies meaning in the phrase "where to go", which is an example from the earlier application. In English, "3886" associated with d, t, t, and n, which has a negative value in the "date tonight" example in the prior application, can be simply coded.

Initial naming is a special case of some associative simple naming. In Korean, the initial naming may be a method of designating a number mapped to the initial (consonant) on the basis of a syllable (letter) as a code. This is called "syllable-based initial naming" for convenience. In the case of " additive electronics ", the initial code by syllable reference initial naming becomes " 1799 " associated with consonant initials of each note (character). Syllable-based initial naming can also be applied to languages other than Korean. For example, in the case of English, the initial code by the syllable reference initial naming of the word " entertainment " may be " 3886 " associated with e, t, t and m. The syllable-based initial naming can be more useful in the case of Korean, where one syllable forms a single letter. As well as Korean, it can also be used in other languages such as Chinese and Japanese, where one syllable forms a single letter. In the case of Chinese, the syllable reference initial code of Beijing (the first "e" has a four-symbol code and the last "i" has a two-symbol code) Quot; 14 &quot; on the basis of Figs. 10-1 to 10-4.

Likewise, initial naming is possible for phrases, which can be initialized to "81", which is associated with the first alphabet, o, a, in the phrase "where to go" for example in the earlier application. In English, the initial code for the word-based initial naming is "3979" associated with d, w, t, and w for the phrase "dance with the wolf" Word-based initial naming can be useful in all languages when a code is assigned to the entire phrase.

It is called "simple code" or "short code" for the sake of simplicity throughout the simple code (the entire associated simple code part related simple code) and the initial code (the syllable standard based on the syllable code and the word based initial code) do. The entire associative simple code, the consonant-associated simple code, the syllable-based initial code, and the word-based initial code have a regularity in their code generation, so that they can be used universally. Even if it is easy to use.

Full naming is the input value of a word to be encoded by a specific character input method. Therefore, it can be changed according to the character input method applied, and it can be regarded that a numerical value corresponding to a certain phrase is code by alphabet unit. In the case of "Seoul", which is an example from the earlier application, the full code according to the partial selection method (mentioned in the earlier application) based on FIG. 4-2 is "7745888944". The full code by the reference iteration selection method (mentioned in the earlier application) becomes " 7448884 ". If you apply a different keypad from Figure 4-2 or apply another alphabet entry method, there will be a corresponding full code value.

6.2 How to enter an existing Chinese character

As for the Chinese input method, it is a general form to input the English corresponding to the Chinese pronunciation and select the corresponding Chinese character when the Chinese character is converted by using the "Chinese character conversion key" like the Chinese character input method in the Hangul. In other words, if Chinese characters are input in the Roman alphabet, the system retrieves the corresponding Chinese characters and provides them to the user. See FIG. 5-1. For Chinese, the full code can be determined based on the English pronunciation of Chinese.

6.3 Unique Simple Codes

If the decoding of the simple code can be performed at the client side (that is, if the client has a specific word and a simple code value corresponding to the specific word), the word corresponding to the inputted simple code is transmitted to the server . Even if the client can decode the simple code, the simple code itself (that is, a numerical listing) is sent to the server side if the server requires simple code depending on the nature of the application. On the server side, . This is because the decryption of simple code can be done on the client side or on the server side.

When a simple code is defined and used for a plurality of phrases, there may be many phrases corresponding to the same simple code. The ambiguity that can occur between simple codes is called "second ambiguity" for convenience. In this case, it is possible to create and store a unique code value by adding a serial number to a simple code having the same value in the system. However, since a user mainly uses a simple code associated with a specific phrase, a second ambiguity occurs. In such cases, it is natural that the system should be able to recommend such phrases to the user according to the usage priority. In the case of having different words and having the same simple code, serial numbers are assigned to the simple codes according to the priority according to the frequency of use of the phrases in the system, so that the serial number can be used as a priority for recommending to the user. Of course, you do not have to give serial numbers, but you can have priority information in your system, and you can just do that.

For example, if the simple code of "stock information" is the same as the syllable initial code "9196" and the "syllable information" simple code is "9196" as the syllable initial code, The serial number can be used as a priority for recommending the serial number to the user. If the frequency of use of the " stock information " is high, priority may be given to it to set "stock information" = "91961" and "stock information" = "91962". Similarly, if the syllable standard initial code of the teacher (xiansheng: vowel a) is equal to the syllable standard code of the student (xuesheng: first e is the second), serial numbers are assigned according to the frequency of use of each word The serial number can be used as a priority. If the frequency of use of the teacher (xiansheng) is higher than the frequency of use of the student (xuesheng), then the teacher (xiansheng) = 971 and the student (xuesheng) = 972. The simple code generated by adding the serial number is referred to as "unique simple code" for the sake of convenience, and the simple code having the redundancy without serial number is simply referred to as "simple code" Quot; code "

In the examples of teachers (xiansheng) and students (xuesheng), if the user enters only "97", the system can give the teacher (xiansheng) and student (xuesheng) to the user, If you recognize this from the beginning and enter "971", the system will recognize it as "xiansheng".

Here, it is possible to give a better visual effect to the user by highlighting the "x, s" used as the basis of the syllable standard initial code. One of the methods of highlighting is to use uppercase letters like XianSheng The system can also interpret the simple code "97" from the capitalized word.

6.4 Examples of using simple code

An example of a simple code (syllable standard initial code) assigned to a city name is as follows. This can be useful in railway information systems and so on.

. Seoul = 78, Suwon = 78, Daejeon = 39, Sintan = 739,. . .

Since the initial codes for syllables in Seoul and Suwon are the same, in order to avoid this, the system can uniquely assign simple codes such as "Seoul = 781" and "Suwon = 782". When the user sends only "78" to the system, the system gives the appropriate feedback (eg, providing a list of Seoul and Suwon or notifying the user by voice) and letting the user choose between Seoul and Suwon. If the user recognizes this from the beginning and inputs "781", the system will recognize it as "Seoul".

If the server side system does not require the simple code "78" but needs the word "Seoul" itself, the client side can interpret the simple code "78" and send the "server" to the server side. Alternatively, even if the client side can interpret the simple code, if the server side needs the simple code itself according to the nature of the application, the input simple code itself can be sent to the server side.

Another example of assigning a simple code (full association simple code, syllable reference initial code, user association simple code, first vowel + consonant association simple code) to the city name is as shown in Fig. , The syllable reference initial code becomes "25" associated with b, j, the entire associated simple code becomes "2345464", and the consonant association simple code becomes "2564" associated with b, j, n, g.

The following are examples of securities stocks (listed companies). This can be useful in various securities information systems.

. Donghwa Pharmaceutical = 3098, Digital Shipbuilding = 39397, Korea Freetel = 83643,. . .

Here, for example, in the case of "digital shipbuilding", "c, i, y, x, x" used as a basis of the syllable reference initial code is highlighted to give a better visual effect to the user.

An example of a bank code is: This can be useful in ATMs and various financial information systems.

. National (bank) = 14, one (bank) = 82,. . .

Here, it is obvious that the user can input the simple code defined above by interpreting it on the client side (terminal) side and displaying it to the user. This will be referred to as a " short input method ", and will be described in detail next to the " parallel input method ".

6.5 Automatic reassignment of priorities according to selection frequency

Furthermore, if the number of times that a particular user selects "sovereign information" is markedly higher than the priority of the first "Securities Information" and "Sovereign Information" respectively, the priority of "Sovereign Information" Can be adjusted to be higher than the priority of "stock information". There are a variety of methods as described, but you can achieve this by changing the serial number. If priority information is separately stored in the system, it is possible by changing the priority information.

The criterion for determining whether the number of times the " sovereign information " is selected is remarkably large may be determined by the system or may be (re) specified by the user. As an example of such a judgment criterion, if the selection is made differently from the predetermined priority of 8 or more out of 10, the existing priority can be automatically corrected. Depending on the option, the user may be asked to confirm the correction.

This can be applied to other languages as well. In the above example, the same can be said when "master information" and "stock information" are changed to "xiansheng" and "xuesheng" respectively.

6.6 Simple Code Automatic Assignment and Simple Code Relevancy

In particular, since the consonant-related simple code, the syllable-based initial code, and the word-based initial code in addition to the entire associated simple code have regularity in the simple code generation as described above, when a user designates a simple code for a specific phrase, If a specific phrase is entered while a rule is specified, the corresponding simple code can be automatically extracted and stored in the system. In addition, since the alphabet associated with the simple code is highlighted, the convenience of use can be enhanced. In English, the alphabet associated with the simple code is highlighted and can be highlighted using capital letters.

Also, in the prior art, "short input method" and "short / full parallel input method" have been proposed. The simple code for the shortcut input can be defined in the system, the user can change it, and the user can also specify a simple code for a new phrase.

In determining the simple code for a new phrase, simple code generation rules such as the entire year-of-interest flick code, partial-associated simple code, consonant-associated simple code, syllable-based initial code, word-based initial code, . For example, if a user wishes to use a word-based initial code as a simple code in generating a simple code for "dance with the wolf," enter "dance with the wolf" in the simple code generation mode, The word standard initial code "3983" should be entered. Likewise, if you want to use the syllable-based initial code as a simple code in generating a simple code for "stock information", you must enter "stock information" in the simple code generation mode and enter "9196".

However, if a user designates a simple code for a specific phrase, the user stores the type of simple code desired by the user in the system and inputs a phrase for generating a simple code, The simple code can be specified automatically. In the above example, the system is set to use the syllable-based initial code, and by simply inputting "stock information", the simple code for "stock information" can be automatically designated as "9196". Likewise, you can set the system to use syllable-based initials and have the simple code for teacher (xiansheng) automatically be set to "97" by typing teacher (xiansheng).

In the case of English, capital letters can be used to indicate the alphabet to be used as a simple code. Therefore, it is possible to designate the simple code designation method to use upper case letters as simple codes, and when inputting "DaTe ToNignt", it is possible to automatically designate "3886" corresponding to large letter DTTN as simple codes or "ToNignt ShoW &Quot;, " 8679 " corresponding to the uppercase " TNSW " can be automatically designated as a simple code.

6.7 Shortening Input Method and Parallel Input Method of a Word Using Simple Code

Simple code (the initial code is a special case of simple code, so unless you mention otherwise, it is included in the simple code) When you enter the system (client-side system or server-side system) It is possible to recognize and process it. Therefore, it is natural to recognize a word corresponding to a specific simple code and display it again to a user, and to use it for inputting a word.

In fact, in the foreign alphabet input method, the index assigned to the word "entire associated simple code" is stored in the terminal (client side system), and when the user inputs the code, the corresponding word is displayed according to the priority of the word, And a character input system is implemented by allowing a word to be confirmed. For more information, visit http://www.tegic.com and http://www.zicorp.com. This method will be referred to as " full associative shortening input method " or " foreign method " in the present invention for convenience. Alternatively, a typical input system using this approach is called "T9 Like Input Method" because it is "T9" of Tegic. Figure 5-2 shows an example input from Tegic's T9 system. As shown in FIG. 5-2, when the user inputs &quot; 622 ... ", The system will initially give the user" off ", but if" 6228 "is entered," meet "will be displayed.

Compared with the alphabet input method on the keypad by the applicant, the alphabet input method of the applicant is given a unique code in alphabetical units, and the target alphabet or target phrase is input by the full code , And the foreign method described above is to assign the entire associated simple code in units of words and input the target word by the simple code.

The disadvantage of the foreign method is that only a predefined word can be inputted by assigning a code in a unit of a word, a case where a word having a different code and having the same code is inputted by using a toggle button or a movement button The target word is selected and confirmed, the input is not easy, the non-target word is temporarily displayed on the input, the system takes up a lot of storage capacity, and the implementation cost is high.

Here, it is pointed out that simple codes (some associations or entire associations) can be assigned to common phrases (concepts that include common words or common phrases), and target phrases can be entered using simple codes. Simple codes for common phrases can be predefined in the system and presented to the user, or they can be specified by the user. Alternatively, the user can arbitrarily modify the simple code defined in the system. What the user can specify is the advantage that the user can easily recognize the simple code value for a specific commercial phrase.

In the present invention, a method of inputting a target phrase using a simple code (including a partial associated simple code, a fully associated simple code, and an initial code) is referred to as a "shortened input method" for convenience and a method of inputting a target alphabet by a full code For the sake of convenience, it is called the "full input method" in comparison with the short input method. Also, as described below, the short input method and the full input method can be applied in parallel, and the method of applying the short input method and the full input method in parallel is referred to as a "short / full parallel input method" Bottleneck input method ".

The ambiguity arising from the use of the iterative selection method among the full input methods that give a unique code in alphabetical units and input the code to input the target alphabet is referred to as "first ambiguity" or "alphabet ambiguity" for convenience Let's call it. On the other hand, there is ambiguity in that there are several different words for the same code in the way that the code is assigned to all words as in the foreign method, and the target word can be inputted through this code. I will call it "car ambiguity" or "fish morality". In the present invention, simply ambiguity means first ambiguity.

If there is no simple code corresponding to the input value, the input code is firstly subjected to the full code (hereinafter referred to as " full code "), (That is, applying the full input method in a secondary manner), and conversely, it is possible to check whether a full code is generated for the input value (that is, applying the full input method first or the basic A full input mode is applied to the input mode), and a simple code is recognized if the full code can not be formed (that is, the second shortening input method is applied). The interpretation of the input value as a simple code can be regarded as applying the "short-cut input mode" as the basic input mode, while conversely, the first full code interpretation is the "full input mode" as the basic input mode As shown in Fig. It is desirable that a user who mainly uses a common phrase in a character input should primarily apply a short-cut input method (i.e., use a short-cut input mode as a basic input mode), and a user who does not use the full input method first (I.e., use the full input mode in the basic input mode).

In this case, when the basic input mode is set to the full input mode, since the input values are primarily regarded as full codes, the input values can form a full code even when the simple code is input. A word other than the target word can be input. For example, in FIG. 4-2, when the reference repetition selection method is applied by the full input method, the simple code of the word "corn" is set to "877" (syllable reference initial code is used) It is regarded as a full code, so it can be recognized as "F". This happens when the first and second letters of the second letter correspond to the same button, such as "corn", "corn", "no limit", "warr", "excellent number", " Conversely, when the basic input mode is set to the short-cut input mode, since the input values are primarily regarded as simple codes, they can be recognized as words other than the target words even when a full code is input. That is, the ambiguity between simple code and full code is called "third ambiguity" for convenience.

This third ambiguity can be overcome by a toggle method or a list selection method similar to the existing method. Alternatively, it is possible to switch from the full input mode to the short input mode or from the short input mode to the full input mode on a word by word basis before inputting the input values in which such ambiguity may occur. This is done by inputting a word or a hiragana word in katakana mode or by entering a word in hiragana mode by selecting the word "hiragana / katakana conversion control" with the "ah / ah" control as presented in the applicant's original application It is similar to what you can do. For example, if the default input mode is full input mode, the system will recognize it as a simple code for the input value after selecting it with the "short / full" control, referencing the index, It is possible to provide the corresponding target word to the user. Even if the short input mode is used as the basic input mode, the input value input after selecting the "short / full" control can be recognized as a full code from the beginning. The &quot; short / full &quot; control may also be pre-entered or post-entered for the target word, but in this case it may be convenient to pre-populate.

The determination of whether the input value when applying the parallel input method is a full code or a simple code may be done word by word like referring to the index to remove the first ambiguity, It may be judged as a simple code.

When the full input method is set as the basic mode and parallel input method is applied, each input of the code checks whether the input value forms a full code. When it is judged that the full code can not be formed, And the efficiency of the parallel input method can be doubled by referring to the simple code index and displaying the corresponding phrase to the user. In the same way, when the parallel input method is applied to the basic mode, the input value and the index are compared with each other. When the input value is compared with the input value in the index, Can be judged by the full code of This implies that the third ambiguity occurring in the middle of the input can be removed at the beginning of input by applying the rules in each full input method. This can be applied to the case where an alphabet input method not provided in the prior application is used as a method of the pull-in power. Based on the full input method (reference repetition selection method, partial selection method) presented in the prior application, for example,

In case of Korean, for example, when the reference repetition selection method is applied based on FIG. 4-2 as a full input method, the second input value and the third input value of all syllables by the full code must always have the same value If this condition is violated, the input value can be judged as a simple code and processed. If it is allowed to process a pair of consonants with a combination of basic consonants, a judgment criterion can be applied accordingly. This is applicable in all cases where the standard iterative method is applied.

In addition, in all languages, when applying the partial selection method as a full input method, two input values correspond to one alphabet, and the second input value is limited to the first input value of the two input values have. For example, in the case of English, if only the left and right straight line combination is used as shown in FIG. 1-1, if the number is not selected by the partial whole selection method, the buttons ([1], [2] ) Is used as the first input value corresponding to one alphabet, the value that can be inputted as the second input value is also the button ([1], [2], [3]) of the first row. Similarly, if the button ([4], [5], [6]) of the second row is input after [2] + [1] is input, the next value to form the full code is also the second row ([4], [5], [6]) of the button. As soon as the input value violates it, the system regards the input value as a simple code and recommends the word corresponding to the simple code to the user according to the priority. For example, as shown in FIG. 5-3, in a parallel input method in which a full input method is set as a full input method and a full input method is set as a basic input mode, when a user inputs a simple code of "help" As soon as the input value 3 is input, the system recognizes that the input value does not form a full code and treats the input value as a simple code.

If we apply the partial selection method in Figure 4-2, there is only one button [1] or [2] next to the input of the first [1] button to form the full code. If it is determined that the input value is not a full code, it is determined that the input value is a simple code, and the target word corresponding to the input value can be recommended to the user according to the priority by referring to the index. When the four alphabets P, Q, R and S are assigned to the button [7] as shown in FIG. 1-3, one of the four alphabets is placed in a grid constituting the upper and lower adjacent combinations (7), (8), (9), and (9) buttons in the third row, if the [7] button is pressed to achieve a full code for one alphabet, ) Or a combination of upper and lower adjacent combinations ([4] button), the input value can be processed as a simple code if it is in violation. This is applicable to all languages when applying the partial selection method presented in the prior application.

For example, in a simple code index based on FIG. 1-1, a simple code of Beijing is stored with "25" as a syllable standard initial code, a partial full selection method is used as a full input method, When the user inputs "25", the full input mode is set as the basic input mode and the system enters the input code "25" after inputting [2] and [5] (Since the button for the combination of left and right straight lines that can be followed by [2] is one of [1], [2], and [3]) and recognizes the input code "25 Quot; to &quot; Beijing &quot; corresponding to &quot; In the case of Chinese, kanji (kanji, that is, Beijing) can be provided to the user with the phrase corresponding to the specifically exemplified simple code &quot; 25 &quot; (since the kanji &quot; Beijing &quot; For languages that use non-Chinese sound characters, the system will provide the user with "Beijing" corresponding to the simple code "25". If there are several phrases corresponding to the simple code "25", they can be provided in the form of a list, or they can be selected by the user repeatedly (by toggling) by pressing a specific button. .

As a result, the parallel input method is applied as shown in FIG. 5-4 by registering a simple code for commonly used words such as "Beijing" in the index, and performing a general input method and a shortcut input in parallel However, when inputting a word registered as a simple code, it is possible to input a small number of strokes.

In the case of Fig. 4-5, since only one basic consonant is allocated per button, when using the syllable reference initial code which can be used in Korean in a simple code, the short axis input method and the full input method are applied in parallel There is also good characteristics that can be input without third ambiguity. In other words, when the user inputs a syllable-based initial code when applying the parallel input method, since the input value can not be a full code from the second input (when inputting the horn or whistle by the control processing method), the index of the simple code And the user can recommend appropriate words according to the priority. The same is true for full code input.

As an example of the above, it is one of the "core" of the present invention that it is possible to judge whether the input value is a simple code or a full code in the middle of the input when applying the parallel input method. This applies not only to the use of the full input method proposed by the applicant but also to the use of other full input methods. For example, there is a method of inputting an alphabet by combining a first button assigned with each alphabet and a second button corresponding to the alphabetical order in the first button. That is, in Fig. 1-1, P = [7] + [1] was input. In this case, the second button is one of the [1], [2], and [3] buttons in Figure 1-1, so the moment the input value violates this rule, the system regards the input value as a simple code It can be processed. In particular, the full input method proposed by the applicant has a good characteristic of easily knowing whether input values form a full code when inputting a parallel input method as in the above example.

Also, as mentioned in the applicant's earlier application, interpreting simple or full code may occur at the client side or at the server side. In looking up an index to overcome the first ambiguity (alphabetic ambiguity) in the prior art, a scenario in which a client side index is referred to first and a second server side index is referred to is referred to as a simple code or a full code is interpreted But it can also be applied to Conversely, it is also possible to refer primarily to the server-side index and secondarily to the client-side index. Further, the input value is firstly interpreted as a simple code, firstly referring to the index on the client side, secondarily referring to the server side index, and if the simple code for the input value can not be retrieved, However, if the client side interprets it primarily and there is no such interpretation function on the client side, it is possible to interpret it on the server side. As another example, it is also possible to interpret the input value as a simple code, referencing both the index on the client side and the index on the server side, providing it to the user, and allowing the user to select the target word. Similar variations are possible when applying the analysis method (simple code, full code) and the analysis site (client side, server side). That is, various combinations are possible in the application of the analysis method (simple code, full code) and the interpretation place (client side, server side). (A) - (B) - (C) - (D) or (A) - (C) - (B) - (D) ), (B), (C), (D).

The advantage of applying the short input method and the full input method in parallel is as follows. First, since the full input method can be used, the user can input all the words even if the words other than the predefined word are not present in the dictionary, and the simple code for using the shortcut input method for the common phrase / Full association) can be specified, and by specifying a partial associative simple code, the number of input strokes can be greatly reduced. There is also an advantage in that word-based initials can be assigned to phrases as well as words. However, in the foreign method, since the method using the index of the word unit is used for inputting all the words, in order to minimize the case where the same code is applied to different words, the whole associated simple code can not be used.

In addition, the system must have an "index" that has code values for certain common phrases and their common phrases, requiring much less storage space than foreign methods that have an "index" for every word do. In order to eliminate ambiguity, this "index" must have an "index" for the correct word or an "index" for the correct word for the words that may cause ambiguity. It can be used jointly.

In all languages, the phonetic value of a particular word is a consonant, so techniques for extracting consonants and making an acronym have already been widely used. In the case of English, for example, consonant "CPT" with a phonetic value in "captain" is extracted and used as an abbreviation, "PVT" is used as an abbreviation in "private" ", Abbreviation" SSG "in" staff sergent ", abbreviation SFC in" sergent first class ", and so on. Of course, "captain" and "private" in the example are composed of two syllables respectively, but the consonants extracted by abbreviations can be seen as consonants representing each note. Therefore, in case of "captain", "278" associated with "CPT" can be designated as simple code.

In this way, the ability to apply the short - form input method by specifying a partial - associative simple code for a commercial phrase arbitrarily based on the syllable is significant in addition to reducing input effort. Phonetically, syllables are defined as "psychological reality." It is also the consonant that has the phonetic value in the verse. It is almost impossible to deduce the captain when extracting only the vowel "AAI" from the example captain. However, extraction of the consonant "CPTN" or "CPT" can easily be used to approximate the captain. It is said that it is possible to deduce the original sentence in the usual case even if only the consonant is removed by removing the vowel by each word in a sentence of English. That is, the use of the partial associative simple code in association with each subject, which is the subject of the syllable, means that the user can naturally adapt to the shortening input method, which means that it is convenient for the user.

Especially in the English language, it is common to use abbreviations. In the case of a listed company name, a certain number of abbreviations are specified, so that simple codes can be used based on this abbreviation.

Allowing the user to specify simple codes (partial associations, full associations) for specific phrases has the advantage of making it easier to remember code values for common phrases. Furthermore, if a user needs only a very small number of idioms (for example, using only ten or fewer idioms), do not bother with the code associated with the alphabet of the common phrase, 1, 2, 3,. . . And so on.

6.8 Grouping of Simple Code / Corresponding Phrases and Designation of Search Scope

If a simple code is assigned to a plurality of phrases, there is a possibility that many redundancies may occur. Grouping of the phrases corresponding to the simple code to search for a simple code only for a specific phrase group causes ambiguity between simple codes ) Can be reduced. A phrase does not necessarily have to belong to only one group, but it may belong to several groups.

For example, simple naming phrases are listed companies, city names, common phrases, ... And grouping the commercial phrase groups into a tree form using the detailed groups such as the social field, the political field, and the like. In this example, a grouping of two-level tree form is proposed, but a tree form grouping is possible in three, four, or more stages. See Figures 5-6. If the user (or system) restricts the search range of the simple code to the company name group, when the specific simple code is input, the system searches for the named word corresponding to the simple code inputted only in the category of the listed company name group It is possible to reduce the difference ambiguity. Similarly, if the search range is a common phrase, all the subgroups below the common phrase group can be included in the search range. If the social field group of the common phrase group is designated as the search range, only the group of the sub-category including the social field (in the tree-shaped group structure) will be the search range.

The group of the tree form in FIG. 5-6 can be thought of as a folder in the window explorer. The search range may be automatically re-designated by the system. For example, when a hierarchical structure of an administrative district is stored in a subgroup of a city name, if the user selects a particular city, then the search range for the next entry is, of course, the name of the sub- . For example, if the user selects "Seoul" in the city, the next selection range becomes a "sphere" in the city of Seoul, and once the user selects "double sphere", the next selection range is " Dong. "

6.9 Using Relay Server

The interpretation of simple code can be done either on the client side or on the server side. We can deduce the simple code (including the full code in some cases) A relay server may be provided. See Fig. 6-1. Also, in FIG. 6-1, if the client decodes the simple code first and does not interpret the word corresponding to the input simple code, it interprets the phrase corresponding to the simple code inputted secondarily from the relay server, In case of failure, it is possible to interpret the phrase corresponding to the simple code input from each server again in the third place. The third simple code decryption server (referred to as a "third server" for convenience) is a server equipped with an application that uses a simple code corresponding to the input simple code or simple code.

If you have a relay server, you need to input a simple code even if the third server side requires a phrase rather than a simple code, and the third server side does not store a phrase corresponding to the simple code and simple code , It is possible that the relay server interprets the simple code inputted from the user by the relay server and delivers the word corresponding to the simple code to the third server side.

Each time a code value of a simple code is input, it is possible to search the index where the corresponding word corresponding to the simple code is stored, to provide feedback to the client side or each server side, and to give feedback on a word-by-word basis.

6.10 Division by word

In the present invention, word unit means from the beginning of a word to the end of a word. This can be identified through a combination of all elements (word start, space, mode change, entry, ...) that can distinguish words from words. For example, from blank to blank, from blank to mode, etc., it is possible to identify that a word has been entered through word start to word end. Providing feedback on a word-by-word basis can be fully implemented through languages that support the current network environment.

6.11 Downloading simple code / correspondence phrase

Further, even if the user does not directly input and store the simple code corresponding to the simple code and the simple code on the server side, it is possible to download the same to the client side.

Downloaded units can be downloaded as a single unit of phrase, or they can be downloaded as a group unit (group of tree structure) of the above phrase. When you select a higher group, you can download the lower group. The tree structure of the server-side phrase group can be downloaded while maintaining the tree structure of the server-side phrase group, and phrases belonging to the group and the lower group can be downloaded as a group designated by the user on the client side. If there is a relay server whose main function is decryption of the simple code, this function may be handled by the relay server.

7. Enter symbols

As previously presented in the previous section, it was explained that the native language alphabet could be arranged in the order of "close to the reference grid", and then the numbers and the English alphabet could be arranged. In applying the basic iteration selection method, And that the national language alphabet and number can be selected. Similarly, in applying the subsequent control processing method, not only the native language alphabet belonging to a specific button, but also numbers and English alphabets can be inputted through the subsequent control processing method.

The present invention proposes a method (that is, a method of concealed control processing) that enables inputting without being displayed on the keypad, which is one step further, which can be displayed on the keypad and inputted on the keypad do.

In other words, one of the grids in which the controls are placed in the prior art is to input symbols by placing a "symbol control" on the appropriate grid and combining the symbol controls and buttons (other than the control buttons). Here, for example, a button that can mean a symbol is a [5] button because a dot can easily represent "ㅁ" in a period.

For example, in the embodiment of the Korean patent application (Fig. 4-2), the symbol control can be placed at the position of the grid where the [*] button can be selected by two successive presses. This means that the relation between the representative alphabet and the subsequent alphabet, such as a (representative alphabet), k (2nd), symbol (3rd), ... In case of control line input, when you enter "period", ㅁ = {symbol} + ㅁ = [*] + [*] + [5]. When inputting after control, ㅁ = ㅁ + {symbol} = [5] + [*] + [*]. If you place the symbol control at the position of the grid that can be selected by pressing the [*] button three times, the input of the [*] button is added one by one in the example.

If you have only one symbol control, you can enter only about ten symbols, even if you give one symbol for each of the ten number buttons. An example of giving the meaning of a symbol to each button is as follows.

[1] Button:? (Meaning that "a" is placed and similar to "?")

* [2] button:! Meaning ("ㄴ" is placed, the first letter of "exclamation point" is the same)

[3] Button: Meaning of $ ("ㄷ" is placed, the first letter of "dollar" is the same)

[4] Button:. . .

[5] Button:. Meaning ("ㅁ" is placed in the "punctuation" is the same as the first letter)

[6] Button: Meaning of * ("ㅂ" is placed in the first letter of "asterisk" is the same)

[7] Button: Meaning of, ("ㅅ" is placed, the first letter of "comma" is the same)

[8] Button: Meaning ("ㅇ" is placed, the first letter of "quotation marks" is the same)

[9] Button: Meaning of ~ (the vowel "ㅡ" is arranged, similar in shape to ~)

[0] button: The meaning of @ (the number 0 is placed and resembles the shape of @)

As mentioned above, symbols can be input by combining a button and a symbol control that can remind various kinds of symbols. The meaning of symbols is given to each button, as in the example, the relationship between the national language name / shape of the symbol and the arranged alphabet, the relationship between the English name / shape and the arranged English alphabet, The meaning of the symbol can be given in consideration of the relationship with This may not be the same as above because it may be different according to the individual's taste, and it may be possible for each individual to set (re) the meaning of the symbol for each button.

This allows the frequently used symbols to be treated as if they were the succeeding alphabets belonging to the easy-to-remember numeric buttons as in the example. In the above example, the question mark is associated with the [1] button where "a" is placed, taking into account the similarity of shapes, because the more frequently used period begins with "ㅁ".

Similarly, in assigning the meaning of a symbol to each button, you can use English name / shape or numerical name / shape. The following examples can be applied in combination with the case of the native language.

[1] Button:? (The letter "q" is placed and the first letter of the "Question mark" is the same)

[2] Button: Meaning of, ("c" is placed, but the first letter of "Comma" is the same)

[3] Button:. Meaning ("d" is placed, the first letter of "Dot" is the same)

[4] Button:! Meaning ("i" is arranged and resembles shape with "!")

[5] Button:. . .

[6] Button:. . .

[7] Button: Meaning of / ("s" is placed and the first letter of "Slash" is the same)

[8] Button: Meaning: (number "8" is placed: similar to shape)

[9] Button:! (Pronounced "x" is associated with "eXclamation mark")

[0] button: The meaning of @ (the number 0 is placed and resembles the shape of @)

Giving meaning of symbols based on English can be useful in non - English language areas using key pads written in English. Also, setting the colon with the similarity of the shape of the number 8 has the advantage of being universally usable regardless of the language. Similarly, comma can also be regarded as a subsequent alphabet of the [9] button, with the similarity of shape to the number 9, but not in the above example.

Symbol controls can be set on the appropriate buttons. In English, if you do not place controls for other purposes in the [*] button in Figure 1-1, select the [*] button 1 Tarot Symbol Control (ie place the symbol control at the position of the [*] You may. In European languages where there are subscripted variants of the alphabet, you can place symbol controls at the position of the reference grid of the [0] button or [#] button. However, if you place symbol controls on the [0] button, it is best not to give the "@" sign as in the example above.

If you put the symbol control on the [*] button and apply the input after the control, in English, you can enter colon (:) in Figure 1-1: = [8] + {symbol} = [8] + [*] do.

As you can see in the example above, if you give each symbol the meaning of the symbol associated with it, and place the symbol control on only one of the control buttons, you can enter only about 10 symbols. Also, in assigning meaning to each button, it is possible to assign a meaning of slash, semi-colon, period, etc. to a button assigned with "s" as in the example of English, but only the meaning of slash, which is one of them, is given. Since the dot assigned to the button to which "d" is assigned is also given as the dot, in the case of the exclamation mark, "!" is assigned to the button assigned "i" .

Thus, by allowing a number of symbol controls (for example, Symbol Control 1, Symbol Control 2, ...) to be selected, a greater number of symbols can be entered through the control processing method. For example, if you assign a dot to the button to which the "d" is assigned (or assign a "dot" to a button assigned to "ㅁ") and make the comma with a similar shape as the next alphabet of the dot Can be processed.

For example, "dot (.) = 3 ****" can be used as a symbol input associated with a button to which a basic consonant having a lattice or light consonant is assigned. "3 *** = big", so you can enter the promised symbol four times [*] button. You can type in the dot (.) As in "comma (,) = 3 *****" and then press the [*] button once more to input the character which does not start with the vowel "ㅡ" . The input of comma (,) can be understood from the viewpoint of the chain type follow-up control processing method.

If it is assumed that the tremors are not input by the control processing method (that is, if there is no treble control), it is natural that "symbol control 1" is selected in the [*] button 2 (skip control processing). Similarly, colon and semi-colon with similar shapes can be regarded as subsequent alphabets assigned to the same button, and can be input by control processing methods. Similar symbols can be applied to other symbols.

Even if you use two symbol controls with "Symbol Control 1" and "Symbol Control 2", you have to remember and memorize the meaning of each symbol on the button, and there is a limit to the number of symbols you can input do. Therefore, you can group more symbols by grouping them with dot and comma, and grouping them with colon and semi-colon, and have many symbol controls so you can enter more symbols.

It is also desirable to group the symbols so that they can be grouped according to the user's convenience. In the present invention, an example of symbol grouping that can be generally used is shown. First, the transformation type of the dot can be set as one group based on the shape of various symbols. For example, dot (.), Comma (), colon (:), semicolon (;), quotation mark ("), ..., question mark (?), Exclamation mark (! It can be grouped as a dot, or a "zero-dimensional" symbol grouped into groups, where? And! Are both 0-dimensional and 1-dimensional, dot type) group, it is preferable to allow the user to set the ranking of the group in the following alphabet, although the frequency of use and the like can be considered as mentioned in the prior application. When the number of symbols to be considered is large, it is convenient to input the symbol control afterwards, and in the terminal with the display window, the symbol changes according to the depression of the control button.

It is also possible to associate the grouped dot type (0-dimensional type) symbol with a specific button so that it can be set at the convenience of the user. For example, if a group can be represented and the most frequently used symbol is a dot, it can be regarded as a subsequent alphabet belonging to the button [3] containing the dot "d". 3] + [*], comma = [3] by applying the input after the control, using the symbol control button as the [*] button in the example of Figure 7-1, + * + [*] + [*], colon = [3] + [*] + [*] + [*], semi- colon = ,. . . . Or if you think of it as the next alphabet belonging to the [0] button, it will be combined with the [0] button, not the [3] button. Otherwise, the dot form is the most basic form and can be considered as a subsequent alphabet of the [1] button.

Next, you can group symbols in a line, or "one-dimensional" form, into groups. For example, you can use slash (/), hat symbol (^), question mark (?), Exclamation mark (!), Round parenthesis 1 ((), round parenthesis 2 () 2 (>), right angle bracket 1 ([), right angle bracket 2 (]), tilde (~), minus (-), arrow 1 (<-), arrow 2 (->). . . And so on. As described in the prior application, an accessory rank may be set in consideration of the frequency of use and the like, and associating it with a subsequent alphabet of a specific button may set an appropriate button as described above. For example, it is regarded as a subsequent alphabet belonging to the [1] button, or as a subsequent alphabet of the button [5] in which the alphabet "l" is arranged.

Then, the combination of lines, that is, symbols of the " two-dimensional " form, can be grouped into groups. For example, at (@), ampersent (&), asterisk (*), sharp (#), dollar ($), currency symbol (W + =), yen symbol (¥). . . , heart1 (♡), heart2 (♥), clover 1 (♧), white one (◁), white one two (▷), white three three (∇). . . , Black triangle 1 (◀),. . ., ☏, ☎, ☜, ♨ and so on. Also, the ranking of the accessories can be based on the frequency of use, and associating them with specific buttons can be done in an appropriate way. You can associate a zero-dimensional symbol or a one-dimensional symbol in front of a button other than the associated button.

As mentioned above, when grouping symbols into three groups of zero dimensional, one dimensional, and two dimensional shapes (this is called "three large groups" for convenience), it is advantageous to store only three related number buttons, If you enter a symbol, you have to press the control button several times. Therefore, if you see an example of subdividing a few groups (called "subgroups" for convenience):

First, a symbol group (eg, *, #,%, ...) that forms a combination of lines in a two-dimensional symbol group is divided into a symbol group (eg, ◁, ◀, ...) . In addition, groups of symbols such as ☏, ☎, ☜, ☞, ♨, ... in the group can be grouped into separate groups. It is also placed in the next alphabetical letter belonging to the appropriate button. If you leave these groups separately, you can exclude or exclude these symbols from the preceding symbol group, which is the same for all other cases.

Next, the symbols used in the mathematical expressions of the one - dimensional or two - dimensional forms, ie, +, -, *, /, root (√), sigma (Σ), integral (∫). . . Etc. may be placed in separate groups. You can also place it in the following alphabet that belongs to the appropriate button.

,,,,,, ↘,,,,,,,,,,,.,., ↘,,,,,,,.. . . Can be divided into groups. You can also consider the following alphabet in relation to the appropriate button.

(And), [,], {,}, <,>, and so on, which can form another group relatively feasibly. . . Can be put into another group. Also, when grouping in parentheses, the left parenthesis and the right parenthesis can be grouped separately.

If you want to be able to enter symbols by subdividing groups without putting in 3 groups, you can leave the alphabet belonging to the subgroup in the 3 groups. You will have to put it in subordination.

The above symbol grouping is applied to FIG. 1-1, and an example in which each symbol group is regarded as a subsequent alphabet of a specific button is as follows. The symbol group of the 0-dimensional form is regarded as a subsequent alphabet belonging to the [0] button, the symbol group of the one-dimensional form is regarded as a subsequent alphabet belonging to the button [1] Consider a symbol group of a two-dimensional symbol group as a subsequent closed alphabet, a symbol group of a single closed symbol type as a subsequent alphabet belonging to the [8] button, a symbol group of a two-dimensional symbol group as a [7] button , The mathematical symbol group is regarded as a subsequent alphabet belonging to the [6] button, the directional symbol group is regarded as a subsequent alphabet belonging to the [3] button, and the group of bracketed symbols belongs to any of the remaining numeric buttons It can be regarded as a subsequent alphabet. As described above, in associating a symbol group with each button, this is only an example, and can be set according to the convenience of the user.

In conclusion, the symbols can be grouped into three groups (0-dimensional, 1-dimensional, 2-dimensional) in the control processing by considering them as the following alphabet belonging to a particular button, And it is one of the core of the present invention that it has been shown that almost all the symbols can be inputted. Also, in considering each group of symbols as a subsequent alphabet belonging to a certain button, it is treated as a subsequent alphabet belonging to a button associated with a group of symbols such as name, dimension, shape, etc., so that symbols are not displayed on the keypad It is one of the core of the present invention that the " concealed type subsequent control processing method " can be used while maintaining the alphabet arrangement.

The control buttons for symbols in this application mainly use the [*] button or any of the buttons in the up and down buttons, but you can use the [#] button as a follow-up control button for numbers and English alphabet. For example, if the [#] button is already being used as a subsequent control button, you can add additional controls for numbers and English alphabets to the available grid on the [#] button. Again, in the choice of controls, as mentioned earlier, controls that can not be combined with a representative alphabet can be skipped and the next available control selected.

8. How to use the Move button

8.1 Using the Move Button as a Control Button

In the prior art, a control button in which various controls are arranged may be placed on any button in the 4 * 3 keypad or in a separate button other than the 4 * 3 keypad. And you might have experienced the lack of buttons to use as control buttons in the 4 * 3 keypad, especially in languages where there are a lot of alphabets and there are many variants of alphabets in the preamble. According to the present invention, the primary function of the left / up / down movement buttons which are not used relatively frequently in the character input mode can be utilized as a control button mentioned in the present invention. In other words, when using a separate button outside the 4 * 3 keypad as a control button in the character input mode, the up / down / left button is used as a control button.

FIG. 8-1 shows a button of a folder type terminal which is typically used at present. The [i] button indicated by the dashed line is a button for accessing the Internet, and this button may or may not exist according to the terminal. Here, the right movement button is used for blank input, and in Korean, it is also used as a syllable (character) confirmation button for eliminating the first ambiguity. In the menu selection mode other than the character input mode, the up / down / left movement buttons are usefully used as a movement button for selecting a menu. However, in the character input mode, the up / down / left movement buttons are not frequently used, especially the up / down movement buttons are not used frequently. For convenience, the up / down / left movement buttons are collectively called "up / down movement button" or "up / down left button" and the up / down movement button is called "up / down movement button" or "up / down button". The same applies to the case where only one movement button in one direction is referred to.

8.2 Movement Button Bottom Layout

First, the up and down buttons are usually placed on the numeric buttons. However, in order to utilize the primary function of these buttons as a button for various alphabet input in the character input mode, it is useful to be placed at the bottom of the 4 * 3 keypad together with the [*] and [#] buttons used as control buttons. . Figures 8-2 and 8-3 illustrate this. However, this is not necessarily so, and for convenience, the example of the present invention will be described as an example in which the movement button is disposed at the lower side of the 4 * 3 keypad.

It can be seen that a 5 * 3 keypad can be constructed by combining the 4 * 3 keypad and the up and down buttons. This means that each button can be divided into 15 meshes of 3x5 when applying the partial selection method. Likewise, it is not necessary to arrange the upper and lower buttons so as to configure the 5 * 3 keypad as shown in FIG. 8-3.

8.3 Move button Left or right side layout

The up, down, left, and right movement buttons can be placed on the left or right of the 4 * 3 keypad. In this case, the 4 * 3 keypad and the move button can be combined to form a 4 * 4 keypad. FIG. 8-4 shows an example in which the up, down, left, and right movement buttons are provided on the right side of the 4 * 3 keypad.

This is an advantage that the size of the liquid crystal of the terminal is getting bigger, and the size of the liquid crystal of the terminal can be made larger. In addition, there is a good characteristic in the parallel application of the side battery mounting method in the mobile terminal proposed in the applicant's Korean Patent Application Nos. 10-2000-0002081, 10-2000-0005671, 10-2000-0067852, and 10-2001-0002137.

8.4 Examples of control buttons and buttons for alphabet input

Here is an example of using the move button. However, it is not limited to the example below.

8.4.1 Application example with symbol control button

In the Korean example, there were occasions where sound control and sound control were placed on the [*] button and the [#] button, respectively. There were also cases where the [*] button was placed on the shaky controller and the shaky control, and the [#] button was placed only the basic vowel control and extended vowel control, and only the extension vowel control was placed on the [#] button. In this case, if the symbol control is placed on the [*] button or the [#] button, the control button will be followed by a humming, a hyphen, etc., followed by a symbol. This is the same in other languages.

However, if the symbol control is separated and placed on any one of the up and down buttons, the symbol associated with the symbol group and the symbol control button with the symbol control can be entered in combination. FIG. 8-5 shows an example in which the primary function of the downward movement button is used as a control button for selection of symbol control. [3] + [v], comma = [3] + [v] + [v], and colon = [3] + [v] + [v] + [v], and semi-colon = [3] + [v] + [v] + [v] + [v]. . . .

8.4.2 Use as a collection element button in Korean

In particular, in the case of using the vowel element (ㅡ, ㅣ,.) In the Korean example in the earlier application, it was inconvenient to input the vowel element by placing the vowel element " These disadvantages can be overcome by disposing them on any of the upper and lower buttons. If you place the symbol control on the down button and the vowel element "." On the up button, you will use the two buttons on the up and down buttons. Alternatively, you can place three Korean elements in the upper and lower buttons.

Just as you put a symbol control on a button that has a sham sound control, the Korean vowel element "." Is added to the reference grid position of any button in the left and right buttons. , The symbol controls may be placed in the order close to the reference grid. Figure 8-6 is an example of this. In this case, since the "." Is not used alone, it is possible to select the vowel element and the symbol control without ambiguity even when selecting the vowel element and the symbol control arranged by the iterative selection method. In Figure 8-6, if you press the [v] button once, the vowel element "." Is selected and if you press twice, symbol control 1 is selected, and if you press it 3 times, symbol control 2 is selected.

8.4.3 Example of using Japanese as subscript control button

In Japanese, if the layout of the 50-note chart corresponds to each button, and the 2nd and 3rd follow-up controls are placed on the [*] button and the 4th and 5th follow-up controls are placed on the [#] ), Control for long sound / mute / answer sound input can be placed in any of the up and down buttons. See Figure 8-7.

8.4.4 Examples of using as a subscript control button for entering a vowel in Arabic

In Arabic, controls for processing subscripted vowels can be distributed over any button (s) in the up and down buttons.

8.4.5 Examples of using Thai as a control button

In Thai, the consonant control and the vowel control are not separated, and one control button is used as a follow-up control button. Any one of the upper and lower buttons can be additionally used as a control button. Or other control buttons.

8.5 Example of application with short / full switching control button

When applying the parallel input method, there is a third ambiguity that arises between the simple code and the full code. To avoid this, we proposed a word-based "short / full" conversion control method. For example, if you want to use the full input method as the default mode and enter words using the shortcut input method when applying the parallel input method, first select the "Short / Full" conversion control, enter the blank (right shift button) It was to enter a simple code. Of course, the order of the whitespace and "short / full" toggle controls may change. Here, the word "short / full" switching control can be placed on any one of the upper and lower buttons. Or a combination of "short / full" toggle control and blank (right-shift button) controls can be placed at the default grid position of any of the up and down buttons. See Figure 8-8.

If it is assumed that the English alphabet shown in FIG. 1-1 is arranged in the numeric buttons of FIG. 8-8, the entire associated simple code "4357" of the help is inputted while the basic alphabet input mode is the full input mode, You can input "~ Full code input + [^] + [4] + [3] + [5] + [7] + [+] + Full code input ~". That is, since the movement function of the up-shift button [^] is limited and the word-based "short / full" switching function and the blank function are added together, the moment the [^] button is pressed, the system displays the next "[4] + ... "Is not a full code but a simple code, and referring to the index, it is possible to recommend a word closest to the input [4] to the user. When the input of [4] + [3] + [5] + [7] ends and the word ends when the blank button ([>] button) is pressed, the "short / full" Again waiting for input of the full code. If the [^] button is pressed again after the input of the simple code 4357, the system recognizes that the word is also terminated and confirms the help corresponding to the simple code 4357 and waits for the input of the simple code again.

In the parallel input method, if only one right button (blank button) is used, there may be a third ambiguity between the full code and the simple code as mentioned in the prior application. In order to avoid this, , It was necessary to check whether a simple code exists or whether it is a promised full code. However, by adding the "short / full" mode switching of the word unit and the blank button, it is possible for the system to recognize whether the input value is full code or simple code, It will be possible.

8.6 Examples of using the add / drop button in calculator mode

The four movement buttons can be used as the most frequently used add / drop (+, -, x, /) buttons in the calculator mode regardless of their position. You can also mark the button for the add / drop system, but the calculator will not be used more often than the alphabet input, so you may not want to display it on the button. In the alphabet input mode, each button will be used as a move button or a control button.

In addition, it is possible to select an operator that can be used in the calculator by placing it on the acceleration / deceleration button (concealed type) and by selecting it repeatedly. Operators (binary operators) often used in calculator mode are based on properties that do not appear repeatedly. For example, there can be no calculation of 2 ++ 1. Also, 24 can be set to 2xx4 to select the "squared" operator by repeatedly pressing the w (x) button. That is, it is the same as repeating selection with the operator (xx) as the succeeding operator on the w (x) button. Likewise (O3), you can choose to select the "square root" operator by unpacking it with 3 // 2 and pressing the (/) button repeatedly. Since other binary operators do not appear redundantly, it is possible to select a subsequent operator as a subsequent operator belonging to an appropriate acceleration / deceleration button and to select a subsequent operator by an iterative selection method.

You can also use the [*] button with the additive (+, -, /) operator on the three buttons of the up, down, left, and right buttons and the w (x) operator.

9. Activate help feature

In this mode, functions that are not displayed on the buttons (Up / Down / Left / Right) can be displayed on the screen to add convenience. In this case, there is a disadvantage of consuming a part of the liquid crystal. Of course, a user who functions as an operator button does not need to display the liquid crystal space while consuming the space of the liquid crystal. However, have. 8-1. FIG. 9-1 is an example in which the left, right, up and down buttons are arranged on the right side of the 4 * 3 keypad as shown in FIG.

This is referred to as "activation of the help function" for the convenience of the user to display the function of the button (that is, the operator assigned to the button or the group of symbols associated with each button). Activation of the help function can be done for each mode (eg alphabet input mode, calculator mode), for the required function in each mode (eg the use of numeric buttons or control buttons associated with symbol groups in alphabet input mode) There is also water.

Likewise, the numeric buttons associated with the function or symbol group of the control button presented in the prior application can also be displayed on the liquid crystal display if required by the user, thereby facilitating the user's convenience. See Figure 9-2. 9-2 is an example in which the number buttons associated with the respective symbol groups are displayed as icons on the liquid crystal display in accordance with the symbol group classification illustrated above. For convenience, only the first selected symbol is added to the number button icon among the symbols in the symbol group associated with each number button.

10. How to use the Delete button

When utilizing the delete button, it can be used as "final input cancellation" introduced by the prior application. For example, to input "a" in Figure 4-2, enter "1" + [*] to enter "ㅋ" and press the delete button to cancel the final input ([*] It can be done. This can be useful if you want to repeatedly press the control button to enter a subsequent alphabet. In the case of pressing the cancel button continuously, it is sufficient to delete the already inputted alphabet in the usual way. For example, if you press the cancel button once while typing "Ghana", it becomes "Ghana". If you press it once again, it becomes "Ghana" and once again, it becomes "Ghana". In the case of the roman alphabet, if you press the delete button once, "aba" is entered in the state where "ab a .." is entered (last letter "a .." ab ", and once again, it becomes" a ". That is, the already formed alphabet is deleted in alphabetical units.

11. Unification of the numeric keypad of the keyboard and the keypad of the telephone terminal

It is apparent that the prior art and the keypad of the present invention can be applied to all fields such as a numeric keypad of a mobile terminal or a standard keyboard, or a keypad or a door lock which is configured in software on a screen. Also, it is obvious that the numeric keypad of the standard keyboard differs in arrangement of the keypad and the numeric buttons according to the present invention, and the arrangement of the keypad buttons in the present invention can be applied to the keypad provided in the keyboard . For example, in the prior art and in the present invention, the alphabet placed on the [1] button is arranged on the [1] button of the numeric keypad provided on the keyboard, and arranged in the same manner as described below to utilize the alphabet input, It can be used for memorization.

However, in order to reduce confusion and add convenience to use, the numeric arrangement of the telephone keypad can be utilized in configuring the numeric keypad of the keyboard. [4], [5], and [5] are assigned to the buttons on the second row and the second row on the numeric keypad on the keyboard, , [6], and [7], [8], [9] buttons on the third row of buttons. You can also use the [*] and [#] buttons as on the phone keypad.

12. Language restriction input method

The language restriction input method means to reduce the ambiguity in inputting characters by using the combination rule of consonants and vowels in word generation of a specific language.

In the following, it is obvious that the contents of one of the languages mentioned in other languages can be applied to other languages without special mention. Further, similar concepts can be applied to languages that do not use the Roman alphabet.

12.1 How to Select Chinese Repetition Iteration on Keypad Separator for Roman Alphabet

12.1.1 Composition of Chinese Mother and Mica

(^e) 는 거의 사용되지 않는다고 함)가 있다고 한다. 성모는 자음에 해당하고, 운모는 모음에 해당한다 고 한다. 중국대륙에서는 중국어음을 표기하는 방법으로 한어병음방안을 이용하 고, 대만에서는 주음부호를 이용하여 중국어음을 입력한다고 한다. 한어병음은 라틴자모즉 로마알파벳을 이용하여 중국어음을 표기하는 것이다. 주음부호와 그 에 대응되는 한어병음(로마알파벳)을 괄로안에 표시하면 다음과 같다. In Chinese there are 21 mothers and 16 mica (double

(^ e) is rarely used). The mothers correspond to consonants and mica corresponds to vowels. In the Chinese mainland, the method of expressing Chinese verb is used in Chinese language pinyin, and in Taiwan, the Chinese verse is input by using vernier code. Chinese Pinyin is a Chinese verse using the Latin alphabet, the Roman alphabet. The suffix code and its corresponding Chinese Pinyin (Roman alphabet) are indicated in parentheses as follows.

The following describes the combined mica of Chinese. Bonded mica is said to be preceded by three vowels i, u, ..u and followed by other mica. The following table lists the cases where binding is possible with the combined mica table.

In the above table, the binding of ia is possible, but the binding of io is impossible.

12.1.2 Input of Chinese Chinese Pinyin Using Roman Alphabet

As you can see in the table above, if you use the Roman alphabet, you can enter all of the 21 mothers in Chinese with a combination of 18 Roman alphabets, 16 mica with 7 single mica combinations, All combinations of alphabet consonants can be entered.

In addition, ^ e and ..u in the mica can be input by the control processing method considering the transformation alphabet of e and u respectively. Next, the five basic vowels can have four distinct vowel codes, which can also be entered by the control processing method. After all, in the case of Chinese using the Roman alphabet, all the Chinese mics can be entered using the five Roman alphabet basic vowels. This is the content that has already been shown in the French, German, etc. input by inputting the transformation alphabet which does not exist in English alphabet (ie Roman alphabet) by control processing method. An example of setting the subordinate relationship between the basic alphabet (basic vowel) and the subsequent alphabet (succeeding vowel) when inputting the Chinese mica by the control processing method is as follows.

In the above example, the alphabet with the first letter of the first letter is the letter after the letter, and ^ e is rarely used. It goes without saying that the ranking of the accessories may vary depending on the frequency of use. For example, you can set ..u to be the 2nd sequential alphabet, not 6th, and the remaining sequential alphabetic order, one by one.

Using the [*] button, the control button as an input example, and when after the control input applied, ^- e = e + [*], ^/ e = e + [*] + [*], ^v e = e + [*] e * e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e * + [*]. In Fig. 1-1, if e = [3] + [2], e = [3] + [2] + [*] is obtained. If the alphabet displayed on the keypad in Fig. 1-1 is selected by the partial whole selection method, the full code of the person (r ^/ en: second character) becomes " 7832 ** 65 &quot;. It is obvious that any other input method (e.g., simple repetitive selection method) may be used for inputting the " e "

Ultimately, you can use only one control button to simplify the input method. This can be applied to the case where the polyphonic sign is used instead of the Roman alphabet (for example, the same input method is applied to a keypad having a polyphonic sign corresponding to the English alphabet in FIG. 1-1).

12.1.3 How to Select Chinese Repetition Repetition on the Separator Bar Keypad

You can enter all the Chinese mothers in 18 Roman alphabets, of which only zh, ch, sh consecutive Roman alphabet consonants. In Chinese, when a syllable consisting of mica without mothers is written as a Chinese word, it is said to be marked with y, w, etc. formally. For example, "衣 = yi (one sex)" and "five = wu (three sex)".

As mentioned in the earlier application, it is very convenient to use a syllable-based initial code as a simple code in Chinese in which a Hanja character forms a syllable. Therefore, it is desirable that as many as 18 Roman alphabet consonants are assigned to each number button. In the present invention, it is proposed to group 18 Roman alphabet consonants into two and assign them to numeric buttons [1] to [9].

b p / d t / g k / z j / c q / s x / m n / l r / h f

In the above example, grouping is based on similarity of pronunciation. When using simple code, if there are many phrases (words or phrases) corresponding to the same simple code (syllable reference initial code) It is considered to have an initial code. The above example is just one example, and many variations are possible. It can be grouped according to similarity of pronunciation, grouping by various criteria such as English alphabet dictionary order, English alphabet correspondence note voice dictionary order, and so on. Another advantage of grouping similar footings into the same group and assigning them to the same button is that in all languages using the Roman alphabet, few consonants with similar pronunciations appear consecutively, so that ambiguity is less likely to occur I will lose. In addition, even in the case of using a simple code (especially a syllable-based initial code), even if there are many phrases corresponding to the same simple code, since the phrases are phrases having a similar pronunciation (phonetic value), confusion is minimized to the user, It can be natural.

Another thing is that zh, ch, and sh exist as Chinese mothers, so that z and h are not grouped into the same group, c and h, and s and h. (In Chinese, syllables are usually composed of "moxibustion + mica." In this embodiment, syllables are grouped into the same group, but there is no significant correlation. h, w and so on, and do not input it with the assigned button 3)

The nine groups illustrated above can be arbitrarily assigned to nine buttons [1] to [9] as shown in FIG. 10-1, and the repeated selection method can be applied to each alphabet input. Due to the nature of Chinese, there is no case in which Roman alphabet consonants appear consecutively except for the case of zh, ch, sh when the mother is entered. Therefore, it is possible to input without ambiguity even if the alphabet is inputted by the repetition selection method. For example, it is possible to input b = [1] and p = [1] + [1] in FIG. 10-1. It is needless to say that it is possible to select which one of the alphabets assigned to each button is to be selected by one letter, and that the alphabet having a high frequency of use is selected to be one letter according to the use frequency of the alphabet.

The Roman alphabet "v", which is rarely used in Chinese, can be placed in any of nine groups. For example, you might want to add "v" to a group with a pronounced "f" (or not explicitly assign it) and type "v" into that button. W and y used in "衣 = yi (1 st)" and "5 = wu (3 st)" are also put in the appropriate consonant group (or not assigned explicitly) . You can input w and y as three buttons of each alphabet). For example, if y is placed in a group to which / l, r / belongs, enter "l" with one button (the [8] button in Figure 10-1), enter "r" 3 &quot;, and &quot; w &quot; is placed in a group of / m and n /, the inputting of &quot; m &quot; ", And enter" w "in three.

By applying the iterative selection method, it is called the "Chinese limited repetition selection method" to reduce the ambiguity greatly by using the property that the Roman alphabet consonant and vowel are alternately displayed when inputting the Chinese word. When applying these properties in general to all languages other than Chinese, it is called "Language Restricted Repeat Selection Method (LRRSM)" for convenience and "Chinese Restricted Repeat Selection Method" Restricted RSM ". The first choice of linguistic repetition is to assign a pair of basic consonant and basic vowel to each button in Korean or Hindi, etc., and input it with less ambiguity by using repetitive selection method It is the same context. In addition, in the method using Korean vowel elements, it is possible to select the shrunken control by the iterative selection method using the property that the vowel "ㅡ" does not appear consecutively, ".

In particular, as shown in Figs. 10-1 to 10-4, a button assigned to a consonant (for convenience, a "consonant button") and a button assigned to a vowel (called a "vowel button" for convenience) And without assigning the vowels to the same button), when the iterative selection method is applied, there is a good characteristic that ambiguity can be greatly reduced by using the characteristics of each language in which consonants and vowels are combined. Similar to Figs. 10-1 to 10-4, a keypad having a predetermined number of consonants or vowels assigned to each button is divided into consonant buttons and vowel buttons, Quot; Consonant Vowal Separated Keypad (CVSK) &quot;.

10-1, it is easy to know that the Roman alphabet consonants and vowels displayed on the keypad can be input without ambiguity even when inputting Chinese Chinese words by repeating the selection method. When the same button is continuously pressed among consonant buttons ([1] - [9] buttons in Figure 10-1) for entering the Virgin Mary, the system can easily recognize that the second consonant displayed on the keypad has been input. This is because there is no case where the same roman alphabet appears consecutively in order to enter Chinese mother-in-law. When the same button is pressed once (i.e., when the same button is pressed three times), the input of w, y, v, and the like It is easy for the system to know. [7] If you enter "w = 777" with button 3, this can be interpreted as "mmm" or "mn" or "nm"

As shown in FIG. 10-1, the six vowels a, e, i, o, u, and u are divided into three groups of two to form three buttons (eg, [*], [0] ], And [#] buttons), you can enter each vowel without ambiguity by iterative selection method. This is possible because the Chinese alphabet does not appear twice in the Chinese language. For example, when a Chinese character is written in Chinese characters, there is no case such as "... aa ...".

In this case, we can see that a and i, and e and i, and o and u should not be grouped into the same group, if we put ia, ie, uo of biconical mica ai, ei, ou and combined mica. If a and i are grouped into the same group and assigned to the same button (eg the [*] button), the input of the corresponding button 3 (ie, '***') indicates 'ai' ia 'is input. FIG. 10-1 shows an example of grouping in consideration of these contents. It is noted that the vowel grouping and placement shown in Fig. 10-1 is not absolute, and the modification is possible as long as the above restrictions are satisfied. In Figure 10-1, each vowel can be entered by the iterative selection method. For example, i = [0], o = [0] + [0], iao = [0] + [*] + [0] + [0].

a and i, and e and i, and o and u are grouped into the same group, the group "a, e, o" is grouped (see FIGS. 10-2 and 10-4) "I, u, u" can be grouped into one group. Various variations will also be possible. These two groups of vowels can be assigned to any button (eg, [*], [#] button, respectively) within the 3 * 4 keypad and consonants "w, y, v" Yes, the [0] button). When three alphabets are grouped into one group (eg "a, e, o"), the corresponding button corresponding to the corresponding button 3 representing a combination of vowels (eg "ae", "ea", "aaa" Since there is no Chinese mica, "o" can be recognized without ambiguity by the corresponding button 3. In the example, &quot; a &quot; is input into the corresponding button 4, and since &quot; oa &quot; does not exist as a Chinese word, it can be recognized without ambiguity. Quot; w, y &quot; and the like are grouped into one group and assigned to the same button, the effect of assigning the half-consonant (i.e., half-tone) to the same button is effective.

In Figs. 10-2, 10-4 and 10-6, "a, e, o" are grouped into the same group, but only a combination of "ao" is possible. If only "a, o" is assigned to one button, the corresponding button 3 can be recognized as "ao" without ambiguity. However, if three alphabets are assigned and selected in the order of "a - o - e" depending on the number of button presses, unknown ambiguity can occur whether pressing the button three times is "ao" or "e" . Thus, in this case (where three or more vowels are assigned to the same button, and one combination of two vowels of the three vowels is possible), the two vowels that can be combined are not selected as one The ambiguity can be removed by using the language restriction by selecting 1, 3 (or 2, 3, and 5 corresponding buttons can be recognized as "ao"). In summary, in order to determine the selection order according to the number of button presses in the three alphabet groups, the selection order is set so that the alphabet that can appear continuously is not selected as the corresponding button 1 or 2 respectively.

10-1 to 10-4, the same button can be pressed a maximum of 2 or 3 times when entering the Virgin Mary in Roman alphabet. The system recognizes the number of times the button is repeatedly pressed, You can identify the alphabet. If the same button can be pressed three times consecutively in figures 10-1 and 10-3 when mosaic is input in roman alphabet, [0] button is pressed to input "io" of combined mica "iou" This is the only case that is pressed three times in succession. For the user input, the system recognizes temporarily as "0 = i" and confirms when a button other than the [0] button is pressed. When the [0] button is pressed again, the system displays " If the button other than the [0] button is pressed once again, it is confirmed that the system is set to "000 = io" once the [0] button is pressed again. The system will temporarily recognize "* = a" because it can be pressed up to two times in the case of the [*] button, and "**" = e. "It is because there is no case that the same Roman alphabet vowel does not come out consecutively and the vowel assigned to the same button does not appear consecutively when entering Chinese vowel.

The reason for configuring the input system without ambiguity (or with a considerable ambiguity in non-Chinese cases) is that the same consonant button (eg, the [1] button in Figure 10-1) The system recognizes that one of the consonants in the same button is being input, and when another consonant button (for example, the [9] button in FIG. 10-1) is pressed, It is because it recognizes. Another reason is that about two letters are assigned instead of about three letters per button. As mentioned earlier in the section on grouping consonants and vowels in pairs, the likelihood of ambiguity is significantly reduced when two alphabets are assigned compared to when three alphabets are assigned per button, which is easy to see. In addition, when two alphabets per button are assigned, the applicant can apply the delay time and the delay time more effectively.

Fig. 10-7 shows the procedure of a general iterative selection method in the slave-bar separation keypad, except for the part (R). For convenience in Figure 10-7, the input value should be a consonant button or a collection button. In other words, it is assumed that there is no special use or function (eg a follow-up control button for input of a subsequent alphabet). Figure 10-7 is not absolute and can only be consulted. In FIG. 10-7, detailed procedures such as temporarily recognizing the alphabet corresponding to the one-time pressing of a specific button with the target alphabet against the specific button being pressed once are not shown. However, this process can be performed in the (R0) process in FIG. 10-7. (R) process, the (R) process can be intervened in any part of the flow diagram. That is, if the first input value is one of the consonant buttons and only two consonants are assigned to the consecutively pressed button, and the alphabet assigned to the same button does not appear consecutively (e.g., [1] ), The input value at the moment when the same button is pressed twice in (R1) can be confirmed as one consonant (for example, to "P" in FIG. 10-1). This is similar to using the language restriction in Figures 4-4 to eliminate ambiguity (the target alphabet is fixed with ambiguity or less ambiguity when applying iterative selection method). It can be seen that the procedure of Fig. 10-7 is much simpler than the procedure of Figs. 4-4.

When consonant buttons of the same or non-identical consecutive consonants are pressed in succession, when the consonant button is pressed, the system confirms the target alphabet from the input values of the previously inputted consonant buttons, proceeds with the vowel processing, The value becomes the last entered vowel button in consonant processing. The same is true for the process of consonant processing in vowel processing.

In Figure 10-7, the method of determining by the language restriction (R) is a list of combinable consonants and vowels (e.g., "ch", "sh", "zh", "iao", "iou" "Ui", "ui", "ui", "ui", "ui", "ai", "ao", "ua" ) Or a list of unjoinable consonants and vowels (eg, "bb", "aa", "ee", "oa", ...) (if ambiguity can occur on a particular keypad) In the case where this ambiguity can be caused, it is generally possible to adopt a method of allowing the system to recognize a possible combination as a target alphabet except for cases in which unavailability occurs. For example, in Fig. 10-2 (Chinese restriction) When "ao = 0000" is entered, the system has "ao" in the vowelable list, and the system will assign "ao" as the target alphabet for the input value "0000" Another way is that if there is no user input on the keypad of Figure 10-2 or 10-4, only the [0] button can be pressed up to 4 times. This ambiguity can occur In this case, it can be recognized as &quot; 0000 = ao &quot;. The rest of the process can be performed according to the process shown in FIG. 10-7.

It can be seen that the procedure of the part omitted in FIG. 10-7 is similar to the previously displayed procedure. Figure 10-7 is further generalized and expressed without the omitted parts as shown in Figure 10-8. Fig. 10-8 is the same as Fig. 10-7. In FIG. 10-8, the portion {1} virtually means that the button input is performed, and "n <- (n + 1)" indicated by the arrow in the portion (1) indicates that the number of button presses is increased by one more it means.

When a mike such as "en", "eng", "an", "ang", or "er" is used to mark a Chinese syllable as a pinyin, the end of the syllable ends with an English consonant (Eg ren: person). In other words, English alphabet consonants at the end of a syllable in the middle of a word or phrase are "n", "g", "r", and so on. Consonants which can come to the end of a syllable in this Pinyin are referred to as "Consonants which Can be End of a Syllable of Pinyin" for convenience.

In the case of a syllable in which the consonant-ending consonant is used (i.e., a syllable using mica such as "en", "eng", "an", "ang", "er" Ambiguity can occur when the consonant is an English consonant of the preceding syllable. For example, in Zhongguo (China), "~ gg ~" can be recognized as "~ k ~". Ambiguity can arise in this very special case, for example, if the consonant consonants (eg, "n", "g", "r" ...) are selected in each group to which they belong, ambiguity (When two alphabets are assigned to the group to which "n", "g", "r", etc. belong, as shown in Figure 10-6).

In Fig. 10-6, one of the consonant consonant consonants capable of ending with a pincode can be selected with the corresponding button ([7] button) 2, so that "88 ** 7777 * #" It is like being able. "7777" is entered to input "nn", which can be recognized as "nn" without ambiguity (the word "mmmm", "nmm", "mnm", " mmn "can not be combined). That is, if the selection order of "g" and "k" is "k - g" in FIG. 10-6, the pinyin can be inputted without ambiguity.

In order to remove the ambiguity by making two consonants of the phoneme syllable end consonant be selected in the group, two alphabets must be grouped into the corresponding group. If three English alphabets " m, n, w " are grouped as shown in FIG. 10-4 and they are selected in the order of " m - n - w " If you enter "renmin", it will cause ambiguity with "rewin" (where "rewin" does not actually exist in Chinese Pinyin, so the system will renmin " ) ", But" rewin "is a combination of possible sounds).

Therefore, if it is possible to group three English consonants as shown in Figure 10-4, the consonant consonants ("n", "g", "r", etc.) It can be seen that there is a need to group. In addition, even when two consonants are grouped, it can be seen that ambiguity can also occur when "n" and "r" in the end consonant of a syllable syllable are grouped into the same group as "g" and "r" . For example, if two English consonants, "n" and "r," are grouped into the same group, "~ nr ~" will cause ambiguity with "~ rn ~". The same is true when "g" and "r" are grouped into the same group.

In Figure 10- *, "n" and "g" can be entered without ambiguity because they are assigned to different buttons. Of course, even if "n" and "g" are grouped in the same group, they can be entered without ambiguity if only "n" and "g" are grouped. For example, if "n" and "g" are grouped into the same group and assigned to the [5] button, if the [5] button is pressed three times (ie, "555" , It can be recognized as "vowel + ng" instead of "vowel + gn". This is because in the Pinyin language, a language restriction can not be used in which "vowel + gn" can not appear in the middle of a word. If "n" and "g" are grouped into the same group, if the selection order according to the number of button presses is "g - n", "g" If you press "ng", you will be able to display WISWYG (What You See is What You Get, more precisely What You Press is What You See). 10-2, 10-4 and 10-6, the vowels "a", "e" and "o" are grouped into one group and assigned to the [*] button If the selection order according to the number of times the button is pressed is "o-e-a", the system can recognize and display "a" when the [*] button is pressed three times, If the button is pressed once more, "ao" is displayed naturally so that the user can be more friendly.

If only "n" and "g" are grouped into the same group and assigned to a button (eg [5] button in the example), if the vowel button is pressed and then "5555" is entered, it is recognized as "vowel + ngg" , And if "55555" is input, it will be recognized as "vowel + ngn". If "vowel + ng" is used more heavily in Chinese Pinyin, you can increase the convenience of input by grouping "n" and "g" in the same group. However, it is natural to group consonants with similar pronunciations into the same group for the use of simple codes, which is not a good approach.

If an English consonant (eg 'm') other than "n" and "g" is grouped together, the order of "m - n - g" or "m - g - n" (That is, when consonants other than 'n' and 'g' are selected by the corresponding button 1), it can be recognized without ambiguity. For example, if you select "m - g - n" according to the number of button presses, the collection button is pressed, then the button is pressed five times is recognized as "(vowel) + ng" (Vowel) + ngm ", 7th press is recognized as" (vowel) + ngg "and 8th press can be recognized as" (vowel) + ngn "without ambiguity. However, the number of repetitive pressing at the time of inputting " ng "

In Figures 10-7, 10-8, and 10-9, "nX", "ngX", "rX" (the upper case "X" represents the consonant in the middle of the word, , The input value may be processed by a combination of consonants possible in the pinyin. This is because there is no case in which English consonants such as "nX", "ngX", and "rX" appear consecutively at the beginning of a word. As a result, the English consonants that can appear in the middle of the word or phrase in the input of the Pinyin are theoretically 4 maximum such as "~ ngch ~", "~ ngsh ~", "~ ngzh ~ -8, 10-9, this language restriction can be used in the process of consonant processing in the middle of a word.

In this paper, we propose a method of inputting English consonants at the end of a syllable without ambiguity even when ambiguity occurs. In the alphabet group assigned to each button, the selection order according to the number of times the button is pressed can be arbitrarily determined, so that it can be seen that the contents presented in the prior application are described in detail. Pinyin is the consonant that can be used both at the beginning and at the end of the syllable, so it can be seen as a relatively frequently used consonant, and it can be seen that the occurrence of such ambiguity is not a frequent occurrence, ("Rewin" in the example) can be excluded by referring to the Pinyin / Chinese character indexes. Therefore, in consideration of the convenience of the input, the consonant consonant consonants You will be able to determine the order in which they are selected.

In Fig. 10-1, which includes the above contents, an average of 1.5 letters per Roman alphabet can be input. If the alphabetic alphabet is selected to be 1 letter in consideration of the actual use frequency in Chinese, will be.

12.1.4 Functions Used as Control Buttons Original function inputs

In Figure 10-1, when inputting the alphabet with a suffix in Roman alphabet, you can use any "separate button" outside the 3 * 4 keypad as a control button. For example, if utilized in the Chinese input mode, the left (左) side button ([<]) to the control ^{button, - e = e + [<} ], / e = e + [<] + [<], v e + e + e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e <> + [<] + [<]. If you press the left navigation button five times in succession, you can no longer select the control to be combined with "e". "E" is entered). Only if about removed utilizing a button control buttons for (for convenience "[X]" shown in) deformation alphabet ^{input, - e = e + [X} ], / e = e + [X] + [X], v e = e + [X] + [X] + [X], e = e + ] + [X] + [X]. If the delete button is pressed five times in succession, the previously entered "e" can be deleted. You can use these buttons with different functions as control buttons, but if the control is selected according to the number of times the control button is pressed, then the original function have.

In the above example, after the left movement function is activated, the word start state is established, so even if the left movement button [<] is pressed once, the left movement function is inputted. If you press the [<] button 5 times after inputting "e", the cursor moves to the left side with only "e" entered. If you press it once again, it moves back to the side. This is applicable in all languages.

12.1.5 How to Select Chinese Repeat Repeat on Keypad Separator Keypad (Entering Variation Alphabet Within 3 * 4 Keypad)

Here, we show that within the 3 * 4 keypad, you can enter up to the roman alphabet suffixed with a suffixed alphabetic character (inclusive).

In the combined mica table, you can see that the vowels that can not come after the "i" are "i" and "u" (in other words, they can be 'a' or 'e' or 'o'). You can also see that a vowel that can not come after "u" is "u" and "i" (in other words, it can also be 'a' or 'e' or 'o'). Therefore, it is possible to arrange the vowels as shown in FIG. 10-2. In Figure 10-2, you can use the [#] button assigned to the right side "u" as the control button when attaching the starsign to the vowel "i, a, e" on the left. In the same way, when attaching the key to the right vowel "o, u", use the [*] button on the left side as the key control button. For example: / o (second name) = o + [*] + [*] = [0] + [0] + [0] ^ # = + [#] + [#] + [#] + [#] = [0] as a + [#] + ] + [0] + [#] + [#] + [#] + [#] + [#]. (Ao = a + o = [0] + [0] + [0] + [0] Can be identified in the system without ambiguity. Mo negative ^.. u may enter a bar, so the similarity in shape and u, u of the button is assigned to the other two (concealment iterative selection method).

This is because the vowel "a, e, o" in Chinese has a property that a and e are not followed by a vowel, and a vowel is not followed by a vowel. The above-mentioned constraint conditions, a and i, and e and i, and o and u are not grouped together, but by assigning two vowels to three buttons, You can see that it is not possible to use the assigned button as a control button, as in -2. In Figure 10-2, i and u are placed on the [*] or [#] buttons, as these buttons are used as control buttons, to facilitate recognition and balance of placement. The average input number of vowels in Figure 10-2 is also about 1.5, as in Figure 10-1.

In the case of the modification of FIG. 10-2, some of the three alphabets assigned to the [0] button may be separated into "separate buttons" outside the 4 * 3 keypad. For example, some of the three alphabets can be assigned separately by using the up / down / left buttons.

In Figures 10-1 to 10-4, it is possible to input the Chinese Pinyin without ambiguity while applying the iterative selection method, because the consonant button ([1] - [9] button) and the collection button [*] #] Button) and used the Roman alphabet's consonant and vowel rules when pronouncing Chinese as a Chinese word.

12.2 How to Select English Repetition Repeats on the Separator Bar Keypad

In the case of English, too, it is possible to input with less ambiguity by applying the iterative selection method in a vowel separation keypad (CVSK) similar to the one in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, similar to the case of Chinese. This is because, in all languages using the Roman alphabet, the structure of the word consists of alternating consonants and vowels.

In English, when the consonant group is repeated as much as possible from the "beginning of the word", it is referred to as "CCCVCCCC" as in "strengths" (C is consonant and V is vowel). At the beginning of a word, up to three consonants may be present, but only if they start with "st ~" or "sp ~" (eg spree, spleen, strength, etc.).

Similar to FIG. 10-1, when a user inputs the English word " student " in a keypad assigned to about two or three consonants (for convenience, it is assumed that " 622 ~ ", the system can treat" 622 "entered after" word start "as inputting" st "instead of" sdd " If consonants can occur consecutively, it is said to start with "st ~" or "sp ~" and the system must remember these English word generation rules or alphabetical conventions. When you enter "u" in "stu ~", you see that the vowel group ("st" in the example) ends and the vowel ("u" in the example) comes because the assigned button is pressed. When the "2" is input to input "d" after the input of "stu", the system can know that the consonant starts again. Likewise, when the user inputs "~ ** 7722" to input "~ ent" of "student" and "**" is inputted, "a" "7722" can be interpreted as "mmt", "ndd", "nt", "mmdd" or the like, although the system can easily know that "e" , The ambiguity caused by the iterative selection method can be greatly reduced by setting the "delay time" and the "delay time" differently.

In the current standard English keypad (Fig. 1-1) in which the consonants and vowels are mixed and assigned to each button, the ambiguity that may occur in applying the iterative selection method by reflecting the word generation rule (alphabet combination rule) . However, when the consonants and vowels are mixed in one button, it becomes very difficult to apply the language restriction input method (in particular, the recursive selection method as the full input method). For example, when the user inputs "stu ~" to "777888 ~" using the repetition selection method of "student" in FIG. 1-1, assuming that the system recognizes "777" as "s" It is impossible to know whether or not the following "888" is "ut (ie sut)", "tu (ie stu)" or "v (ie sv) "The system can assume that it is not" ttt "for the input value" 888 "). Similarly, in order to input "~ de ~", it is not possible to know whether "333" is "de" or "ed" when the user inputs "888777" before "~ de ~ stu "and" sv ", so there are all cases of" ~ de ~ "and" ~ ed ~ "for each of the three cases.

The reason why the ambiguity occurs when the iterative selection method is applied to the full input method is that even if the language restriction input method is applied, the appearance rules of the consonant and vowel (that is, the word generation rule and the alphabet combination rule) , Because it is not clearly distinguished whether the input value is for inputting a vowel or for inputting a vowel. If the consonant and vowel are separately allocated as shown in FIG. 10-1 to FIG. 10-4, if the button assigned to the vowel is pressed when applying the repeated selection method, the button for inputting the vowel is pressed. It is possible to reduce the ambiguity because the system recognizes the input of the ground consonant.

In English (English), which uses the Roman alphabet, there are many cases where a vowel comes in two or more consecutive times (eg 'ai' in captain). Also, when the same vowels (basic vowels a, e, i, o, and u) appear consecutively in real words, oo and ee are relatively frequent in food and teen, and uu is rare in vacuum . The applicant has not yet seen the case of ... aa ... and ... ii ... in the English dictionary. Therefore, when assigning the five basic vowels of English to the [*], [0], and [#] buttons, let 'a' be chosen as one and e, o, In the case of ambiguity is eliminated. For example, if you apply the repeat selection method with the vowel 'a, o' on the [*] button, when the [*] button is input two times, the two vowels aa are not input but the vowel o is input The system can be considered. Similarly, when i and u are assigned to the [0] button and the repetition selection method is applied, when the [0] button is input two times, the two vowels ii are not inputted but the vowel u is input The system is recognizable. Even if it is not absolute that the word does not appear consecutively like aa and ii, it is possible to eliminate the ambiguity by setting different "delay time" and "delay time" mentioned in the earlier application. The remaining vowels 'e' can be assigned to the remaining [#] buttons and entered as one.

If you want to use one of the buttons [*], [0] or [#] as a special purpose button, you can put the vowel 'e' on any button assigned to the vowel. For example, 'i, e, u' can be placed on the [0] button. The vowel u is entered as [3] button [3] because the vowel is the least frequently used vowel in English. I and e can be input without ambiguity if i is not consecutive (ie ... ii ...) in English with i, e, u assigned to the [0] button 1, 2, respectively), u is input with [0] button 3, u, i, or ei is unknown. The lower frequency of use of u means that this case will occur less frequently.

As a result, the ambiguity can be greatly reduced by using the syllable separation pad, and furthermore, in assigning a plurality of vowels to one button, a vowel in which the same vowel does not come out consecutively among pre- So that the user can input the vowel with the repeat selection method in the button where a plurality of vowels are assigned, with almost no ambiguity.

To select a vowel that does not appear consecutively in this way, and to select a vowel with the least frequently used vowel, it is equally applicable to the case where about two to three vowels are assigned per button.

In the above, the case of English using the Roman alphabet is described as an example, but the same applies to other languages using the Roman alphabet.

12.3 Indonesian Restriction on Repeater Separator Keypad Repetition Selection Method

Indonesian also uses the Roman alphabet (English alphabet) to indicate the word. The syllable in Indonesian is said to be composed as follows. (C is consonant, V is concave)

V: be-a tariff

VC: am-bil grab

CV: go-sok rubs

CVC: pon-dol cabin

CCV: tra-di-si tradition

CCVC: con-trak contract

CVCC: teks-tur fabric

CCCV: kon-struk-si construction

CCCVC: strip-tis nude dancing

As you can see easily when three or more consonants are coming out, it is a foreign word from English. As you can see, if you do not start with "st ~" or "sp ~" in Indonesian, you can guess that no consonant appears more than three times at the beginning of the word. Therefore, it is possible to apply one repetition selection method in Indonesia using these word generation rules (alphabet join rule).

q, and x are used in natural science symbols such as physics and mathematics. In other words, it is thought to be rarely used for character input. Therefore, q and x may not be explicitly placed in a specific group, or they may be input in a third input. Also, as in the case of Chinese, there are cases where two Indonesian alphabets are combined to form a single Indonesian sound, and there are four types such as ny, sy, kh and ng.

Rs, rs, sk, skr, sl, sp, spr, sr, str, dw, dy, fl, fr, gl, kr, ks, kw, , and sw. In particular, since "skr ~", "spr ~", "str ~", etc. can appear at the beginning of a word, it can be used as a means for determining whether the input value is a full code or a simple code in the language restriction concurrent input method described later. (As an applicant, there may be cases where "rps" appears at the beginning of a word, but this can be used as well.)

English alphabet consonants Any of the 21 consonants, except q and x, can be grouped into nine groups, but they can be grouped according to the characteristics of Indonesian. E.g,

BP / DT / GK / CJ / MN / LR / SZ / FV / HWY

Can be grouped together.

q and x can be grouped into appropriate groups. For example, you can group q in the "GK" group and x in the "SZ" group.

There are five vowels a, i, u, e, and o to represent Indonesian vowels. There are also ai, au, and oi with three bibliographic voices, and oi is said to be used very rarely. Therefore, it would be desirable to ensure that a and i and group a and u are not grouped into the same group, even when grouping five vowels into two or three groups. For example, grouping with ae / uo / i. Also, it would be desirable to select a vowel in which each vowel belongs to one vowel in which the same vowel does not appear consecutively (even if it appears consecutively) as in the case of English.

12.4 How to Select Japanese Repetition Repeat on Keypad Split Keypad

A method of inputting a Japanese pronunciation by using the Roman alphabet and converting the Japanese pronunciation back into Japanese has been widely used. Therefore, it is possible to input a Japanese bill using Roman alphabet and convert it to Japanese in the juxtaposition separation keypad similar to Figs. 10-1 to 10-4. A, i, u, e, o can be expressed as a, i, u, e, o, respectively. Nu, nu, ne, no can be expressed as na, ni, nu, ne, no, respectively, and the remaining alphabets can be expressed in a combination of Roman alphabet consonants and vowels.

The Roman alphabet consonants appearing twice consecutively in Japanese are when geminate consonants or consonants (indicated by small letters) are used. In addition, if the Roman alphabet vowels appear consecutively, assuming that it is not uncommon for a combination of a, b, c, and a to appear consecutively, it is at most two times, You can see a rare thing. Therefore, even if five vowels (a, i, u, e, o) of the Roman alphabet are divided into three groups similar to those shown in Figs. 10-1 to 10-4 and assigned to three buttons It can be seen that ambiguity does not occur much. Particularly in Japanese, when "a" is input, the corresponding Japanese is "a". When "na" is input, it is easy to know that the corresponding Japanese is "na" (the same applies to the remaining Japanese alphabets). Therefore, when the user inputs "na", and the system confirms that the input value is "na", the system can provide "na" to the user.

Roman alphabet consonants used in the Japanese notation of the 50-note chart are 14, k, s, t, n, h, m, y, r, w, g, z, d, b, In the notation of consonant, two Roman alphabet consonants can be represented in combination (eg cha, sha), combined with "y" (eg kya) or expressed using "j". Roman alphabet consonants appear more than once in succession when chord, sh, ky, ny, hy, my, ry, gy, py, When geminate consonants are used, it is said that there are cases where the same letters of k, s, t, and p occur consecutively (eg, ippai). Therefore, it can be seen that 16 (14 + c, j) roman alphabet consonants are necessary for Japanese input, and it is possible to configure the syllabary separation keypad so that it is easy to input necessary voices for Japanese input. The remaining five Roman alphabet consonants (f, l, q, v, x) will also be needed to enter English, but can be grouped around 16 alphabets. For example:

BP / DT / GK / CJ / H / MN / R / SZ / YW /

BP / DT / GK / CJ / H / MN / Y / SZ / RW /

BP / DT / GK / CJ / HR / MN / SZ / YW / =>

The five Roman alphabet consonants needed for English input can be added to each group as appropriate, as in the case of Chinese. In the case of grouping into 8 groups, the remaining 4 buttons on the 3 * 4 keypad can be used as collection buttons. If only 3 collection buttons are used, the other button can be used for the consonants necessary for English input It is possible.

12.5 Disabling Intentional Language Restrictions

The language restriction iterative selection method sacrifices the advantages of a "full input method" that allows all words to be entered regardless of whether they are present in the dictionary or not, It is desirable to be able to set in advance. However, even in the " language restriction input mode " which enables the language restriction input method, when the user does not exist in advance and wants to input a word that is not in accordance with the word generation rule (alphabet combination rule) For example, you can enter all alphabetical combinations by delimiting the target alphabet by entering a space, left-hand side progression, or word ending), and then entering the next alphabet. For example, if the user enters "622 ~" in the "English restricted input mode" in Figure 10-1, the system would recognize it as "st ~" instead of "sdd ~ , Enter "62", then enter the space and left shift function, and either type "2" or "62", and then "Terminate word function (or control that can effect word termination)" Enter any other means you can activate and type "2". If the word closing function is activated after inputting "62", the system can recognize it as "d" because the next input "2" comes first after "word start". It is referred to as " intentional language restriction release " for the sake of convenience to overcome the language restriction in the specific language restriction input mode by inputting the word termination function in this way. An example of "sdd ~" is "unintentional restriction of English".

Similarly, in FIG. 10-2, if the user does not exist as a Chinese word in the "Chinese limited input mode", but wants to input "ui" as a vowel combination existing in English, , Input the means for terminating the word (mentioned in the previous example) again, and then input "i". Otherwise, if the button assigned to "i" after inputting "u" in "Chinese restricted input mode (applying Chinese restricted repetition selection method)" is clicked on the basis of 10-2, (For example, if the alphabet with "u" is an alphabet with a consonant sign or "u" with a ".." attached to it - "..u" is regarded as a variant of "u" (In the case of applying the Chinese restriction repetition selection method, it is used as the control button when the button assigned to "i" is inputted after the vowel "u" and "o"). As a result, the user can input a combination of words (for example, all alphabetical combinations such as English words) that do not exist in Chinese words in Chinese restricted input mode. In other words, if the user who uses Chinese is set to the Chinese restriction input mode (Chinese restriction repetition selection mode), it is possible to input all the alphabet combinations not existing in Chinese without changing the setting again . This is "intentional Chinese restriction release".

In the method using the three Korean vowel elements in Figs. 4-5, the same applies to inputting consonants or vowels as a single word. For example, if you want to input the consonant "a" and the vowel "ㅡ" as a single word in Figure 4-5, enter the means to give the word end function after entering [1] You can type [*] in the word start state again. This is because if you press the [1] button and the [*] button consecutively, it becomes "that". In the standard keyboard (English and Korean standard keyboard), when the right arrow button is pressed, the "word end" blank is not input and the word end function is activated. If the right arrow button is additionally provided in the present invention, Can be applied.

12.6 Language restriction release delay time

It is also possible to apply "slack delay time" and "after-delay time" to the case where more than two letters are assigned to one button. For example, if the [2] button is pressed twice within 0.1 second by setting the paddle delay time to 0.1 seconds on the standard English keypad in Figure 1-1, the system can be considered to have entered B as the button is pressed.

Similarly, when the [2] button is pressed three consecutive times (ie, [2] + [2] + [2]), the first input value and the second input value (ie, the first [2] (For example, 0.1 second) and the delay time interval between the second input value and the third input value is within the set time (for example, 0.1 second) as the delay time Ie, [2] + within 0.1 second + [2] + within 0.1 second + [2]). (2) + [2] + [2] when the [2] button is pressed three consecutive times So that the system can recognize it.

In the case of English, for example, assuming that ".u" is absent in FIG. 10-1, the property that the English vowel "a" does not appear consecutively, and "i" When applied, "NII" can be entered in the English restricted repetition selection mode by "Intentional English restriction release" by inputting the word end function when inputting abbreviations such as "NII". However, after a certain period of time after entering "NI", NI can be confirmed even if you do not enter the word completion function. The predetermined time may be set to be the same as the " after-delay time " mentioned in the prior application, but it is preferable to set it longer than the " after-delay time ". For example, if 2 seconds have elapsed after entering "NI", NI will be confirmed even if you do not enter the word terminator, and the system will be in the "word start" state again. For the sake of convenience, it is called "temporary language restriction release delay time", and it is desirable to allow the user to set it. It is obvious that this can be applied equally in all languages.

The various delay times are summarized as follows.

Flush delay time ≤ This delay time ≤ Temporary language restriction release delay time

The three delay times may be set to be the same, but it may be desirable to set a longer delay time than the delay time and a longer delay time than the delay time.

12.7 How to choose one repetition in Portugal on a keyboard separation keypad

In Portuguese, k, w, and y are only used for abbreviations or foreign words, but they will also be needed for character input. In Portuguese, the double words are as follows.

bl, cl, dl, fl, gl, p1, t1,

br, cr, dr, fr, gr, pr, tr, vr

In addition, it is assumed that there are double letters such as gn, mn, pn, ps, pt, tm, ch, lh, nh, rr and ss. Therefore, in constructing the Portuguese vowel separation keypad for one Portuguese input method, it is necessary to prevent the upper consecutive alphabets from being grouped into the same group. See, for example, Figure 10- *. However, "mn" is grouped into the same group, which can be modified appropriately and placed in a different group. The keypad of Figure 10- * can be similarly applied to other languages based on the similarity of pronunciation (eg, voiced and unvoiced sounds with similar phonetic values - eg. / Bp /, / dt /, / gk / ... - grouping) and grouping them together, and it is unusual for a group of alphabets with similar pronunciation to appear consecutively.

The Portuguese basic vowels have five vowels a, e, i, o, u, with a, e, o being the vowel I, and e being the vowel. When two different vowels appear consecutively, one of the six (ui, au, ei, ei, oi, ou) . In other words, you can group the strong vowels and the weak vowels into separate groups (eg, without ". + U" in Figure 10-6). In addition to this grouping, it is also possible to group weak and strong vowels into an arbitrary number of groups so that they do not belong to the same group. For example, you can group them as / a / e o / u i /.

12.8 How to Select Spanish Repetition Repetition on the Separator Bar Keypad

In Spanish there is "~ + n" (an alphabetical letter with a ~ on n) in an alphabetical letter not in English. k and w are only used for foreign language notation, but also for character input. In Spanish, the double letters are as follows.

bl, cl, dl, fl, gl, pl

br, cr, dr, fr, gr, pr, tr

That is, in constructing the bargaining keypad for the Spanish restricting input method, it is necessary that l and r are not assigned together, and the alphabets constituting the above double consonants must be grouped into the same group and not assigned to the same button do. The consonant grouping of Figs. 10-1 to 10-4 and Fig. 10-6 can be referred to.

Spanish basic vowels have five vowels a, e, i, o, u, where a, e, and o are the vowels I, and e is the vowel. When two different vowels appear consecutively, there are six kinds of "vowel vowel + vowel vowel", six vowels of "vowel vowel + vowel vowel", and two vowels of "vowel vowel vowel" do. In the case of a triple vowel, it is also said to be combined with "vowel + vowel vowel + vowel vowel". In other words, grouping a strong vowel and a weak vowel into separate groups (eg, in the absence of ".. + u" in Figure 10-6), only the case of "weak vowel + vowel vowel" is ambiguous. In this case, since iu and ui are all possible, it is possible to overcome the ambiguity by applying the blind delay time / iteration time or using the method proposed by the applicant, such as the cancellation of the intentional language restriction. This is also the case when the same vowels appear consecutively, when the same consonants appear consecutively, and when there are other ambiguities.

12.9 How to Select Italian Repetition Repeat on Keypad Split Keypad

In Italian, j, k, w, x, and y are said to be used only for Gore or foreign words. It will be necessary for input of English etc. In the grouping of consonants, the remaining consonants except for the five consonants may be grouped, and the remaining five consonants may be appropriately grouped.

In Italian, the bipartite vowels are called ia, io, ie, iu, ai, ei, oi, ui, uo, ou, and eu. It is also a combination of steel vowels (a, e, o) and weak vowels (u, I) except for iu and ui. In the case of a triple vowel, it is a structure of "vowel vowel + vowel vowel + vowel vowel". Therefore, grouping of strong vowels and weak vowels can be used, such as / a eo /, / u I /, and ui and iu can be ambiguous.

12.10 German Restriction on Repeater Separator Keypad

The German phonetic chords are ch, chs, ck, ds, dt, ng, nk, pf, ph, sch, sp, st, th, ts, tz and tsch. The consonant grouping of FIG. 10- * can also be referred to for grouping consecutive consonants so that they are not grouped into the same group. In German, "sch ~" means that there are three or more consonants in the dark, so this can be used in the language restriction parallel input method described below. Tsch's case may also be in the dark, but it is said to be very rarely used.

There are five short vowels in German, with a ".." on the a, o, u. The dual vowels include au, ei, ai, eu, "..au", ie, and so on. When inputting a vowel using only a short vowel (basic vowel), there are cases of ie, ei, so it is necessary to group i and e into different groups. For example, / a e o /, / I u / can be grouped and many variations are possible.

Where consonants or vowels appear consecutively, ambiguity may be avoided by a number of methods presented by the applicant.

12.11 Typing Vietnamese Restrictions

12.11.1 Vietnamese Restrictions Input Method on Vietnamese Keypad Split Keypad

Vietnamese syllables are said to consist mainly of "vowel", "consonant + vowel", "vowel + consonant", and "consonant + vowel + consonant". Especially in Vietnamese, monosyllabic is the basis. The increasing number of monosyllabic words, though increasing in gospel language, means that it is easy to construct the input system in the vowel separation keypad.

In Vietnamese, there are five basic vowels a, e, i (y), o, u and "v + a (a vowel with a v on a vowel with a" x " there are six transition voices, "+ a", "^ + o", ", + o", ", + u". "Y" is said to pronounce "i" long. It is possible to compose syllabary separation keypad with only five basic vowels, and input the remaining voices by control processing method. You can configure a slave vowel separation keypad with only basic vowels and partial vowels, or a vowel separation keypad with all 11 vowels.

It is not easy to group five basic vowels into two or three groups similar to those in Fig. 10- *, so that there is no ambiguity when the iterative selection method is applied, because the Vietnamese double tone and triple vowel have various combinations. There are also six voices in Vietnamese, and five voices are displayed above or below the vowel. In Vietnamese, there is no case in which the same vowels appear consecutively, which is a useful property in inputting Vietnamese vowels. Therefore, it is conceivable to put the five basic vowels into five groups, to input the vowel sounds by the concealed repetitive selection method, and to attach the vowel codes to the basic vowels and mutant voices by the control processing method. Here, y can be regarded as a mutating sound of i. That is, the vowels can be represented as' a ',' v + a ',' ^ + a '/' o ',' 'y' / 'e', '^ + e' /. It is also possible to transform these groups into four groups by summing up groups with fewer voices. For example, '/ a', 'v + a', '^ + a' / 'o', ' 'y', 'e', '^ + e' /. If you leave only 5 groups, you can input vowels without ambiguity by applying iterative selection method. In each group, any alphabet may be displayed on the keypad as a representative alphabet, and the remaining alphabets may not be displayed. It would be natural for a short vowel to be a representative alphabet, and in the case of dividing into four groups, it is possible that both i and e are displayed. The selection order according to the number of button presses can be determined in consideration of the frequency of use and the like.

The consonants in Vietnamese are "- + d ('-' in the center of 'd'), which is not in English, and the English f, z, etc. are not used. '- + d' is regarded as a variant of 'd', and the (concealed) repetition selection method or control processing method can be applied. Some textbooks say that f, w, and z are not used in Vietnamese, and some textbooks say that w and j are used in semi-consonants. At least f and z are not used, and w is rarely used. In the present invention, w is regarded as not being used, but may be included in an appropriate group if necessary.

In addition, it is said that there are ch ch, gh, gi, kh, ng, ngh, nh, ph, qu, th and tr. Since gi and qu are a combination of consonants and vowels in shape, they are not considered here. The fact that Vietnamese is mainly composed of monosyllabic words means that syllables composed of "self + modulo" are seldom consecutive, unlike other languages, except consonants and consonants It means that there are few cases. As a result, when consonants are divided into several groups and applied to the repetition selection method, grouping consonants constituting the above-mentioned lexical sounds in such a way that they are not grouped into the same group makes it possible to input consonants without ambiguity as in the case of Chinese.

For example, they can be grouped into eight groups such as b p / d t / g k / c q / s x / m n / l r / h v j. It is also possible to divide into six groups such as b p v / d t / g k q / s x c / m n j / h l r /. It is also possible to group them into arbitrary groups. Unused consonants such as f, z, etc. may be additionally included in the appropriate group.

Splitting consonants into 8 groups and dividing vowels into 4 groups can accommodate both consonants and vowels in a 3 * 4 keypad. Consonants can be grouped into 6 groups, and groups of 5 can be used to accommodate consonants and vowels in eleven buttons, and one button can be used as a control button for attaching consonant marks to a vowel. If you divide consonants into 6 groups and divide the vowels into 4 groups, you can accommodate both consonant buttons and vowel buttons with 10 numeric buttons. This allows you to make simple codes numeric only . The remaining two buttons can be used as a control button for inputting a sign and a subsequent control button for eliminating ambiguity.

12.11.2 Vietnamese Restricted Input Method Using Consonant and Vowel Pair

Vietnamese vowels and consonants can be grouped in pairs and the iterative selection method applied. You can refer to the case of Korean. If 10 pairs of consonants and vowels are set, the rest consonants and vowels can be input by the control processing method.

12.12 Russian Restrictions Input Method on Separator Separator Keypad

Reference may be made to the applicant's earlier application PCT / KR02 / 00247 in order to construct a sub-bar separation keypad for Russian.

There are 33 alphabets in Russian. 10 of them are vowels, 20 are consonants, 1 is a half-tone (or half-consonant), and 2 symbols are alphabetical letters (consonants and acronyms).

The following is a list of 33 alphabetic characters in uppercase and lowercase in alphabetical order.

АБВГДЕЁЖЗИЙКЛМНОПРСТУФХЦЧШЩЫЫЬЭЮЯЯ

абвгдеёжзийклмнопрстуфхцчшщъыьэюя

The 20 consonants are divided into meta consonants and silent consonants as follows. In parentheses means pronunciation.

Vowels are divided into vowels and vowels.

In the proper grouping of Russian consonants, voiced and unvoiced sounds with similar sound values can be grouped. For example, / б (b) п (p) / д (d) т (t) / ... . Consonants that do not form a phonetic pair can be properly grouped as presented in the prior application. Some examples are as follows. Various combinations are possible by grouping the unvoiced and voiced pairs together.

10 groups

Case 1: БП / ДТ / ГК / ВФ / ЗС / ЖШ / ЛР / МН / ХЦ / ЧЩ

Case 2: БВ / ГК / ДТ / ЖЗ / ЛР / МН / ПФ / СХ / ЦЧ / ШЩ

((() ((() ((() ((() 사례 (() (m) ((n) (()) (()) ((sh)

((X) ((x) ((x) ((x) (((((((((( s) ж (zh) / ш (sh) ц (ts) ч (shsh)

Seven groupings:

. . . . . .

In the above example, the semi-consonant Й and the consonant consonant Ъ and the consonant code Ь may be included in the appropriate group. In assigning these groups to each button, some alphabets (eg,,, Ъ, 및 and other alphabets) may be omitted and not displayed in order to keep the keypad simple.

Vowels can also group 10 vowels into 5 groups using pairs of vowels and vowels. There are 10 vowel phonetic alphabets in Russian, and there are 11 vowel sounds in vowels, but there are five basic vowels in vowels: (a), (e), (i), (o), and (u). The double (e) and (o) are said to appear only under stress. In other words, the vowel phoneme (a), (o) can be seen as a vowel. The vowel phonemes in the non-stressed position are the remaining three. Therefore, you can put 5 basic alphabets of Russian vowel alphabet, and divide the vowels corresponding to double vowels into one group and the remaining 3 basic vowels into another group or one or more groups. This is because it can be expected that the same kind of vowels are not likely to come out consecutively (eg, after a vowel). For example, а (a) о (o) / у (u) э (e) и (i) / и (i) / can be grouped into three groups. The vowels corresponding to the basic vowels can be put together in the group to which the basic vowels belong, and the control processing method can be applied by applying the iterative selection method or considering the basic vowel as the modified alphabet.

Using a group of consonants and vowels appropriately, you can construct a vowel separation keypad within a 3 * 4 keypad (eg, 5 groups of vowels, 7 groups of consonants, 3 groups of vowels, and 9 groups of consonants). In Russian, as in English, there are consecutive consonants (eg, CCCVC ...), but a typical syllable structure is called a consonant and vowel repeating structure (CV, CVCV, CVCVCV, ...). This means that in the case of applying the iterative selection method on the slave vowel keypad, most of the Russian words can be entered without ambiguity (that is, with very little ambiguity).

12.13 Hindi restricting input method on the bar separation keypad

In the applicant's earlier application PCT / KR00 / 00601, examples of grouping of Hindi consonants into nine groups based on the similarity of pronunciation were shown, and in the present invention, groups of ten groups were grouped. In the case of Hindi, it was shown that the group pronunciations with strong similarity of pronunciation can be grouped into the same group. For example, in the above figure, group consonants with pronunciations of (k), (kh), (g), and (gh) are grouped into one group. The same is true for the remaining similar pronunciation groups. Of the 35 consonants in the above hindiar, 33 consonants can be randomly grouped into 9 groups or 8 groups except for the lower points (ud) and __ (udh). __ (ud) and __ (udh) can be regarded as the modified alphabet of __ (d) and __ (dh), respectively, and can be placed in the group to which the basic alphabet belongs.

The following is a collection of Hindi words described in the earlier application.

For convenience, the Hindi vowels shall be denoted by the English phonetics in the parentheses underlined (underlined are the Hindi alphabet of the corresponding pronunciation) or simply in English alphabets in parentheses. For convenience, __ (aa) is (a-), __ (ee) is (i-), __ (oo) is (o-), __ (ae) is (e) ai).

The collection __ (ri) is said to be classified as a consonant. It is also possible to group 10 vowels except for vowel __ (ri) into 5 groups as two pairs as above.

Hindi vowels are divided into short vowels of (a), (i), (u), and long vowels of __ (a-), __ (i-), and _ It can be displayed as a combination of short vowels. (A) + (e) = (a) + (i) or (a) + (i-) a) + (u-), __ (au) = (a) + (o). Therefore, the basic vowels (a), (i), and (u) are assigned to three buttons, each of which is assigned to three buttons. One button is used to input a basic vowel, You can enter it with 2 assigned buttons and the remaining 4 complex vowels can be entered as a combination of basic vowels.

For example, if (a), (i), and (u) are assigned to the [*], [0], and [#] buttons, 00. If a ** is pressed, the system recognizes it as __ (a-) when it is pressed down to "**" . &Lt; / RTI &gt; (A) + (o) = __ (au) when the # is pressed, the system recognizes it as __ (a- . &Lt; / RTI &gt;

This is possible if Hindi's 10 vowels do not appear in succession in one word. If the Hindi vowels appear in succession, ambiguity may arise. That is, when you input ** 0, you can not know whether you input __ (a-) and __ (i) or __ (ai). However, even if there are 10 basic vowels consecutively, if the frequency is low, the system can recognize the input value as a complex vowel if it can mean a compound vowel such as ** 0 (ai) Can be applied. In this case, if the user inputs a combination of the long vowel and the combination of __ (a-) and short vowel __ (i), it can be solved by using "deliberate language restriction release" or "language restriction release delay time". In other words, enter ** in the example, activate the word-ending function intentionally for a certain period of time, or enter 0 afterwards.

In Hindi, the main syllable structure alternates between consonants and vowels, but consonants may appear consecutively. When a consonant that ends in a vertical line is followed by another consonant, the vertical line disappears, and it is combined with the next consonant to form a combined consonant. Consonants without vertical lines are said to be associated with the next consonant with a "," similar symbol under the alphabet. There are also some rules and there are some irregularities. When the consonants are recognized as consecutive consonants (temporarily recognized or definitively recognized), it is useful to implement an automata that displays consonant consonants.

Even in countries where English is not the first language, the English alphabet on the keypad is used to input English. Since Hindi and English are used as official languages in India, the use of Simplic code and natural input of character input can be added by assigning the similar consonants of Hindi consonants and English consonants to the same button. For example, the following is possible.

English consonants such as z, w, etc. above can be added to the appropriate group, as in the case of Chinese, or separately. In addition, in order to simplify the arrangement on the keypad, only a part of alphabets in each group may be displayed on the keypad (application of the covert type selection method). For example, in the above grouping, you can only assign __ (k) and __ (g) when assigning the first group to any button. The order of selection may be arbitrarily selected according to the number of button presses in each group. The collection__ (ri) may be assigned to the button to which R L is assigned.

In order to simplify the arrangement on the keypad, only the English vowel (English alphabet bar) can be displayed. In the case of Hindi vowels, as shown in the previous example, it is very natural to express only the English vowel because it has a strong pronunciation similarity with the English vowel. Furthermore, in the case of consonants, / G K /, / M N /, / D T /, / B P /, / R L /, with strong similarity of pronunciation, as shown in the contrast table between the Hindi consonants and English vowels above. . . It is possible to simplify the keypad by displaying only the English consonants without omitting the corresponding Hindi consonants. Of course, even when the Hindi alphabet is omitted, Hindi input mode allows Hindi input without ambiguity in the Hindi limit mode, just as in the Chinese example, the input of the pinyin can be entered without ambiguity in the Chinese restricted input mode.

Hereinafter, the contents described in the earlier application are rearranged, and the details are further clarified.

(k)" 다음에 "

(a-)" 가 오면 "

(a-)"의 축약형(즉, 자음결합형) "

"이 "

(k)" 와 합쳐져 "

" 로 되는 것이다. 나머지 모음에 대해서도 같으며, 자음 다음에 특정 모음이 왔을 때, 결합형으로 표시되는 것은 이미 인도어 워드프로세서에서 널리 사용되고 있다. When the Hindi vowel comes after the consonant, it is combined with the preceding consonant and is denoted by the above-mentioned " abbreviated type &quot;. E.g, "

(k) " next "

(a-) When "comes"

(a-) " is shortened (i.e., consonant-coupled type)

"This"

(k) " and "

"The same is true for the rest of the vowels, and when a specific vowel follows the consonant, the combined vowel is already widely used in Indoor word processors.

(a)" 의 축약형은 존재하지 않는 것으로 되어 있는데, 자음만 표기된 상태 (예. "

(k)") 가 모음 "

(a)" 를 포함하고 있는 것이라고 한다. 음성학적으로는 "

" 는 (k) 가 아닌 (ka) 라는 것이다. 가장 보편적으로 사용되는 힌디어 워드프로세서(예. "MS Word 2000 의 힌디어 IME" 를 포함하여 몇몇 제품. 이하에서는 특별히 다른 언급을 하지 않는 한 Microsoft사의 "MS Word 2000 의 힌디어 IME"을 의미) 에서는 자음 다음에 모음 "

(a)" 키가 눌러졌을 때, 자음 아래에 콤마형태(힌디어에서는 "할"이라고 함)가 결합된 글자를 출력한다. 예를 들어 "

(k)" 다음에 "

(a)" 키를 누르면, "

(k)" 를 인식하고 출력하는 것이다. 자음아래에 콤마형태가 붙은 자음(반자음=순수자음) 다음에 다른 자음이 입력되면, 소정의 규칙에 의하여 "복합자음"이 형성된다. 예를 들어 "

(k)" 다음에 "

(y)" 가 입력되면, 복합자음 "

" 가 되는 것이다. 이는 마치 한국어에서 종성으로 이중받침을 형성할 수 있는 자음들(예. "ㄹ" 과 "ㅁ")이 연속해서 입력되면, 작은 글씨로 종성 "ㄻ"이 입력되는 것과 유사하게 볼 수 있을 것이다. 복합자음 생성에는 규칙적인 형태도 있고, 불규칙한 형태도 있다고 하며, 자세한 내용은 힌디어 교과서를 참고하면 된다. 이상의 사항은 특별한 내용이 아니라 힌디어 초급교과서에 있는 내용이며 또한 이미 널리 알려진 여러 제품(힌디어 워드프로세서 등)에서 이미 널리 쓰이고 있는 내용이다. Likewise, as mentioned briefly in the earlier application, there is a certain rule (corresponding to Hindi spelling) that forms a combined letter between consonants when a consonant is combined with a consonant to form a " compound consonant &quot;, and is already applied in the Hindi word processor . collection "

(a) "is supposed to be absent, but only the consonant is marked (eg"

(k) &quot;) is a vowel "

(a). "Phonetically, the word"

(K). "Some of the most commonly used Hindi word processors (eg," Hindi IME for MS Word 2000 ", some of which are hereafter referred to as" MS Word 2000 Hindi IME "means) in the vowel after the vowel"

(a) "When a key is pressed, it prints a letter in the form of a comma below the consonant (in Hindi," do "), for example"

(k) " next "

(a) "key is pressed,"

(consonant = pure consonant) with a comma under the consonant is input, and then a " compound consonant " is formed according to a predetermined rule. "

(k) " next "

(y) " is input, the compound consonant "

"This is similar to the input of the consonant" ㄻ "in small letters if consonants (eg,""" and "ㅁ") that can form a double gassing in Korean are entered consecutively In addition, it is possible to refer to Hindi textbooks for more details. The above is not a special one but a content in the Hindi elementary textbook, It is already widely used in products (such as Hindi word processors).

(a)" 키가 입력되었을 때, 이를 자음아래에 할(콤마형상)이 붙은 자음이 생성되도록 할 수 있음은 자명하다. 예를 들어, "

(k)" 또는 "

(k)"를 포함한 다른 알파벳이 [1]버튼에 배정되어 있고, [1]버튼 한번 누름으로 "

(k)" 를 입력하고 나서, "

(a)" 가 배정된 버튼 (예. [*]버튼)을 누르면, "

(k)" 로 인식하는 것이다. 기존의 워드프로세서 제품의 경우에서 언급한 바와 같이, 여기서 "

(y)" 가 입력되면, 복합자음 "

" 가 되는 것은 동일하다. 다만, "

(k)" 까지 인식된 후, "

(a)"가 배정된 버튼이 한번 더 눌려지면 "

(a-)" 이 인식되어, 결과는 "

(k) +

(a-) =

" 이 되는 것은 선출원에서 출원인이 제시한 내용이다. 마찬가지로 "

(k)" 까지 인식된 후, "

(u)"가 입력되면, "

(k) +

(o) =

" 가 된다. (선출원에서 이미 언급한 대로, 복합모음을 기본모음(a, i, u)의 조합으로 입력시, "

(o) =

(a) +

(u)" 이므로)Similarly, in the present invention,

(a) " When a key is input, it is obvious that a consonant with a (comma shape) can be generated under the consonant. For example,

(k) " or "

(1) is assigned to the [1] button, and [1]

(k) " is input, then "

(a) "button is pressed (eg, the [*] button), the"

(k). " As mentioned in the case of existing word processor products, here, "

(y) " is input, the compound consonant "

"Is the same, but"

(k) " to "

(a) When the button assigned to "

(a-) " is recognized, and the result is "

(k) +

(a-) =

"Is what the applicant presented in the earlier application. Likewise,

(k) " to "

(u) " is input, the "

(k) +

(o) =

(As already mentioned in the earlier application, when a compound vowel is input as a combination of basic vowels (a, i, u), "

(o) =

(a) +

(u) ")

(a)" 키가 입력되므로 현실적으로는 자음버튼이 한번 이상 눌러지고 다음에 모음 "

(a)" 키가 눌러지고 다시 자음키가 한번 이상 눌러지는 것이다. 따라서 본 발명을 적용함에 있어서 힌디어 자음 입력에 "반복선택방법" 을 적용하더라도 모호성 없이 힌디어 단어를 입력할 수 있음을 의미한다. The Hindi one syllable word is said to consist of "(consonant) + vowel + (consonant)". Consonants in parentheses mean consonants may or may not come. Similarly, a two-syllable word is said to consist of "(consonant) + vowel + consonant + vowel + (consonant)". In other words, there are two vowels with consonants in between to form two syllables. A word over two syllables is also said to be the same. Even if the consonant is a compound consonant, a vowel "

(a) " key is input, in reality, the consonant button is pressed once more and then the vowel "

(a) " key is depressed and the consonant key is depressed more than once. Therefore, in applying the present invention, it is possible to input a Hindi word without ambiguity even if the " repeat selection method " is applied to the Hindi consonant input.

(a-)" 의 경우 "

(a-)"으로), 이는 명백히 사용자의 편의성에 반하는 것이다. 자음 다음에 입력되는 경우가 아닌 경우, 사용자는 모음으로 시작하는 단어를 입력하기를 의도하는 것이므로, 자동으로 모음이 기본형(예. "

(a-)")으로 인식되고 표시되어야 할 것이다. 현재 워드프로세서에서는 "shift" + "

(a-)" 버튼을 입력해야 기본형으로 인식되고 출력된다. 본 발명에서는 키보드를 사용하는 워드프로세서에서, 자음 다음에 입력되는 경우가 아닌 경우(예. 단어의 처음) 힌디어 기본형 모음이 자동으로 인식되는 발명을 추가로 제시하는 것이다. If a vowel appears at the beginning of a word, it does not need to be represented in abbreviated form. In other words, in all cases (eg, entering a vowel key at the beginning of a word) after the consonant is recognized but not when the vowel button is pressed, the vowel is recognized as a "basic type" rather than a " It is preferable to output it. Similarly, in the Hindi word processor, when entered at the beginning of a word or after a vowel rather than after a consonant input, it is displayed in abbreviated form (eg "

(a-) ""

(a-) "), which clearly contradicts the convenience of the user. Since the user intends to enter a word that starts with a vowel, unless the vowel is followed by a consonant, "

(a-) &quot;). In the current word processor, " shift " + "

(a-) " button is pressed, the basic type is recognized and outputted. In the present invention, in a word processor using a keyboard, a Hindi basic style vowel is automatically recognized The present invention is not limited thereto.

(a)"키가 눌러지면, 기본형 모음 "

(a)" 가 인식되는 것이다. 본 발명에서 적용하는 예를 들면, 단어의 시작상태(예. 입력모드로 진입 직후, 또는 공백 입력 직후)에서 모음 "

(a)" 가 배정된 버튼(예. [*]버튼)을 한번 누르면, 기본형 모음 "

(a)" 가 인식되고, 다시 모음 "

(a)"를 한번 더 누르면, 모음 "

(a-)"가 인식되는 것이다. For example, on the keyboard, the word "

(a) "When a key is pressed, a basic type vowel"

(a) " is recognized. For example, in the present invention, when the start state of a word (for example, immediately after entering the input mode or immediately after inputting a blank)

(a) button is pressed once (eg, the [*] button), the basic type vowel "

(a) " is recognized, and the vowel "

(a) " once again, the vowel "

(a-) " is recognized.

(a)" 버튼이 길게 눌러지면, 기본형 모음 "

(a)"로 인식하는 것이다. 다음으로 모음 "

(u)" 버튼이 짧게 눌러지면, 모음 "

(a)" 버튼의 길게누름과 모음 "

(u)" 버튼의 짧게 누름의 조합을 기본형 모음 "

(o)" 로 인식하고 출력하는 것이다. 마찬가지로 "

(k)" 다음 "

(a)" 가 눌러지면 "

"이 되고, 다시 "

(a)" 가 한번 더 눌러지면, "

=

(k) +

(a-)" 이 되고, 다시

(i) 가 입력되면 "

=

(k) +

(ai)" 가 된다. 그러나 마지막

(i) 를 길게 눌러줌으로써, "

" 를 입력할 수 있는 것이다. 여기서

(i) 가 한번 더 눌러지면 "

" 이 된다. 정리하면 모음버튼 길게누름을 통해 강제적으로 모음의 기본형이 표시되도록 할 수 있으며, 길게누름 이후 조합되는 모음 역시 기본형모음으로 표시됨을 의미한다. 이는 출원인이 제시한 모든 모음조합에 적용가능하며, 모음이 조합되는 최초의 모음버튼의 길게누름 이후 모음 버튼의 짧게 누름의 조합에 의하여 다른 모음의 기본형을 인식할 수 있다. 이는 출원인이 제시한 모음조합((a), (i), (u)의 조합) 뿐만 아니라 다른 방식의 모음조합에 의하여 모음을 입력하는 경우에도 적용할 수 있다.In the prior art, the technique of recognizing the alphabet is introduced by "short press after long press". Similarly, a "basic type" vowel can be input by "long depression" of the vowel button at the start of the vowel combination, and other basic vowels can be combined by short depression of the subsequent vowel button. For example, in the vowel combination start state after consonant input, the vowel "

(a) "When the button is pressed for a long time,

(a). " Next,

(u) " button is pressed briefly, the vowel "

(a) "Long press on button and vowel"

(u) "combination of the short press of the button"

(o) &quot;. Similarly,

(k) " Next "

(a) If "

"Become, again"

(a) " is pressed once more, "

=

(k) +

(a-) &quot;, and again

(i) is input,

=

(k) +

(ai). "However,

(i) is pressed for a long time,

&Quot;, where &lt; RTI ID = 0.0 &gt;

(i) is pressed once more,

"In summary, the basic type of a vowel can be forced to be displayed through a long pressing of a vowel button, and a vowel to be combined after a long press can also be displayed as a basic vowel. (A), (i), (2), (3), (4), and (5) of the present invention can be recognized by the combination of a short press of the vowel button after long press of the first vowel button, u)) as well as vowels by other combinations of vowels.

(ri)"의 입력은 임의의 기본모음의 3번 눌러짐으로 입력할 수 있다. 예를 들어 발음이 유사한 모음 "

(i)" 버튼의 3번 눌러짐으로 입력할 수 있다. 참고로 선출원에서 "

(e) =

(a) +

(i) 또는

(a) +

(i-)" 으로 입력할 수 잇다고 하였는데, "__(e) = __(a) + __(i)" 로 입력하면 되며, 굳이 "__(e) = __(a) + __(i-)"으로 입력할 필요는 별로 없다. 다음으로 모음 "

(a-)" 에 반달표가 붙은 모음 "

" 역시 모음 __(a) 가 배정된 버튼(예. [*]버튼) 의 3번누름으로 입력할 수 있다. On the premise that four complex vowels are entered as a combination of basic vowels, the "

(ri) "can be entered by pressing three times on any basic vowel. For example, a vowel"

(i) "button 3 times. For reference, the"

(e) =

(a) +

(i) or

(a) +

(e) = __ (a) + __ (i-), where "__ (e) = __ (a) "And then"

(a-) "with vowel marks attached to"

"You can also enter by pressing 3 times the button assigned to the collection __ (a) (eg the [*] button).

(ud)", "

(udh)" 가 있고, 5개의 차용자음으로 "

(k)", "

(kh)", "

(g)", "

(j)", "

(ph)" 가 있다. 5개의 차용자음은 거의 사용되지 않는다고 한다. 이렇게 아랫점이 붙는 글자의 입력은 각 자음을 발음의 유사성에 근거하여 기 제시한 자음그룹에 두고 해당 버튼의 반복누름에 의하여 선택되도록 할 수 있다. 다음의 표는 아랫점이 붙은 자음을 발음의 유사성에 근거하여 함께 그룹핑한 사례이다. 물론 각 그룹은 임의의 버튼에 할당할 수 있으며, 변형이 가능하다. 이 경우, 하나의 버튼에 명시적으로 또는 암시적으로 할당된 알파벳의 수가 많아지면, 버튼의 반복누름의 횟수가 많아지는 단점이 있다. It can be seen that there is a consonant with a dot (.) Under the consonant. This is referred to as "lower point" for convenience. Of the Hindi basic consonants "

(ud) &quot;,"

(udh) &quot;, and there are five borrowing consonants "

(k) &quot;,"

(kh) &quot;,"

(g) &quot;,"

(j) &quot;,"

(ph). "It is said that five borrowing consonants are rarely used. The inputting of the letters with the lower points is performed by placing the consonants in a group of consonants presented based on the similarity of pronunciation, In the following table, consonants with lower dots are grouped together based on the similarity of pronunciation. Of course, each group can be assigned to any button and can be modified. In this case, one button The number of times the button is repeatedly pressed increases as the number of alphabets that are explicitly or implicitly assigned to the button is increased.

(k)" 는 [1]버튼에 배치, "

(ch)" 는 [2]버튼에 배치, ... "

(r)" 은 [9]버튼에 배치)할 수 있다. 또한 예를 들어 모음은, __(a), __(i), __(u) 를 각각 [*], [0], [#] 버튼에 배치하면 매우 안정감있는 키패드가 구성된다. 위의 그룹은 단지 예시일 뿐이며, 변형이 가능함은 자명하다. 또한 각 그룹을 대표하는 자음 하나씩 만을 키패드에 표시할 수도 있으나, 복수로 표시(예. [1]버튼에 "

(k)" 와 "

(g)" 표시 또는 2개 이상 표시)하는 것도 가능하며, 각 그룹은 임의의 버튼에 배정될 수 있음은 자명하다. 상기 예시에 의하여 나열된 순서로 버튼의 반복누름에 따라 알파벳이 선택된다고 하면, "

(k)"가 배정된 버튼을 한번 누르면 "

(k)" 가 인식되고, 한번 더 누르면 "

(g)" 가 인식되고, 한번 더 누르면 "

(kh)" 가 인식되는 식이다. Consonants representing each consonant group can be arbitrarily placed on each button one by one based on the above table. For example, place the first consonants of the above nine groups in the [1] - [9] buttons (that is,

(k) "is placed on the [1] button, and"

(ch) "is placed on the [2] button, ..."

(r) "can be placed on the [9] button.) For example, a vowel can be defined as [*], [0], [#] The above group is merely an example, and it is obvious that it is possible to modify it. Also, only one consonant representing each group can be displayed on the keypad, but a plurality of marks (e.g. Press the [1]

(k) " and "

(g) " display or two or more display), and it is obvious that each group can be assigned to an arbitrary button. If the alphabet is selected according to the repeated pressing of the buttons in the order listed in the above example, "

(k) "is pressed once,

(k) " is recognized, and if it is pressed again,

(g) " is recognized, and once again, the "

(kh) " is recognized.

(d)" 를 입력한 후, 약속된 버튼(예. [6]버튼)을 길게 눌러 "

(ud)" 를 입력할 수 있다. 이 방법을 사용하면, 아랫점이 붙지 않는 알파벳에도 아랫점을 덧붙인 글자를 입력할 수 있는 범용성이 있다. Next, the applicant &apos; s earlier application entitled " Control method using long press " For example, consonants "

(d) "and then press and hold the assigned button (eg [6] button)

(ud). "With this method, there is a general versatility to input a letter added to the lower dot even if the letter does not have a lower dot.

(k)" 을 입력한 후, 약속된 버튼(예. [9]버튼)을 길게 눌러 "

" 를 입력할 수 있다. And there is a consonant with a dot on the consonant as an indication of the semi-consonant (semitone of non-consonant). For convenience, this is called the "point of point". The alphabet with the upper dot can also be entered as "control processing with long press". For example, consonants "

(k) ", then press and hold the assigned button (eg [9] button)

"Can be input.

" - 점선으로 된 동그라미 부분에는 자음 또는 모음이 위치함)가 붙는 것이다. 이를 편의상 "반달점" 이라 부른다. 모음 "

(a)" 는 생략되어 표시되지 않으므로, 실제로는 반달점이 모음 또는 자음위에 붙게된다. 마찬가지로 "길게누름을 이용한 컨트롤처리방법" 으로 입력할 수 있다. 예를 들어, "

(k)" 다음 "

(a-)" 을 입력하면 "

(ka-)" 가 되고, 다시 약속된 버튼(예. [8]버튼)을 길게 누르면, "

" 가 된다. 역시, "

(k)" 다음 약속된 버튼(예. [8]버튼)을 길게 누르면, "

" 가 된다. 만약 "

(k)" 를 포함한 알파벳 그룹이 [8]버튼에 할당되고, [8]버튼에 "

(k)" 하나 또는 다른 알파벳이 함께 배치되어 있다면, "

" 는 "88~" 로 입력됨을 알 수 있다. (여기서 "8~" 은 [8]버튼을 길게 누르는 것을 의미)Next, the non-vowel non-vowel (nasal vowel) of the vowel is indicated by the "vandal + dots"

"- dotted circles have consonants or vowels), which is called" vandal dots "for convenience.

(a) "is omitted and is not actually displayed, the half-moon point is attached on the vowel or consonant. Likewise, it can be entered as" control processing method using long press. "For example,

(k) " Next "

(a-) "

(ka-) "and press and hold the promised button (eg [8] button) again,

"Nevertheless,"

(k) "Press and hold the next promised button (eg the [8] button)

"If"

(k) "is assigned to the [8] button, the [8] button is assigned the"

(k) "If one or the other alphabet is placed together,

"Is entered as" 88 ~ "(where" 8 ~ "means press and hold the [8] button)

Next, a case of applying the concurrent input method under the Hindi input method exemplified above will be briefly shown. The Hindi syllable starts with "consonant + vowel + ..." or starts with "vowel + ..." and says that the vowel comes out alternately. Therefore, simultaneous input is possible by using "(first vowel) + syllable reference initial code" or "(first vowel value) + syllable reference initial value simple code" in Hindi input. Similarly, "(first vowel) + simple code base simple code" or "(first vowel value) + simple code base based on consonant value" can be utilized. The parentheses in "first vowel" and "first vowel value" are the syllables that start with consonants.

(s) 가 입력되고 나서 모음버튼이 입력되지 않고, 다른 자음버튼(예. (t) 그룹의 알파벳이 배정된 버튼)이 입력되는 순간 자음이 연속하므로 힌디어 제한(힌디어 단어생성 규칙)을 위반하므로 입력값을 심플코드로 해석하는 것이다.

(s) 가 입력되고 나서

(t') 가 입력되면 단어의 처음이 "

(s)__

(t')..." 와 일치하는 단어를 사용자에 추천(예. 리스트 형태)하여 줄 것이다. 만약 한번 더 (t)그룹의 알파벳이 배정된 버튼이 눌러지면, "

(s)__

(th)..." 와 일치하는 단어를 사용자에 추천하여 줄 것이다. (밑줄부분에는 모음이 있음을 의미) "

(s)__

(th)..." 까지 입력되면 이에 일치하는 단어 "

", ... 등등의 단어를 사용자에 추천하여 줄 수 있다. 마찬가지로 "모음+자음" 이 인식되고, 다시 모음버튼의 입력없이 다른 자음버튼이 눌러지는 순간 입력값을 심플코드로 해석하여 처리할 수 있다. 이 경우는 "첫모음+자음+___+자음..."이 일치하는 단어를 사용자에 추천하여 주게 될 것이다. It is assumed that "(first vowel value) + syllable-based initial value simple code" is used as the short-cut input value, and an example of the full-priority concurrent input method is as follows. When a consonant is input as the first input after the start of a word and the consonant is input again without the vowel button being pressed, it is a violation of the Hindi restriction (Hindi word generation rule) in which the consonant and the vowel alternate. , And a word whose consonant of the first syllable matches the consonant of the second syllable is recommended to the user. As a concrete example

(Hindi word generation rule) is violated because consonants are consecutive at the moment of inputting the other consonant buttons (for example, the button in which the alphabet of the group (t) is assigned) after the input of the syllable number (s) The input value is interpreted as a simple code.

(s) is input

(t ') is input, the beginning of the word is "

(s) __

(eg, list) of words that match the alphabet (t ') ... "If the button to which the alphabet of the group (t) is assigned is pressed once,

(s) __

(th) ... "to the user (the underlined part means that there is a vowel)"

(s) __

(th) ... &quot;, the corresponding word "

Quot ;, " ..., " etc. Similarly, if " vowel + consonant " is recognized and another consonant button is pressed without inputting the vowel button again, In this case, a word that matches "first vowel + consonant + ___ + consonant ..." will be recommended to the user.

(k)__

(g)..." 와 같은 입력값을 처리하려면, " (k)" 입력후 일정시간(선출원에서 언급한 언어제한해제 지연시간 또는 이타지연시간) 동안의 시간지연을 통하여 "

(k)" 를 확정하고 나서, "

(g)" 를 입력하는 식으로 가능하다. 또는 약속(예. 우측이동버튼 누름)에 따라 기 입력된 "

(k)" 를 확정하고 나서 "

(g)" 를 입력하는 식으로 가능하다. 이러한 병행입력방법의 사례는 모두 선출원에서 언급(PC용 키보드 및 키패드에서 적용가능함)한 것으로 새로운 내용이 아니다. If only the consonant combinations in the same button (eg "

(k) __

(k) ", it is necessary to process the input value such as" (g) ... "through a time delay for a certain period of time (the language restriction release delay time described in the prior application or the second delay time)

(k) &quot;,"

(g) &quot;, or " g " (or "

(k) " and then "

(g). &quot; Examples of such concurrent input methods are all referred to in the earlier application (applicable to PC keyboards and keypads) and are not new contents.

In the present invention, it has been described that the alphabet is recognized in response to " button pressing. &Quot; Practically speaking, in a detail part of the program, a predetermined alphabet is recognized when a button is pressed, and a predetermined alphabet is recognized when a button is depressed without recognizing the alphabet when the button is depressed. In the present invention, the expression " button press " may include a case where an alphabet is recognized at the moment when the button is depressed. This is the same in other aspects of the present invention.

12.14 Semi-consonant separator Bar Separator Language restriction input method on keypad

Semi-consonants (ie, half-vowels) are slightly different for each language. In English, w, y, and j are treated as semi-consonants. In some languages, j is excluded. It is also said. In general, w and y seem to be treated as consonants in almost all languages.

Here, since the semi-consonants have properties and sounds similar to vowels, placing the semi-consonants in separate groups is an extension of grouping consonants based on the similarity of pronunciation.

There are also English alphabets that are not used in a particular language (eg, k and w, which are used only in Spanish for foreign words), and alphabets other than English alphabet (the applicant is a modified alphabet or an additional alphabet for convenience). It is also used. Unused alphabets of the English alphabet may also be needed for the input of commonly used English words. Therefore, if there is not a large number of Roman alphabet that is not used in a particular language, it can be grouped with semi-consonants and assigned to the same button. See Figure 10-6 in Chinese.

You can also group alphabetical characters that are not used in a particular language and assign them to the same button.

12.15 Language Limit Entry Method on Incomplete Bar Decomposition Keypad

In the present invention, it has been shown that ambiguity can be eliminated or minimized by constructing a syllabic separation keypad optimized for each language and applying an iterative selection method. In addition, by constructing the keypad with a syllabus separation function, the algorithm of the input system can be simplified. It is obvious that various modifications are possible based on this. Accordingly, a case where a sub-set is allocated to some buttons with a slight modification thereof is also a modified category of the language restriction input method in the keyboard sub-keypad disclosed in the present invention. This is referred to as "incomplete vowel separation keypad" for convenience, and the button assigned to the vowel is referred to as a "vowel combination button" for convenience.

For example, the vowel separation keypad grouping the vowel "i" and the (consonant) "y" consonants together is assigned to a specific button, consonants (in this case, semi consonants) and vowels (The remaining buttons are separated by consonant buttons and vowel buttons). If there is no case such as "iy" or "yi", it is possible to input Chinese characters without ambiguity by applying the Chinese restriction input method. In this case, it is assumed that the child vowel is selected in the order of "y" (once pressed) and "i" (twice pressed) according to the number of times of pressing the specific assigned mixed button, It is determined that the input of the previous consonant button is the input of the consonant. Therefore, the system does not regard the input of the &quot; y &quot; . This is because it is possible to use a language restriction that can not produce consonant "y" after a specific consonant in Chinese.

Another example is to group the vowel "i" and the consonant "j", or the vowel "i" and the consonant "k" into the same group, and apply the (language restriction) iterative selection method. When entering Chinese characters "... ik ... " or "… that ... &Quot; as shown in Fig. Assigning consonants and vowels together on some of these buttons without a specific reason complicates the input algorithm, reduces the efficiency of the input system configuration, and is not as good as applying the language restriction input method on a full syllabic separation keypad . However, due to the nature of each language, it is possible to place a combination button on some of the buttons for special purposes such as assigning consonants to all 10 number buttons (see Korean example).

This can be applied by modifying the flowchart of FIG. 10-7. See Figure 10-9. The same applies when there is more than one child vowel combination button, and the same is true when more than two child vowels are assigned to one child vowel mixing button. Applying language restrictions on the incomplete vowel separation keypad is a bit more complicated (see examples of "i" and "y" above) Flowcharts that apply language restrictions in more detail can be more complex than in Figures 10-9. Fig. 10-9 can be considered as a modification of Fig. 10-7 and a very brief representation of general contents.

For example, when entering a Chinese Pinyin on the standard English keypad of Figure 5-1, the vowels can be recognized without ambiguity because the five vowels are assigned to different buttons. In the case of consonants, consonants following "~ vowel + n" can be recognized without ambiguity. When "~ vowel + n + m" is entered in "~ n + X" (where 'X' represents the Virgin Mary in English consonants), the vowel is combined with the vowel "o" Can be recognized temporarily as "~ ao" when a vowel (for example, vowel "a") comes in. However, since the normal Chinese syllable syllable does not end with "m", the previous input value can be recognized as "~ anm + vowel" by looking at the vowel recognized by the next input value. If "n + m = 666" is entered followed by a vowel that can not be combined with "a" (eg, 'e'), can be processed as "~ enm ~" (since '~ emn ~' is not available in Chinese Pinyin).

Ambiguity can occur when a consonant follows a syllable that ends with "vowel + ng". For example, "~ ngg ~" can be recognized as "~ nh ~". In Chinese, the system can search all the Chinese characters matching "~ ngg ~" and "~ nh ~" in the index and provide them to the user. "~ ngh + vowel ~" can be recognized as "~ ni + vowel". If the later recognized vowel is a vowel that can not be followed by an "i" (eg 'u'), the input value can be recognized as "~ nghu" the Chinese character corresponding to "~ ni + vowel ~" can be searched and processed. In addition, when some ambiguity occurs, it is possible to search for all the words that match the analysis result and provide it to the user.

In the standard English keypad shown in Fig. 1-1, when the Chinese restricted repetition selection method is applied, there is a case where "~ ngh + vowel ~" can be recognized as "~ ni + vowel" The search term can be retrieved from the Pinyin index. If the Pinyin index stores all of the full codes (full codes in the iterative selection method based on FIG. 1-1), it can be used in all cases where the input value can be generated . The "ngh + vowel" and "~ ni + vowel") can be searched for an index and the system can recognize matching vowels.

For example, when the repetition selection method is applied in Figs. 1-1 and 5-1, "222" can be recognized as "aaa", "ab", "ba", and "c". Therefore, in Fig. 1-1 and Fig. 5-1, &quot; beijing = 22334445444664 &quot;, wherein the consecutive number groups can be recognized as a plurality of alphabet combinations. The consecutive number group "22 ~" can be interpreted as "aa" or "b". "~ 33 ~" can be interpreted as "dd" or "e". Therefore, "2233 ~" can be interpreted as "aadd ~", "aae ~", "bdd ~" or "be ~". As the input value increases, the number of possible combinations increases exponentially. The alphabetic combination that can be interpreted for the input value is also called "possible alphabetic combination" or "candidate alphabetic combination" for convenience.

However, when "22 ~" is pressed, it can be interpreted as "aa ~" or "b ~". When the system confirms that the word starting with "aa ~" no longer exists in the index , The system will be able to process the input value "22 ~" as "b ~" except for combinations starting with "aa ~". This is similar to the way Chinese Chinese Pinyin can interpret input value "22 ~" as "b ~" by using Chinese restrictions that do not start with "aa ~". Therefore, when "2233 ~" is pressed, the index is searched for only two combinations of "bdd ~" and "be ~", and here again the phrase starting with "bdd ~" is no longer in the index If the system determines that the combination beginning with "bdd ~" is no longer taken into consideration, only "be ~" can be processed according to the next input value. You can also see Chinese pinyin in a similar way to "input ~" 2233 ~ "to" be ~ "by using the Chinese restriction that" bdd ~ "is not possible. Can be interpreted as &quot; beg ~ &quot; for the input value &quot; 22334 ~ &quot;. Also, the input value "223344 ~" can be interpreted as "begg ~" or "beh ~". When the system searches for the Pinyin index and confirms that the word starting with "begg ~" no longer exists, The value &quot; 223344 ~ &quot; is processed as &quot; beh ~ &quot;. This is analogous to using a Chinese restricted input method (eg, an input method using the Chinese restriction, in which "begg ~" is not a valid syllable, but only "beh ~" is a valid phoneme syllable, according to the Chinese Pinyin generation rules). If "4" is pressed once more and the input value becomes "2233444 ~", it can be interpreted as "behg ~" or "bei ~". The input value is interpreted as "bei ~" because the input value is treated as "bei ~" as soon as the system confirms that the input value " Can be seen in a similar way.

In a system storing all the words and full codes to be input, the number of candidate alphabetic combinations in "beijing = 22334445444664" is 2 * 2 * 4 * 1 * 4 * 2 * 1 = 128. Of course, it is also within the scope of the present invention to process all of these 128 candidate alphabet combinations against the index and to process only the matching words. However, in systems where the system can recognize the input values from the beginning of input, alphabetic combinations (in the above example, 'aa ~', 'bdd ~', behg ~ ', etc.) It is useful to exclude the input at the beginning.

Of the many candidate alphabet combinations that occur as a result of successive increases of the same input values in the iterative selection method, the system can search only a part of candidate alphabet combinations existing in the index. If it is confirmed that all the candidate alphabet combinations by the input values do not exist in the index, the system can treat the input value as a promised type of simple code and process it.

12.16 Application of non-confidential control processing method

(3 * 4 button on the keypad or separate external button on the keypad) as the control button, so that only the representative alphabet is selected by the corresponding button 1, and the remaining alphabets are inputted by the control processing method . For example, if "w, y, v" assigned to the [0] button on the keypad in Figure 10-6 is assigned to any consonant button and "0" = 10 "(when applying input after control). This is already mentioned in the earlier application.

13. Parallel input method to judge input length

The length of the short code stored in the index may be less than a certain number in some cases. In addition, the type of short code (eg, type 1 (city name), type 2 (bank name), etc.) entered by the user or by the system in a particular case Can be built) can be specified. Assuming that the type of short code input in type 1 (city name) is specified and the length of the short code in the city name is 3 or less, when the parallel input method adopting the short input method as the basic mode is applied, , The system can treat the input value as a full code and process it. On the contrary, when applying the parallel input method, three input values are input and the word completion function (eg, blank) is input, the system can treat the input value as a simple code.

This will be particularly useful when the length of the short code of a specific type (city name - Beijing, company name - 通 通 集,, ...) such as Korean and Chinese can be less than a certain length For example, in Korea, most bank names are composed of two syllables, so the syllable standard initials for the syllables are the syllable standard initials The length of the code is 2).

If it is determined that the input value is a short code or a full code at the beginning of the input and is not provided to the user, that is, if the length of the input value is greater than or equal to a specific length, it is determined whether the input value is a simple code or a full code And the like. In other words, every time an input value is input, the short code index is not searched, and only the length of the input value is checked to be longer than a certain length, thereby simplifying the implementation and improving the performance of the system.

14. Language restriction parallel input method

The language restriction parallel input method is a method in which the input value is considered as a simple code when the input value violates the "word generation rule" of a specific language (that is, at the moment when the language restriction is violated) . If it is confirmed that the value matching the input value no longer exists in the simple code index, the input value can be treated as a full code again.

14.1 Language restriction Concurrent input method with full input method

14.1.1 Chinese

In particular, the Chinese syllable reference initial code based on FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4 has only the numerical values of the consonant buttons [1] to [9] (even when vowels a, o, and e are used alone , But it is almost exclamatory and almost unrealistic, and if vowel i, u, ..u are used singly, they are preceded by y, w, y. In the examples of FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the second or at least the third input value of the full code to which the iterative selection method is applied is one of the buttons [*], [0] or [#] Should be entered. As mentioned in the Korean example of the earlier application (using the vowel element), this property is a good property to know whether or not the input value is full code at the initial input when applying the "parallel input method" .

For example, in a parallel input method (full-priority parallel input method) in which a repetition selection method based on FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4 is used as a full input method and a full input mode is set as a basic input mode, When the value of "693 ... = shk ..." is input, the input value does not form a full code at the moment when the third value [3] is input (the next consonant 'k' The system can recognize the input value as a simple code and process it. Also "112 ... = pd ... Is input, the input value does not form a full code at the moment when the third input value [2] is input ('11' can not be 'bb' in Chinese input and can not be interpreted as 'p' p is followed by Roman alphabetic consonants d or t), the system recognizes the input value as a simple code and can process it. As the "7771 ... = wb ... ", The system can treat the input value as a simple code at the moment when the fourth input value [1] is input. As a result, in most cases, if the second or third input value is entered, the system will know whether the input value is a full code or not.

"14 ... = bj ... "Is entered, the system recognizes the fact that the input value does not form a valid Chinese syllable at the moment when the second input value [4] is input (because Roman alphabet consonants are not combined like bj in Chinese ladies) Input values can be treated as simple codes. In other words, in Fig. 10-5, the system can provide the user with the corresponding phrase &quot; Bejing &quot; or &quot; Beijing &quot; of the simple code &quot; 14 &quot;. If there is no simple code beginning with "14" or "14" in the index of the simple code, the system will treat the input value as a full code and provide "bj" to the user.

This is the same as in the Korean case using the vowel element (Fig. 4-5). The full input method shown in FIG. 4-5 can be regarded as a Korean restricted repetitive selection method. When the parallel input method is applied, if the input value is &quot; 12 &quot; The input value is regarded as a simple code, and the simple code index is referred to, and a phrase corresponding to the simple code is provided to the user. However, if it is confirmed that there is no more simple code matching "12" in the simple code index, the system regards the input value as a full code again and provides "a" to the user.

In order to facilitate understanding, the simple codes in the simple code indexes of FIGS. 5-4 and 10-5 are displayed in an aligned state, but they may be stored in any form in the system, Simply sort the simple code and check whether the input value is no longer present in the simple code index.

In addition, a parallel input method in which the basic input mode is set in the short-cut input mode (assuming that only the syllable reference initial code consisting of [1] to [9] is stored based on the simple code index to be searched, (Shortened priority concurrent input method), the system recognizes that the input value is a full code and can process it without searching the simple code index when the second value [*] is input from the input value "1 * ..." have. This is also the same as in the case of Korean in Fig. 5-4.

In Figs. 5-4 and 10-5, Pinyin / Hanja index and Simple code index are described as a single index. However, as shown in Fig. 5-1, there exists a Pinyin / Chinese character index (simply called "Pinyin index", an index storing Chinese characters corresponding to "Pinyin + Pinyin" / Pinyin index (simply called "simple code index", "index for simple code + simple code correspondence Pinyin + Pinyin correspondence kanji" or "simple code + simple code correspondence Pinyin") Do.

As shown in FIGS. 5-4 and 10-5, it is not always necessary to store only the syllable reference initial code in the simple code index, and it is also possible that different types of simple codes are stored together with the consonant reference initial code. Similarly, depending on the type of the simple code, the syllable reference initial code index, the consonant reference initial code index, and the entire association simple code index may be implemented with respective indexes.

It is assumed that there is a syllable reference initial code "14", a consonant reference simple code "1473", and an entire association simple code "1 * # 4 # 73" for "Beijing" as shown in FIG. In the case of the syllable reference initial code "14" and the consonant reference simple code "1473", when the second input value "7" is pressed, You can treat the value as a simple code and retrieve and process the index. However, in the case of the entire association simple code "1 * # 4 # 73" of "beijing", when the input value "1 * # 4 ..." is interpreted as a full code, "baiz ..." # 4 "does not violate the rules for generating the pinyin. However, since "baiz ..." (and "baij ..." can be "baij ..." according to the following input values) is not a Pinyin existing in the Pinyin index of FIG. Therefore, the system interprets the input value as a full code according to the input of each input value, and the input value is "b ... => ba ... => bai ... => baiz ..." Each time it recognizes, it refers to the Pinyin index and searches for a matching phrase. As shown in Fig. 10-10, a matching pinyin can be found up to "bai ~", but at the moment when the input value is recognized as "baiz ~" (and potential "baij ~"), the system no longer matches the pinyin index (See (1) in Fig. 10-10). Therefore, the input value "1 * # 4 ..." from "baiz ~" can be regarded as a simple code, and a matching phrase can be searched by referring to the simple code index ((2) - ), (2) - (B)). In this case, if a phrase that matches the input value "1 * # 4 # ..." can not be found in the simple code index, the system again treats the input value as "bai ..." as a full code.

Since all the Pinyin and Chinese character indexes (Pinyin / Chinese character index) must be stored in the system due to the characteristic of Chinese, it is confirmed that even if the input value is a valid Pinyin syllable, It means to treat the value as simple code. This can be seen in the same context as processing the input value as a simple code when the system recognizes that the input value does not form a full code.

In the case where different types of simple codes exist for the same word, it is possible to have a simple code for a single pinyard in a form of a multi-character, as shown in FIGS. 10-10 or 10-11. The processing of (2) - (A) or (2) - (B) in Figure 10-11 should be performed when the input value is regarded as a simple code and processed Optionally. Using the processing of (2) - (B) in Figure 10-11, you do not need to have a simple code in the index. The process of (2) - (B) is to search for a matching Pinyin by comparing the Pinyin of the index with the combination of Pinyin that the input value can achieve for each input value. The combination of pinyin that the input value can achieve is that two alphabets are assigned to the [1] button and three alphabets are assigned to the [*] button so that when the button is pressed until "1 *", (= 2x3) can be easily found. This is referred to as "simple code capable alphabet combination" or "possible alphabet combination" for convenience. In Figure 10-11, the [#] button is assigned two alphabets, so if you press up to "1 * #", you will get 12 combinations, and if you press "1 * # 4" However, since the system does not have a Pinyin starting from "poi ..." in the actual Chinese Chinese Pinyin dictionary, the following combination of "poi ..." can be excluded from consideration. That is, combinations "poiz ..." and "poij ..." of "poi ..." with respect to the input value "1 * # 4" can also be excluded. Likewise, it is possible to search for "Piny ..." as well as Pinyin matching the input value, excluding combinations that do not exist in the Pinyin index of possible alphabet combinations.

Using the processing of (2) - (A) of FIG. 10-11 should have a simple code in the index, but it can also handle the case of irregularly defined simple code. (2) - (B), it is not necessary to store the simple code in the index, but the premise is that the simple code with a certain rule (for example, the entire associated simple code) It is necessary to know in advance the promised simple code type (for example, the entire associated simple code).

When the value analyzed by the full code does not exist in the index, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 and 10-13, the input value is referred to as a simple code (i.e., , Short-axis input value). When applying the full-priority concurrent input method, FIG. 10-12 shows a procedure that is generally applicable to Chinese input. This can be equally applied to a full-priority concurrent input method using a syllable-based initial code or a consonant-based simple code. For example, if a syllable-based initial code is input, the system interprets it as a full code and searches for the Pinyin index. In most cases, the input value is no longer present in the Pinyin index This is because the system can recognize it. FIG. 10-13 shows a procedure for checking whether the input value constitutes an effective phoneme syllable before searching the Pinyin index using the linguistic characteristic of Chinese.

When the system stores the indexes of all the words to be input in the input systems of Chinese as well as other languages, each input value is input in the same manner as in the procedure of FIGS. 10-12 and 10-13 Each time the input value is interpreted as a full code, the words in the index are searched to see if they match, and if the matching word no longer exists, it is possible to treat the input value as a short code.

14.1.2 English, etc.

If it is recognized that the fourth consonant is entered from the beginning of the first word, starting with "st ~" or "sp ~", and without starting with "st ~" or "sp ~ When the first consonant is recognized as being input, the system can treat the input value as a simple code.

For example, when the simple repetition selection method is applied in the keypad of FIG. 1-1, and the input value is input when the third input value [7] is input when "467 ... = gms ..." is input, As a result, the system treats the input value as a simple code and can process it. If the full associative simple code "4678255 = install" of install is stored in the simple code index, then the system can provide the user with a simple code mapping, install. Simple code index of search scope "467 ... &Quot; does not exist, the input value can be treated as a full code again.

And, as described above, if you use the English-language iterative selection method as a full input method in the keyboard separation keypad, the input value will be changed to English input rules (eg, "st ~" or "sp ~ Three consonants can not come) can easily be recognized, so that the concurrent input method can be applied more efficiently.

14.2 Language restriction parallel input method with full input method excluding control alphabet

In Figure 1-1, if the first alphabet of each button is typed as a representative alphabet and the remaining alphabets are entered by the control processing method (that is, the method of excluding the representative alphabetic control is applied) A language-restricted concurrent input method can be applied in which the input value is regarded as a simple code when the word generation rule is violated by utilizing the word generation rule.

For example, in Figure 1-1, if the first alphabet is the representative alphabet and the rest of the alphabet is entered by control processing method, the moment when the third input value [7] is input when "467 ... = gms ..." Since input values violate English word generation rules, the system can treat input values as simple codes and process them.

Likewise, it can be similarly applied to languages other than English, and the rest is similar to the language-restricted parallel input method in which the iterative selection method is a full input method.

14.3 Overcoming the third ambiguity in the language restriction parallel input method

In the case of inputting the precondition-related simple code "72673" of "scope", if the system primarily recognizes it as a full code, it becomes "72673 = pampd" and the input value does not violate the English word generation rule. Quot; third &quot; ambiguity &quot; occurs in which the input value is firstly recognized as a full code, and the input value is secondarily interpreted as a simple code and recognized as a scope corresponding to the simple code. Here, the simple repetition selection method is applied based on FIG. 1-1 as a full input method.

In this case, the system will primarily provide the user with a pampd. However, if a user wishes to enter a scope, they can select a scope by pressing a specific button (for example, the down arrow [v] button). Or "72673" is entered, the word "pampd", which interprets the input value as a full code, and "scope", which is interpreted as a simple code, To a list and allow the user to select them.

The above case can be similarly applied to the bottleneck input method using the representative alphabetic control processing method as a full input method. Also, even if the input value is present in the simple code index at the end of the word after inputting the input value in the shortened priority parallel input method instead of the full priority parallel input method, when the input value is regarded as a full code, If not violated (if a third ambiguity occurs), the user can be made to select (to repeatedly press a particular button or select from a list).

The present invention can be similarly applied to languages other than English (in particular, Japanese, for example, in which a control processing method for excluding a representative alphabet is applied).

In order to select one of a plurality of candidates, it is possible to select a target phrase among the candidate phrases outputted by the system by using a button which is not frequently used among the movement buttons. This has already been explained in terms of not only the occurrence of the third ambiguity but also in all cases where ambiguity occurs.

15. Parallel input method using string that violates language restriction

The input value (full code or simple code) may be interpreted on the client side or may be interpreted on the server side. Figs. 11-1 and 11-2 are diagrams of a prior art showing a case of being analyzed on the client side and a case of being interpreted on the server side, respectively. Simply "system" is a concept that encompasses both client-side and server-side systems. When the input value is a simple code, the client interprets the input value and transmits a simple code corresponding phrase to the server side in the form of a text. On the server side, various kinds of services can be provided. Likewise, when input values are transmitted to the server side in numerical terms, and the server side interprets them, the server side can interpret the simple code and utilize it for various services. The DTMF tone is transmitted from the client side and the input value is transmitted from the server side, and of course, the numerical value is transmitted from the client side to the server side.

In the language restriction parallel input method, the input value is regarded as a simple code, and the input value is input to the index of the simple code (in other words, the input value does not form a valid syllable of the specific language) There may not be a simple code matching the value. In this case, the input value is regarded as a full code again. For example, the user inputs "7799" in consideration of "Samsung Electronics" as shown in FIG. 4-5. In the simple code index in the client side system, "Sams99" and " Electronic ", the system simply assumes that" user "has entered it. In the case of a securities information system, if the client side transmits the input value "7799" to the server side, or if the Samsung corresponding to the input value "7799" is transmitted to the server side, the securities information server can interpret "7799" (It is assumed that the stock information server has the simple code "7799" and the simple code counterpart "Samsung Electronics"). However, when the user enters "7799" in the character input mode on the client side, the client side regards the input value as a simple code and processes it as a simple code, and there is no "7799" in the client side simple code index. It is difficult to utilize it in the securities information server when the string "ㅅ" is transmitted to the server side.

Therefore, if the transmitted string "ㅅ" is not a meaningful value, the securities information server extracts "7799" used for entering "ㅅ ㅅ ㅅ", and extracts the corresponding word "Samsung Electronics" of "7799" It can be traced and utilized in the system. Alternatively, another method that can only be applied when using the syllable-based initials code in Korean as a simple code, the system tracks "Samsung Electronics", which matches the first consonant of the syllable " Thereby providing a service.

This can be equally applied to a PC environment using a keyboard rather than a keypad. In other words, in a stock information system using an existing PC as a client, the user has to input " Samsung Electronics " in order to inquire the share price of " Samsung Electronics ", but even if " The system recognizes that the word "ㅅ" is not in the listed company name as an alphabetical list of words, and the two methods described above ("7799" is extracted and then "Samsung" trace or "ㅅ" is matched with the first consonant of syllable ("Samsung Electronics" tracking).

Another method is to register not only the "7799 (simple code), Samsung Electronics (simple code correspondence)" but also the "simple code correspondence character" for the server side index and " It is possible to find out that what the user intended is &quot; Samsung Electronics &quot; by checking that the value &quot; OK &quot; does not form a valid Korean syllable and comparing it with the stored simple code corresponding character.

Figure 11-3 summarizes the above contents, and (A), (B), and (C) are optional.

Furthermore, in the case of inputting a character through a device such as a keyboard or the like in a client such as an existing PC (for example, when a character is input using a word processor of a PC), the syllable reference initial code is used It is possible to input only the first consonant of a syllable and convert it into a target phrase in the system (client or server), to enable high-speed character input, or to utilize it in various information systems. For example, if you want to enter "Samsung Electronics", if the user enters "ㅅ", the system can search the index and provide "Samsung Electronics" with the first consonant of the syllable. Other methods described above (simple code extraction and index search based on the promised specific keypads, simple code corresponding characters stored in the index) can also be applied. See Figure 11-5. (A), (B) and (C) are optionally available.

 Until now, in registering commercial phrases and inputting them, it was enough to simply specify a combination of special function buttons and numeric buttons, regardless of the relation with the phrases. For example, "Samsung Electronics" should be registered as a common phrase and "alt + 1" should be input.

Similarly, referring to Fig. 10-2, "sonsongjipdan (sonsongjipdan: the applicant does not know the Chinese pronunciation, for convenience, Korean pronunciation is considered to be a Chinese vowel, but also applies to Chinese pronunciation)" syllable The reference initial code becomes &quot; 6242 &quot; corresponding to s, t, j, and d. If the user enters "6242" and the 6242 and satongjipdan are not registered in the client-side system's simple code index, the client-side system will only provide the user "sdzd" only. When the user transmits "sdzd" to the server side, since the server side does not form a valid Chinese syllable "sdzd", the input value "6242" inputted by the user is extracted from "sdzd", and the simple code Code) corresponding to "6242" (it is assumed that the server side system stores the simple code and the corresponding phrase).

In the case of Korean, "sdzd" and other variations of the consonant combination (refer to FIG. 10-2) can be used as in the case of searching for a phrase that matches the alphabet assigned with each consonant and the first consonant of each note Eg, "xdjd", "stjt", "sdjt", ... there are 16 cases) and the first consonant of each syllable matches the user.

Sdzd &quot; is also stored in the server side, and the value &quot; sdzd &quot; transmitted from the client side does not form a valid Chinese syllable. Therefore, the transmitted value is compared with the simple code corresponding character of the index, The system can find out that it is "Sotsu Collection".

Figure 11-4 summarizes the above contents, and (A), (B), and (C) are optional.

11-3 and 11-4 may be performed on the server side or on the client side.

The user can search for a word (&quot; Sotsu Collection &quot;) corresponding to the first consonant of the syllable of the syllable in inputting &quot; stjd &quot; in an information communication device such as a PC as well as a device having a keypad. Alternatively, when the user inputs "stjd", a short code (simple code corresponding character) is registered in the system (eg PC) as the first consonant "stjd" of each syllable and when the second consonant is input, sh, ch, zh, etc.), the input value can be regarded as a shortened input value (the user considers that the shortened input is performed). Extracting the simple code from the input value "stjd" can extract the simple code (eg 6242) by means of the preassigned keypad (eg 10-2). 11-6 can be referred to, and (A), (B), and (C) are optionally available.

 FIG. 11B is a diagram showing an example of a case where a word (in the example, " stjd " as a syllable reference initial value) generated by an input value and does not generate a valid phoneme syllable and the first alphabetic character of each syllable "sa-tong-jip-dan => stjd") to search for a matching phrase. It can be seen that the syllable-based initial value is used as the short-term input value. In the keypad of Fig. 10- *, the syllable reference initial value corresponding to &quot; stjd " becomes " 622442 ". As can be easily seen from the figure, (B) in Fig. 11-6 is not provided with a simple code index, but can be provided only by providing an index of a pinyin for input of a Chinese character. Likewise, even when the input value is the "consonant reference input value", the system can search for a word (string) generated by the input value and a phrase matching the consonant of the phrase stored in the index.

The syllable-based initial value (for example, "beijing's syllable-based reference value" 144 = bj ") is similar to the type of the simple code, , "Consonant standard input value" (consonant standard input value of "beijing" is "144773 = bjng"), "initial vowel + syllable initial value", "word standard initial value", and the like. The system treats the input value as a shortened input value at the moment when the input value violates the language restriction.

The types of "short axis input values" proposed so far are summarized in Table 11-11. In Fig. 11-11, the short axis input value A includes (B) to (L), which shows the type of the short axis input value that the system can recognize according to a predetermined rule. Some associated associative simple codes determined in association with some of the alphabets, and unary input values made up of only some of the alphabets. It can be seen that the " total input value " (Z) is a full code of the full input method.

As long as the condition is met (for example, if the input value violates the rule of generating a full code, or does not form a valid syllable in a specific language), the input value is treated as a short input value (That is, processing in which the input value is regarded as not being the full code of the promised full input method) is the core content of the concurrent input method, so that even when the shortened input value not shown in the present invention is used, It is self-evident that it is included in the category of method. The shortcut input values (H) to (L) in the table of FIGS. 11 to 11 may be used not only in a device having a keypad but also in a device such as a PC, as shown in FIGS. 11- 5 and 11-6. Fig. 11-6 (B) shows an example in which "syllable-based initial value" is used as the short-axis input value. The term "simple code" or "short code" is used as a generic term for a shortened input value. The shortened input values of (H) to (L) can also be seen as a simple code of a comprehensive meaning. That is, (I) "syllable-based initial value" in FIG. 11-11 can be called "syllable-based initial value simulated code", and the shortened input values of (H) to .

When "14 = bz" is input as the syllable-based initial value in FIG. 10- *, the system will search for the phrase "bz" and the consonant of each syllable in the index. Here again, if "4" is entered, "144 = bj" will search the index for the phrase "bj" and the first consonant of each syllable match (eg "beijing").

In the present invention, when an arbitrary short axis input value among the short axis input values exemplified above is inputted, it can be interpreted as various kinds of short axis input values. For example, a predetermined single-axis input value (for example, a syllable-based initial value) is firstly treated as a single-axis input value, and the other single-axis input value (for example, ), It is treated as another shortening input value in the third, and it is suggested that the following one shortening input value can be interpreted as various kinds of shortening input values. When the short-cut input value "144 = bj" is input based on FIG. 10- *, the system firstly searches for "bj" and a phrase ("beijing") in which the first alphabet of each syllable matches , It is possible to search for phrases whose consonants are matched in the index of the index, irrespective of whether or not the first search result exists.

This shows that the system can interpret the input of any abbreviated input value shown in FIG. 11-11. If this is applied, it is possible to have a number of search results for one short input value. The priority to be outputted can be applied according to the type of the short input value to be applied. For example, the syllable-based initial value is searched first, the syllable-based input value is analyzed, and the searched phrase (s) is output next. If a user mainly uses the syllable-based initial value as the short-axis input value, it may be desirable to set the phrase (s) interpreted by the syllable-based initial value to be the primary output. Accordingly, it is desirable that the user can specify the priority according to the type of the shortened input value. Also, if a user wishes to use only the consonant-based initial value, it would be desirable to be able to set the single-axis input value to be interpreted only as the consonant-based initial value. The output priority of the phrases obtained by interpreting the same type of short input value can be determined by factors such as frequency of use as mentioned above. Also, the output priority may be determined according to the frequency of use of each of the retrieved phrases regardless of the short input type applied to the interpretation of the short input value.

In the case of "jinzhi (ban)" and "zhuijian", all the syllable standard initial values "jz" and "zj" are all "444." In this case, the third input value "4 The system can recognize that the input value does not form a phoneme syllable at the moment when the syllable-based initial value is inputted to the same button. All the phrases that match the phrase "zj" whose syllable matches "jz" are searched for the shortened input value "444".

Likewise, even when the shortened priority concurrent input method is applied, the input value can be treated as a shortened input value of (B) to (L) in FIG. 11-11. Also, the input value is regarded as a syllable-based initial value first, the second-order syllable-based initial code is regarded as a syllable-based initial value, the third input is treated as a consonant reference initial value, It is possible to do. The input value is treated as a shortened input value and the system regards the input value as a full code when it is confirmed that the matching word no longer exists in the index. It is preferable that the type of the short-cut input value that the user mainly uses can be designated in advance.

In the case of "jinzhi (ban)" and "zhuijian", in order to solve the problem of using the syllable reference initial value, the syllable reference initial value of the syllable sound can be as follows. In Chinese, the tongues "ch", "sh", "zh" are virtually single mothers, and the suffix code is represented by one symbol, but the two alphabetic combinations are represented by the English alphabet. Therefore, the syllable reference initial value simple code of zhuijian according to FIG. 10-6 may also be "4944" corresponding to "zh + j" including "h". The syllable reference initial code will be &quot; 494 &quot; corresponding to &quot; zh + j &quot;. The first alphabets "c", "s", and "z" that make up the tongue chunks "ch", "sh", zh "in the keypad of FIG. 10- * are assigned to buttons other than the second alphabet" h " Quot; and &quot; zhuijian &quot;) are all set to &quot; 444 &quot;, there is no ambiguity.

Input value "4 ~" is recognized as "z ~" and input value "49 ~" is recognized as "zh ~" in full-precedence parallel input method using simple code as initial value And will deal with it. However, since there are many words starting with "zh ~", the system will treat the input value "49 ~" as "zh ~" and output the corresponding word to the user. Therefore, for the input value "49", the system can interpret the syllable-based initial value as a simple code and output a phrase with the syllable structure "z__h__" (the underlined part means that the vowel is located). If only "49" is interpreted as "zh", it becomes difficult to shorten the word with the syllable-based initial value "z__h__". In Chinese, most of the words are composed of one syllable (letter) or two syllables (letters). Therefore, it is necessary to process the input of the tongue tone with the shortening input for shortening the input of the two syllable words. See Figures 10-17. In Fig. 10-17, [prohibited] on the liquid crystal followed by [. . .] Signifies that other words of subordinate are output when there are multiple words of "z__h__". The word "zh__" may also be output first, depending on the user's taste, although it is also possible to output the word "zh__" as a subordinate word. It will be convenient.

If the vowel input is recognized after "49" (eg, the vowel button is pressed), the system will treat the input value as "zh__" (ie, process the input value as a full code). If the consonant input is recognized after "49" (for example, when the consonant button is pressed), the system will treat the input value as "zh__X__" (upper case 'X' is an English consonant representing an arbitrary mother). In other words, in the full-precedence parallel input method, a simple code (syllable-based initial value simple code or syllable-based initial code) is firstly analyzed for the input of "ch", "sh", "zh" It is interpreted as a full code or simple code depending on whether the value is a vowel or a consonant.

The above results are similar to those obtained by applying the simplified first input method to the simplified input value as the initial value of the consonant standard initial value. However, the syllable reference simple value is applied to the shortened input value and the full-priority parallel input method is applied. However, only the word start state (after the confirmation button is pressed or the word is terminated in the input system) When the tune tone is input, the input value is regarded as a shortened input value and processed (in the example, a word whose first tune matches "z__h__" (in the case of other tune sounds such as 'ch' and 'sh' ).

Although the above description is based on FIG. 10- *, it is obvious that the above concept can be applied to other keypads.

Furthermore, it is equally applicable to keyboards and keypads of PCs, as well as to all variants of similar types of keyboards (the types of keyboards implemented on the screen may vary).

16. Parallel input method using simple code capable alphabet combination

If you use the syllable-based initials with simple codes, you do not have a simple code index (eg 6242 / satongjipdan / 4sound) on the client side, It is also useful in cases where only the index of the fishery (eg, satongjipdan / 四 通 集團) is available. For example, "62 ... ", The system recognizes that the input value is in violation of the Chinese language restriction, and the input value is" 62 ... = sd ... , st ... , xd ... , xt ... (For the sake of simplicity, "possible alphabetic combinations") and the words of the index that match the first consonants of each syllable. When the number of button presses is increased, the number of possible alphabet combinations becomes larger and it is possible to compare / search with the index phrase using this possible alphabet combination. See Figure 11-7. "S t j p" and "s d ..", "x d ..." in the record of " "," X t ... "(2 ** 4 = 16 possible), the input value" sd ... "May be compared to this multi-value of each record to provide the user with a four-way aggregate. This is also not recommended because it is difficult to implement the same concept and has no merit. See Figure 11-9. It is the same to compare the possible alphabetic combination which can be expressed as an input value with the phrase of the index (the pinyin in FIG. 11-9).

Likewise, if the client side does not have a simple code index (eg 7799, Samsung Electronics), and only has a specific phrase index (eg Samsung Electronics), the user can use "Samsung Electronics" ... ", The system recognizes that the input value violates the Korean language restriction when the second [7] is input, and the input value" 77 ... = ㅅ ㅅ ... , ㅅㅆ ... , ㅆ シ ... , ㅆㅆ ... (For the sake of convenience, "a possible alphabetic combination") and a word in the index that matches the first consonant of each syllable are searched for and provided to the user. 11-8.

If it is confirmed that a phrase that matches the input value no longer exists in the index, the input value is regarded as a full code and is provided to the user. This is similar to the concurrent input method, except that the user simply enters the value of the initial value of the initial value of the original word, but does not place the simple code in the index, but merely indexes the word. However, this method is also the same as the procedure in which the system detects the input value violates the full code generation rule in the full priority parallel input method or the input value violates the language restriction in the full priority language parallel input method , Only the procedure for searching for a phrase corresponding to the input value is different. In other words, when violating the full code generation rules or violating the language restriction, the system regards the input value as not a full code, but using the point where the input value is the syllable standard initial code without using the simple code, (Or retrieves) a phrase corresponding to the phrase &quot; search &quot;

The core of the concurrent input method is that the system automatically detects the moment when the full code generation rule is violated or the moment when the language restriction is violated and the input value is regarded as a simple code (that is, (Syllable-based initial code). In other words, the syllable-based initialization code is modified only in the special case (using the syllable-based initial code) that searches for the word corresponding to the input value in the concurrent input method.

As in the case of the syllable standard initial code, if the simple code can be automatically extracted because it has regularity such as the entire associated simple code, the consonant-associated simple code, the first vowel + consonant-associated simple code, etc., Quot; possible alphabetic combination " to compare the phrases of the index and retrieve the target phrase from the index. In FIG. 10-11, the system interprets the input value as a full code each time each input value is input. When the system confirms that the Pinyin interpreted as a full code does not exist in the Pinyin index, the system regards the input value as a shortened input value The target phrase can be searched by comparing the "possible alphabetic combination" of the input value with the pinyin. This is illustrated in FIG. 11-10, which is an example of a portion (portions (2) - (B)) of FIGS.

17. Pool input method and parallel input method in input system storing full code

It can be seen from the foregoing that it is somewhat complicated to identify the correct word for the input value by a specific language restriction pool input method on a particular keypad. (For example, English input and Chinese dial tone input by repeat selection method on standard English keypad) As described in Chinese, if the system has an index of all the words that you want to input in Chinese as well as other languages, Can be interpreted primarily as a full code, and if not present in the index, it can be interpreted as a promised simple code.

Hereinafter, the case of Chinese will be described as an example for the sake of convenience. As shown in FIG. 10-14, if the system storing all of the Chinese Pinyin (possible words in other languages) stores all of the pool codes, the system simply searches for a phrase that matches the input value and recognizes the target alphabet You can. If you apply the pool-first concurrent input method, the system treats the input value as a promised type of simple code at the moment when it verifies that the matching full code value no longer exists in the index. The process of inputting " Beijing " in Fig. 10-14 can be viewed as a process of interpreting the input value as a full code. Since we are only storing the full code in the index, we will be able to interpret the full code by searching the index.

It is not useful to store a full code in an index when applying a full input method in which words can be identified without ambiguity by the language restriction input method. However, it can be useful when applying ambiguous full input method such as iterative selection method and storing all the indexes of the input phrase. If all the words you want to input are stored in the index (as in the case of other languages as well as Chinese), as described in the previous section "How to Enter Language Limitations in the Incomplet Bar Separation Keypad" , And the input values can be processed using this full code index.

Although the example of Chinese has been described above, it is obvious that the present invention can be applied to cases other than Chinese. Also, the present invention can be applied not only to the keypad of FIG. 1-1 but also to the keypad of FIG. 10- * and other keypads.

18. Parallel input method that processes input values simultaneously with various types of codes (input values)

A parallel input method is possible in which an input value is regarded as some predetermined type of code (input value). For example, if the input values are treated simultaneously as a full code (A) and an entire associated simple code (B) in FIG. 10-14, the system calculates the input code "1 * #" We can recognize "bei" when interpreting "bai" and full associative simple code. In this case, the system can simultaneously provide "bai" and "bei" to the user.

In the case of the full-priority concatenated input method, only "bei" is output when the code is interpreted as a full code, and only "ba i", which is the result of interpreting the promised short code, is outputted. In this concurrent input method, it is possible to treat the input value as only another type of code at a moment when it is confirmed that the input value no longer exists in the specific type code, and as a result, it is included in the category of the concurrent input method already mentioned I would say. The index of the system does not necessarily have to store the full code and the entire associated simple code as shown in FIG. 10-14, and the same applies to the case where the input values are simultaneously analyzed with various types of codes.

19. Priority of words with ambiguity

When ambiguity occurs in the same input value in any one specific input method (eg, a specific full input method or a specific type of short input method), the specific input method is applied as shown in FIG. 10-14 and other drawings Target phrases can be output according to the order of priority when the ambiguity occurs. For example, in FIG. 10-14, when ambiguity occurs when the full input method is applied, the target phrase is output according to the priority order of (A) priority among the pool codes A, have.

Next, a case in which the input value is interpreted into predetermined types of codes will be described. As shown in Figure 10-14, if the input value "1 * #" is interpreted as a full code, it becomes "bai", and when it is interpreted as the entire association simple code, it becomes "bei" When the ambiguity occurs, the system calculates the target phrase by prioritizing it at the same time with the full code (Figure 10-14 (A)) and the entire associated simple code (Figures 10-14 (B) Can be provided to the user.

For example, the input value is treated as a primary full code, but it is determined that the full code generation rule is violated, the syllable generation rule of the specific language is violated, or the pool code corresponding to the index no longer exists Quot; syllable reference initial code " and " syllable reference initial value " when processing the input value as a short code in the parallel input method in which the input value is treated as a syllable reference initial code and a syllable reference initial value simple code, Quot; value simple code " is generated. (That is, if the syllable-based initial code is (C) and the syllable-based initial value simple code is (D), the target phrase is output by "(C) + (D)

It is obvious that the present invention can be applied to other languages in the same manner as in Chinese.

20. Concurrent input method using control processing method as full input method

When using the control button as the [*] and [#] buttons as shown in Figure 2-1 and Figure 2-2, and applying the control method of non-representative alphabet control, apply the parallel input method, By storing all and applying the shortened concurrent input method, the system pointed out that the input value can be treated as a full code at the moment when "*" or "#" is pressed as the input value.

It is assumed that the short codes in Japanese of FIGS. 2-1 and 2-2 are all composed of numeric values. In this case, an index (which may be composed in the short code index or may be separately constructed from the short code index) storing all the words consisting only of the representative alphabet is applied, and the parallel input method is applied, Only the result of interpreting the input value into the full code and the index of the word consisting of only the representative alphabet (or the simple code index containing the same) are searched and the result interpreted as the short code is all given priority To the user in a target phrase.

For example, the input value is interpreted as "aaa" when the input value "111" is processed in a full code (that is, applying the full-priority parallel input method) in 2-1 and 2-2 If there are no words starting with "aa ~" referring to the index of all the words made up of only the abbreviations of the alphabet, "ai" or "あ い ~ It can be provided to the user in a higher priority.

See Figs. 10-15 and 10-16. In Fig. 10-15, the input value &quot; 11 &quot; is interpreted as a full code. Since this is a word consisting of only the representative alphabet, again, it is checked whether or not the word is an effective word by searching for the index of all words consisting only of the representative alphabet. Here, if "a", which interprets "11" as a full code, exists in the index, it can be recognized as a valid word for the input value. At the moment when it is confirmed that there is no more word corresponding to the input value in the index of all the words consisting only of the representative alphabet, the system interprets the input value again as a simple code, and the system recognizes the corresponding "ai". In Fig. 10-15, the system recognizes the input value &quot; 11 &quot; as the highest priority &quot; ai &quot;. "11" can be "ai ..." (if "..." is followed by "ai" followed by other letters) according to the following input values, Output. Likewise, the target phrase may be "aa" even if it does not exist in the index, so it can also be output in the next order of "ai". In Figure 10-15, "ai ..." and "aa" are displayed in a bluish color, and the second and third are displayed in order of recommendation, which indicates that the system can output this or only "ai".

In Figure 10-15, (1), (2), and (3) may occur sequentially, or as described in "Parallel Input Method for Recognizing Input Values as Multiple Types of Code at the Same Time" have. Likewise, it is easy to understand that full and simple codes are displayed in the index, and it is obvious that the same procedure can be performed even if full code and simple code are not stored (simple code is syllable-based initial code or Simple code that can be regularly interpreted like the full associative simplec). As shown in FIG. 10-16, the same content exists in the case where the index of all the words consisting of only the representative alphabet and the simple code index exist as one index. Implementation data structures can be realized in various forms.

The operation result of the system is similar to the parallel input method described above, but it can be seen that the full-priority parallel input method or general parallel input method is applied instead of the shortened-priority parallel input method.

This can be applied not only to the parallel input method in which the representative alphabet-excluding control processing method is used as the full input method but also to the parallel input method in which the control processing method is the full input method.

21. Input of functions

Blank is a required function when inputting a phrase (function), and deletion (cancellation) function is also required. The enter function can be solved by inputting no input for a certain period after input, but it is also a necessary function. These three functions are collectively referred to as "three basic functions" for convenience. Also, in case of languages such as English, case conversion function is also necessary. Up / Down / Left / Right movement function can be replaced with delete and blank function and up / down movement function is not essential function.

Here are some of the various functions for inputting phrases in order of essential functions. Of course, this is only a reference, not an absolute standard, and it can vary slightly depending on the particular situation. If Chinese characters are input through the English keypad, the Chinese character conversion function will be the most essential function. In addition, the Chinese character conversion function can be an important function even in the Chinese language culture languages such as Japanese and Korean.

1. Blank - Enter - Delete - Change upper / lower case - Switch between national language / numeric / English mode - Move (up / down / left / right)

2. Blank - Delete - Enter - Switch between Native / Numeric / English mode - Switch between upper and lower case - Move (Up / Down / Left /

3. Blank - Enter - Delete - Hanja Conversion - National Language / Numeric / English Conversion - Move (Up / Down / Left / Right)

4. Kanji conversion - Space - Enter - Delete - English / Numeric mode switching - Move

17.1 Entering Functions by Control Processing Method

Alphabet and various symbols can be selected by control processing method. The same can be applied to selecting various functions. Fig. 12-1 shows an example in which the meaning of various functions is given to a numeric button and can be implemented in combination with " function control ". You can associate the number buttons associated with each button so that they can be easily remembered. In FIG. 12-1, the right and left arrows are intuitively recognizable, and the center button is also easy to know the number buttons and their associated functions. The remaining necessary functions can also be easily stored by associating the alphabet associated with the name of the function in each language with the arranged buttons. In Figure 12-1, the shift function is associated with the button [7] assigned "S".

In Fig. 12-1, for convenience, it is assumed that the sound control is selected according to the number of times the [*] button is pressed as in the case of Korean, and then the function control is selected. Function} = [5] + [*] + [*] + [*]. If the alphabet selected by the [5] button 1 is an alphabetic character with no dither / hyphen, it can be regarded that enter is entered when [5] + [*] is applied by applying the skip control processing.

The functions associated with each button may or may not be displayed above the number buttons. However, it has been pointed out that the number buttons related to groups of symbols can be easily displayed so that they can be displayed on a part of the liquid crystal screen, thereby making it convenient to use while maintaining a simple layout without displaying them on the buttons. This can be equally applied here. See Figure 12-2. Also, as pointed out in the symbol input, the user may be allowed to redefine the function associated with the function and the number button.

If the [*] or [#] buttons are not used as other control buttons as in English, you can select "Function Control" with the [*] button 1, so that in Figure 12-1, You can enter functions by pressing the [*] button once.

17.2 Function input by multi-dimensional intersection control processing method (using cross-combination of control buttons)

When one control button is used to input one alphabet, it is called one-dimensional control processing method. This also applies if the same control button is used repeatedly.

If you use [*], [#] as the control buttons and enter alphanumeric characters using the one-dimensional control processing method, you can use the cross key combination of the control buttons ([*] + [#] *]) Can be used to input various functions. If the control button is not used repeatedly, you can also use [*] + [*] or [#] + [#] to enter the function. "[*] + [#]" Is a shape that moves from left to right, so it can be easily recognized by the user when using it as a right-side moving function (or blank). Conversely, [#] + [*] can be easily recognized by the user when the left-to-right movement function (or deletion) is used.

This can be understood in terms of multidimensional cross control processing methods. If you enter "a + [*] + [#]" when you input ^ a = a + [*], The system recognizes ^ a as being entered but can not follow [#] (even if the [#] button is used as another control button) #] "Can be recognized as inputting the right shift function. It can be seen that the control line input is also similar.

In the case of Japanese, a two-dimensional control processing method was applied. In this case, the function can be implemented by alternately combining control buttons three times (or more). For example, you would type blank = [*] + [#] + [*], delete = [#] + [*] + [#]. In the case of the blank function, the shape formed when you press [*] + [#] + [*] reminds you of the arrowhead of the right arrow. In case of deleting, likewise, it is easy to remember because it can remind the arrowhead of the left arrow when you press [#] + [*] + [#]. The reason for this is the same as described above.

In summary, when the one-dimensional control processing method is applied, the control buttons are changed twice, and when the two-dimensional control processing method is applied, it is possible to input various functions by alternately combining the control buttons three times have. In other words, when an N-dimensional control processing method is applied to input alphabets and various symbols, various functions can be input by alternately combining N + 1 control buttons.

22. Chinese character conversion

Korean, Chinese There is 1: many correspondence between Chinese Pinyin and Chinese character. For example, Chinese characters corresponding to "courtesy" are 禮 意, 禮 儀, 銳意 ... As shown in FIG.

In the case of Chinese, the Chinese character corresponding to "beijing" is Beijing, the background, etc. (if the character is not attached). Therefore, you can repeatedly press the Hanja conversion button to select the next Chinese character (eg, Beijing (2nd), background (3rd)). For example, after entering Beijing with courtesy, pressing the Hanja conversion function once becomes Beijing, and once again, it becomes the background. Alternatively, you can select from the list.

In the case of Chinese, it is necessary to store in the index all the Chinese characters (for convenience, called "target Chinese character") to be input in order to input Chinese characters. Therefore, if the target Chinese character can be determined even during inputting Chinese characters, . For example, "beij ... Quot; is outside of " Beijing ", the user can provide " Beijing " to the user when inputting " beij &quot;. If there is only one "beijing" in the Pinyin index, the system will convert "beijing" to "Beijing" at the moment when all of "beijing" is recognized as definite, It can output.

In the case of Japanese, Hiragana and Katakana have a 1: 1 correspondence, and Hiragana or Katakana and Hanja have a 1: many relationship. Therefore, we explained that it is possible to input katagana conversion control after hiragana input (eg "ah / ah" control in Fig. 2-1) and convert it to katakana. In Figure 2-1, you can enter the transformation alphabet by the cross control processing method, and select the "O / A" control with the [0] button 2. Here, the Chinese characters corresponding to the specific hiragana or katakana can be selected by repeatedly pressing the [0] button. For example, if you specify "a / a" control after inputting a hiragana word (or alphabet), press [0] + [0] to convert it to katakana corresponding to the input hiragana, ] Button, it will be converted to the first Chinese character, and once again pressing the [0] button will convert it to the next Chinese character. Conversely, in katakana input mode, if you press [0] + [0] after inputting katagana, it is converted to the corresponding hiragana, and you can convert it to kanji by pressing the [0] button again.

23. Building a Simple Code Index

(Ie, automatically) a specific phrase (such as a word or a phrase) that is the entire associated simple code, syllable reference initial code, consonant association simple code, first vowel + consonant association simple code, There is a good property that simple code can be extracted from. Therefore, a simple code index (an index composed of a simple code and a simple code correspondence phrase) is automatically constructed for a word once input by a user using the full input method, and this can be utilized for a parallel input method. Simple code storage may be client side or server side in an environment similar to FIG. 5-5, or may be stored in both client side and server side.

Different types of simple codes (eg, full associative simple codes and syllable-based initial codes) may be generated for the same phrase. However, in general, it is convenient to use a specific type of simple code, and the user only needs to know the type of the simple code that is automatically generated and can use it when applying the parallel input method. As a result, the simple code index becomes richer as the user's input of characters increases.

To extract a syllable-based initials code from a specific phrase in a particular language, the syllable must be separated from the specific word. It is possible to separate syllables from specific words in a particular language according to the rules of syllable separation in a particular language. It is not difficult to automatically separate syllables from a particular word, because each language has its own rules of discretion and is not mentioned here in detail.

For example, in the case of "Zhongguo" in the Chinese Pinyin, syllables can be separated into "Zhong" and "guo" around the vowels "o" and "uo" It can be done much more easily. If you see an example of forward syllable separation from the front of a word, you can see that the consonant "n" next to "zho" is not the consonant of the next syllable, but you can see that it is the consonant belonging to the first syllable Similarly, "g" may be the consonant of the next syllable, but the next "g" shows that the first "g" is a consonant belonging to the first syllable and the second "g" . (One of the syllables in the pinyin can end in "~ ng") and can be scanned up to "zhongg" to isolate the first syllable "zhong". Next, the system can recognize that "u" is naturally a vowel of the second syllable, and the consecutive vowel "o" is also a vowel of the second syllable. (The English vowel "uo" can come out in succession in the pinyin), the system can separate the syllable of "zhongguo" into "zhong" and "guo" because there are no more alphabets after "o" Quot; zg " in the section, and that the syllable reference initial code of " zhongguo " is " 43 " (refer to FIG. 10-6). Of course, in the remaining languages, it is also possible to automatically separate syllables from specific words or phrases according to syllable separation rules of the language.

24. Interpretation of target phrase from a phrase without special sign (subscript)

In the case of beijing, if the vowel does not have a prosodic sign, it is said to correspond to "Beijing" or "backdrop". In this case, you can repeatedly press a specific button to select a target phrase, .

Likewise, in a language other than Chinese, when the basic vowel is input, it is necessary to input the vowel with subscripts without attaching the syndrome sign, or to provide the target vowel to the user by searching the index in response to repetitive pressing of the specific button, A list of corresponding phrases including a vowel suffixed to the user may be provided to the user to allow the user to select.

This is likely to be useful in complexly structured languages such as vocabulary, where there are many variants of the alphabet, However, the system should have the index of the word with the suffix attached to the basic alphabet. Likewise, building such an index can be built from the user's previous words. For example, if a user enters the word "^ + abc" (when the suffix '^' is superimposed on 'a') through character input, the system saves "^ + abc" abc "to the user if the user again presses a certain button after inputting" abc ", or if the user presses" abc "or" abc " Quot; abc &quot; such as &quot; ^ + abc &quot; If "abc" is the target phrase, the user will select 'abc' even if the user does not press a particular button or the system provides a list of related phrases. The point at which the list is provided may be the point at which the input of the word ends or may be any point in the middle of the input.

25. Parallel input method in which a part of a word (word or phrase) is input by a full input method and a part is input by a short input method

A technique of outputting a word matching the input contents according to the input of the word (full code input) from the index and allowing the user to select the word is widely used. For example, consider the Windows "auto-completion" function. When a full input (full code input) is used, the index (eg, index for concurrent input) is referenced to output a matching phrase among the phrases (words or phrases) stored in the index and to allow the user to select / Of course.

The input system of FIGS. 4-5 to 4-8 will be described below. For example, assume that the words "Thank you" and "Thank you" are stored in the index. If "10 * = high" is entered, the system will search for words that match "..." (ie, words beginning with "high", "thank you", "thank you", ...) Can be output. In an environment similar to a mobile phone, the contents generated by the input values are seen on the input line (upper side of the liquid crystal display in FIG. 13A), and candidate words (words or phrases) referring to the index are outputted . &Lt; / RTI &gt; The user can input and confirm the desired word by using the move button (navigation button) or the like. See Figure 13-1 for an example of a mobile phone liquid crystal display. 13-1 is an example of outputting a word matching the syllable formed according to the full input to the lower end of the liquid crystal.

If you enter "Thank you" here, you can also input the remaining syllables by typing up to "high" and inputting the rest of the syllables as a single-axis input (shortened input using syllable-based initial value simple code in the example). That is to say, &quot; high + high = 10 + + 5723 &quot;. Here, the first syllable is &quot; high &quot; and the remaining syllables can provide the user with a word corresponding to the initial value &quot;

However, about half of the Korean syllables are syllables with longitudinal (supporting) syllables, and the other half are syllables without ending. When "1 * 05723" is entered consecutively, the system becomes "bearish". In the case of "thank you", the system is treated as a normal free power until "bear = 1 * 057" It recognizes that a part of the value does not form a normal Korean note and treats the part that does not make up the rest of the syllable (for example, "c3 = 723") as a short input. This also belongs to the category of "concurrent input method (pool input precedence concatenation input method)" mentioned in the prior application, and the syllable recognized by the pulling force (for example, "bear") is interpreted as a full code naturally, The input value (eg, "723") is interpreted as simple code.

Here we can find and provide matching words in the index (eg, if the "bear" is stored in the index), including pre-formed syllables by the pool input, You can provide a word (eg "if" is stored in the index), or both. When outputting both words, a specific word (for example, a word containing a part interpreted as a full code first, or vice versa, or by priority of a word, or first for a particular group of words) Can be output to the upper side. Since various means are possible, it may be desirable for the user to be able to set this output order.

When the user prints out both of them, in response to "bear", when "bear" and "are printed" at the bottom of the liquid crystal, if the user selects "bear", the whole "bear" It will be replaced with "I will be", and if "I" is selected, it will be replaced with "I".

If only "Thank you" is stored in the index here, it is not possible to output "Thank you" in response to the continuous input of the input value "1 * 05723". Therefore, the system can simultaneously interpret "1 * 05723" with interpretable "bear" and "find" to refer to the index and output the matching word (to the user). When the syllable before "ㅅ" recognized as the start of the shortening is terminated by a consonant consonant, it is excluded from the preceding consonant (that is, "high") to interpret the "bear" With a single note between "hi" and "hi". It seems to be a bit complicated, but it is easily understood by those who have basic knowledge about Hangul processing. The same applies to the case where double consonants are used as the trailing consonants. Fig. 13-2 shows the word (s) of a specific group designated as having priority in outputting the word "(s)" - word (s) containing part interpreted as full code - word -). . . &Quot; is used to show candidate words output. Here, &quot; Yes &quot; is printed at the top of the group designated as belonging to the designated group.

If you want the user to be interpreted as "only", you can press "10 * = high" and then press the promised action (eg, no appointment for a certain amount of time or right arrow [>]) Etc.) and then by pressing &quot; 5723 &quot;, it is possible to interpret only the word &quot; C &quot; In this case, it is also possible to output a word (e.g., &quot; Thank you &quot;) corresponding to &quot; (For example, "Yes" is stored in the index), or both of them may be output. See Figure 13-3.

Here, by pushing the right arrow button (hereinafter referred to as &quot; [&quot;] button &quot;) as an operation button for deliberate syllable confirmation, it is possible to operate as syllable confirmation. In addition, the [>] button can also be used as a blank button, which can act as a blank input after syllable confirmation. When the [>] button is pressed after the "High" input, the syllable "High" is confirmed, and when the [>] button is pressed once again, it becomes "High" (High) + blank. That is, when "10 *> 5723" is inputted, the system interprets this as "っ っ ぃ っ ぃ" and can provide the corresponding word "thank you" to the user. Of course, if the system refers to the example index, it is obvious that the system can output "Thank you" even if only "10 *> 57 = high" is entered.

In such a parallel input method, processing including a syllable formed by the full input may be useful in case of providing a candidate word matching in the middle of a full input, and fixing the target word in the list of candidate words. In addition, when outputting a candidate word corresponding only to an input value processed by a single-axis input except for a pre-formed syllable (that is, an input value interpreted by a simple code), a frequently used suffix or a tone- It will be useful. For example, after inputting "Thank you", input the contents (with a predetermined number of entries), and enter "OK" (assuming it is stored in the index). Frequently used suffixes such as "..." can be placed in a separate group (eg suffix group) in the index and the words in the group can be output in priority when outputting candidate words in concurrent input. If you enter "Thank you", if both "Thank you" and "Yes" are stored in the index, "Thank you" and "Yes" may be displayed in the candidate word list.

One more example is that when inputting "Sejong ㅇ ㅇ = 70 ## 90 * 838", "Sejong" is processed as a full input and "38", which does not form a proper syllable, can be processed as a shortened input value. Similarly, if there is only "King Sejong" in the index, "King Sejong King" will be output. Conversely, if there is only "great king" in the index, only "great king" will be output. If both "King Sejong" and "Great King" are all output, it may be output, but it is preferable that only one output (with / without part processed by full input) is output by appointment. Also, in the case of "King Munmu", if you enter "Munmu" by full input, then if you input "ㄷ" in succession, it will become "ぬ ㅇ ㅇ". Therefore, if you want to enter "Mamu" as full input and input only "Mamu" as shortened input, after inputting "Mamu", input the syllable "Mamu" (eg right arrow [>] button , And then enter "38 = ㅇ ㅇ". 5 * 025 * 0 "if the" Great King "is stored in the index, even if the" Great King "has a lower priority than the other words of the index corresponding to" > 38 ", it is possible to output a" great king "in preference to other finer words (eg," Dawa ").

Further, even when a short syllable is input by short input such as &quot; ㅁ ㅁ ㅁ ㄷ c = 157 * 623 &quot;, and a certain syllable is input by full input, it is possible to process it as a corresponding "thank you". When "157 = ㄱ ㅅ ㅅ" is entered, the system interprets the simple code (syllable-based initial value simple code or syllable-based initial code in the example) "157" and searches for the word for which each syllable corresponds to "ㄱ". When "* 6" is input again, the system can recognize that the syllable "7 * 6 = wet" is formed with "157 * 6 = That is, if the system recognizes that the pre-input "15" is the short-cut input value, and if "23" is input again, it can process the short-term input value because an appropriate syllable is not formed. Also in this case, the system can interpret the syllables as "full code" and "syllabary", and interpret some syllables as short codes and provide the corresponding "thank you" to the user.

In Chinese, one syllable is made up of "Virgin Mary + Mica". In the case of Chinese Pinyin, "Mom" is a consonant of the Roman alphabet, and "Mica" is a Roman alphabet or "vowel + n" or "vowel + ng". In other words, one Chinese Chinese character (one syllable) represented by a pinyin is made up of "consonant + vowel" or "consonant + vowel + n" or "consonant + vowel + ng" of the Roman alphabet. There may be syllables that rarely begin with vowel "a", "e", or "o". We have already pointed out that only the Roman alphabet consonants, which can come to the end of the Pinyin syllable, are available as "n" or "ng". This can be regarded as a consonant of Korean. Only "n" or "ng" can be used as a consonant (end consonant of a syllable).

For example, "zhonghua", "minguo", "zhonghuaminguo" in the Pinyin index. . . , It is possible to input a pinyin by the full input up to "Chinese (zhonghua = 49 *** 7739 ## *, Figure 10-6 standard)", and only the "minguo" Quot; mg = 73 (refer to FIG. 10-6) &quot; is input as a single-axis input value (single-axis input using a syllable reference initial value simple code as a single-axis input value in the example). After inputting the corresponding Pinyin ("zhonghua = 49 *** 7739 ## *") from the input of "Chinese" and selecting the Chinese characters from among the Chinese characters, "mg = 73" After inputting "zhonghua = 49 *** 7739 ## *", "mg = 73" may be input consecutively. In the former case, "minguo" corresponding to "73 = mg", minge,. . . It is natural that only the words such as &quot; In the latter case, it is interpreted as "Chinese" for the input value "49 *** 7739 ## *" and "Chinese" corresponding to "73" corresponding to the shortened input value Also, For input values "49 *** 7739 ## * 73 = zhonghua + mg" For input up to "49 *** 7739 ## * 7", the last "7" , But when the last "3" is inputted, the system recognizes that the last input two input values "73" are short input values. This is the same as the Korean case described above. Therefore, the system can notify the input value &quot; 49 *** 7739 ## * 73 &quot; corresponding to the full input value &quot; 49 *** 7739 ## * &quot;Quot;, and &quot; Chinese nation &quot; See Figure 13-4.

On the contrary, "ZhuHua" is inputted by shortening input, "zh = 49", then "Chinese" is selected from the candidate word, and "7 # 773 ## ***" ("497 # 773 ## *** = zhminguo"), it is possible to output "Chinese nation" corresponding to "z__h__minguo". Similarly, for the input of "minguo", "73 ## ***" can be interpreted as "73 ## *** = mguo = m__guo" As soon as "73" is pressed, the system regards it as a short input and searches for and processes the word corresponding to "m__g__", but treats the following "## *** = uo" as a vowel of the second syllable . "Mg" Typing the next "uo" serves to compress the "nation" out of the candidate words corresponding to "m__g__".

When inputting "Chinese" as Chinese character with other means (all Chinese input means such as short input, full input, stroke input, etc.) and then inputting "Chinese" as "73" by short input, By interpreting "73" as a simple code and providing the word corresponding to "m__g__" to the user, a number of candidate words (eg "minguo", minge, ...) . However, if the "Chinese name" is stored, it is possible to interpret "Chinese + mg = Chinese +73" as "Chinese name", independent of the "national" being stored in the index. In this case, since "Chinese" has already been entered as one character, it is possible to output "My Country" in preference to other candidate words (eg, "Minge", ...) in response to the input value " can do.

When "zhong ..." is entered here, the system may be interpreted as "zho" + "n__g__" or "zhon" + "g__". However, in fact, there is no syllable consisting of "zho" or "zhon" in the Chinese Pinyin (ie, not in the Pinyin index, of course), so "zhong ..." is interpreted as "middle" referring to the index. If "zhong" is input, if it exists, it can be output as a candidate word according to a predetermined output order. It may be interpreted as "zhonk .." = "zho" + "n__k__" or "zhon" + "k__" for the input of "zhongg ... = 49 *** 7733" There will be. This is similar to the parallel input method in which the input values are simultaneously analyzed by the full code and the short input value (simple code).

In the above example, "syllable-based initial value simulated code" is used as a shortcut input value (simple code) for convenience. However, when "syllable-based initial code" is applied as the simplified input value, 3 to 11-10 can be applied.

26. Control method using character input method and long press method using long press

In general, one press of a button is used to select a target (eg, "alphabet," etc.) that encompasses English alphabets, symbols (special characters), functions and controls for various purposes in languages that do not have alphabets, Quot;). Here, by pressing a specific button once and "long press", it is possible to express a different object from the object to be represented by simply pressing once. Hereinafter, a long press of a particular button will be referred to as &quot; long press &quot; or &quot; long shot &quot;. In the following, not to say "long press" means to press the normal button, and when it is particularly long press, it is called "flat". Hereinafter, general contents will be explained in the case of English, and application examples will be described for each language, but it is obvious that the contents described in one language can be applied to other languages as well.

26.1 English (and Common)

26.1.1 Entering an alphabet using long press

By pressing and holding a certain number button at the moment, it is being used to enter that number. For example, if you press each number button once in Figure 1-1, you can enter the first letter of the alphabet assigned to that button (eg press [1] (For example, "B") by typing in a long press. It is not desirable to apply to the input of the frequently input alphabet as a factor of breaking the natural flow of input. Therefore, it is preferable to apply the input by the long press (the long stroke) to input the object which is not frequently used. In addition, it is desirable to allow the user to set a time to be recognized as long as possible according to the skill of each user.

In the present invention, it is possible to simplify the input rules of a specific input method, broaden the expression range, and further eliminate ambiguity by appropriately using the long press. For convenience, press and hold the [2] button for "2", followed by a tilde (~) for "2 ~". As mentioned above, when the conventional repetition selection method is applied, if [2] button is pressed three times in FIG. 1-1, it is determined whether or not "222" is "C", "AAA", "AB" or "BA" There is no ambiguity.

In FIG. 1-1, "A" means that the user presses the button 2 for a long time or presses the corresponding button once, "B" enters the "A" "A" followed by 2 presses). If the alphabet on the same button is input continuously, you can enter it without any ambiguity by starting with the long press on the second and subsequent alphabet input. For example, when inputting "DACB", "3 2 2 ~ 22 2 ~ 2" can be entered without ambiguity. "ACB" appears in succession on the same button but long press on "C" It can be identified without ambiguity by being mediated. This case can be input with a feeling similar to that of the existing iterative selection method. When the alphabet assigned to the same button is continuously input, ambiguity can be eliminated by using the long press. Of course, in the case of "DACB = 322 ~ 222 ~ 2", it is also possible to use the long press [2] button on the "A" input (ie, "2 ~").

The above example places any alphabet (eg, "A") of the alphabets assigned to a particular button (including both explicit and implicit assignments) as the representative alphabet, , &Quot; C &quot;), and the subsequent alphabet can be viewed as inputting the representative alphabet and the button assigned with the subsequent alphabet by a predetermined number of presses. A = 2 ~ "," B = A + 2 = "2 ~ 2", and "A = 2 ~" with the relationship of "A (representative alphabet) - B (2nd sequential alphabet) "C = B + 2 = A + 2 + 2 = 2 to 22". In addition, the fact that "A" can be input as a normal push (ie, a single touch) rather than a long press is because, unless the alphabet assigned to the same button is continuously input, This is because it is also possible to input a normal pressing (i.e., a single stroke) as in the selection method. Hereinafter, this is referred to as &quot; repeat selection method by long depression of an alphabet letter &quot; for convenience.

If you enter only two alphabets using one button, you can define one alphabet as a normal one-time press (ie, a single tap) and another alphabet as long press (ie, long) (Eg, "B = 1", "P = 1 ~" in Figure 10-1), however, three alphabets per button (explicitly assigned or implicitly assigned) If you define a first alphabetical press (eg, "A = 2", a second alphabet is a long press) (eg "B = 2 ~", "C = 22" is also ambiguous when entering the third alphabet, if you define it as "C = 2 to 2" (eg "C = 22") or long press and once press Can be interpreted as "AA" if it is defined as "C = 2 ~ 2" and can also be interpreted as "BA" 3 alphabets may optionally be set. In this case also the ambiguity of times that can occur more than usually simple repeat selection method is greatly reduced.

The advantage of iterative selection with long press is that it can be more useful when you are entering the number associated with each button as well as the alphabet assigned to each button, along with the point that you can enter it without ambiguity. For example, if an arbitrary "button x" has an association (explicitly assigned or implicitly assigned) a particular alphabet (s) "A1, A2, A3, ..." , And it is assumed that the specific symbol (s) "S1, S2, S3, ..." are associated. Here, it can be defined to input any alphabet associated with &quot; button x &quot; by long press. For example, the alphabet "A1" is designated as the representative alphabet, and the "button x" is entered by long depression. The input of "A1, A2, A3, N1, S1, S2, S3" associated with "button x" is shown in the form of a graph as shown in FIG. Quot; A1S1 = xx to xxxx &quot; or &quot; A1S1 = x to x to xxxx &quot; in Fig. 14-3. Here, if the language is not English as the first language, the English alphabets &quot; E1, E2, E3, ... &quot;

Further, in inputting the objects associated with "button x" (eg, "A1, A2, A3, N1, S1, S2, S3"), By applying the method, it is also possible to input the associated numbers and various symbols (special characters). However, when inputting objects related to the same button consecutively, ambiguity occurs. Therefore, after inputting a single object, the "delay of the appointed time" or the old molecule (for example, "Complement in Concurrent Input Method" It is necessary to prevent the occurrence of ambiguity by inputting the &quot;> &quot; button once). For example, if "A1, A2, A3, N1, S1, S2, S3" are associated with "button x" and "S1A1" is entered by the repeat selection method, enter "S1A1 = xxxxx> x" . This is a technique used to overcome ambiguity in applying the iterative selection method, but it is also possible to input a specific number and a symbol group to a specific button so that it can be inputted.

"X = A", "xx = B", "xxx = C" if the national language alphabet "A1, A2, A3" associated with (assigned) If the number of presses was exceeded (eg, "button x" is pressed 4 times), it is cyclically toggled as "xxxx = A" and "xxxxx = B" when pressed. Circular toggling is performed by repeatedly pressing the button that was pressed when an input error occurred during the application of the iterative selection method so that the user could input the target alphabet again. However, as suggested by the applicant, if the input of the delete button is made to delete the "latest input value" instead of the entire alphabet being generated, it is not necessary to apply the circular toggle method. "B" can be entered by pressing the delete button once even if "xx = B" is input but "xxx = C" is input and "xx" .

FIG. 14-4 shows a process of inputting an alphabet by pressing and holding a specific button for a short time. In Figure 14-4, lines A1, A2, A3, ... are input processes by the existing iterative selection method. B2 indicates that A1 is input by a short press of a certain button (e.g., button &quot; x &quot;) and then a long press of the same button is input. That is, "A1 = x" and "B2 = xx ~". Assuming that no alphabet input is defined by long depression of the button x and that only alphabetical letters A1 and B2 are inputted using the button x, it can be recognized without ambiguity. Even if the long press of the button x is defined as an alphabet (eg, the alphabet E1), this language restriction (language restriction that A1 and E2 do not occur at the same time) You can enter A1, B2, and E1 without ambiguity.

Also in Fig. 14-4, if the long press of &quot; button x &quot; is not defined as any alphabet input, A1, B2, and C3 can be recognized without ambiguity. In the case of A1, A2, and D3, there may be ambiguity as "A1 = x" and "A2 = xx = A1A1", but if there is no consecutive A1 in any language, Language restriction), A1, A2, and D3 can be input without ambiguity. The method as shown in Fig. 14-4 is referred to as &quot; repetitive selection method by long press after short depression &quot; for convenience. For example, in Figure 10-6, enter "i = #" and "u = # ~", and specify "## ~" for any collection (eg, " ^.. u" .. ") can be entered without ambiguity (" i "and" u "do not appear consecutively in Chinese Pinyin). Of course, since "i" does not appear consecutively, it is possible to input any other target with "##". This can be equally applied to other languages. Figure 14-4 may be used to input the subordinate alphabets (e.g., S1, S2, S3, ...) in the rows A1, A2, and A3.

26.1.2 How to handle controls with long press

Next, we show an example of applying to the control selection. In the following example, it is assumed that the control is input afterward. In the previous example, the expression "A" for both the [2] button and the battalion is intended to be an example that can only be entered with a feeling similar to the existing iterative selection method. However, a specific object can be expressed by pressing a specific button once, and another object can be expressed by long pressing of the same button. For example, a single press on a particular button (eg, a [1] button) can be used to select a particular target (eg any "alphabet x" - where "x" means any alphabet that is not actually "x" , And long presses can represent other specific objects (eg arbitrary "alphabet y"). That is, &quot; alphabet x = 1 &quot;, &quot; alphabet y = 1 ~ &quot; In this example, "alphabet x" and "alphabet y" are conceptual, so even if "A = 2 ~" or "A = 2" is defined in the "Repeat selection method by long press" &Quot; A &quot; due to a normal depression (i.e., single tone) corresponds to the alphabet x, and &quot; A &quot;

This can be equally applied to the selection of controls. For example, if a single press of a button (eg a [*] button as a control button) can represent a particular object (eg arbitrary "control a1"), Eg an arbitrary "control b1"). It is said that "a2 control", "a3 control", ... can be selected by pressing the control button repeatedly. The important thing here is that you can select "b1 control" by pressing and holding the control button, then select "b2 control", "b3 control", "b4 control", ... will be. There is no ambiguity. It is possible to refer to a case in which only the representative alphabet "A" is inputted by long press in the previous example, and the remaining letters are combined in the subsequent alphabet selection.

For convenience, an object input by a combination of a specific button (eg, [1] button) and "b1 control" is displayed as "B1" as follows.

"A1 = x + {a1 control} = 1 *", "A2 = x + a2 control} = 1 **", "A3 = x + a3 control} = 1 ***". . . ,

B1 = x + b1 control = 1 * ~, B2 = x + b2 control = 1 * ~ *, B3 = x + b3 control = 1 * ~ **. . .

Of course, it is also possible to apply one shot for each of the b1, b2 and b3 controls, two long strikes, and three long strikes. However, it is too obvious that it is not good to use long presses frequently. For example, in the case of B1, B2, B3, ..., the control button is pressed for a long time and then the normal pressing is called "long press and then repeated press" The control processing method by repetitive pressing ". The series A1, A2, ... means the control processing method presented, and the B1, B2, ... series means "the control processing method by repeated depressing after repeated depression". The above contents are shown in the graph format as shown in FIG. 14-1. The above example is extended by applying one long press to the first control selection as in the repetition selection method by long press of the representative alphabet. In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-2, various extensions (eg, C-series, D-series) are possible by mediating additional presses.

Of course, it is possible to express another object by applying a long press (eg "alphabet y") of a button other than the control button (eg, the [1] button in the example). Furthermore, the alphabet displayed on each button of the keypad (in FIGS. 1-1 to 3) can be selected by repeatedly selecting the long press (eg, "A = 2~", "B = 2~2" It is possible to input different alphabet letters of different groups by repeatedly pressing the control button or by pressing repeatedly after pressing the control button after selecting 3 alphabets which can be selected by the numeric button operation will be. That is, after inputting "A" in FIG. 1-1, it is possible to input the alphabet (meaning including symbol, number, native language, English alphabet etc.) of a specific group (eg, group 1) You can let the user enter the alphabet of another specific group (eg Group 2) by "long press and then repeated press". Similarly, you can enter the group 3 alphabet by pressing the "B" input and pressing the control button repeatedly, and you can enter the group 4 alphabet, another group, by long press and then repeatedly press. Figure 1-1 Keypad Buttons You can specify any rule (eg, "2 to 222") as well as the three alphabets displayed on the button, press the control button repeatedly, press and hold repeatedly, It is also possible to input an alphabet.

The control processing method by repeatedly depressing the depressed key after the depression of the depressed key depresses the control button in the case of the Korean language (Figs. 4-5 to 4-8) and the example of Japanese (Figs. 2-1 and 2-2) If it is required for input, it will be very useful for inputting intermittent numbers in sentences and inputting English alphabet (in languages other than English). In the following, application examples are briefly referred to for each language, and can be applied to other languages not mentioned.

26.2 Korean

In the example of FIGS. 4-5 to 4-8, the modified alphabets (eg, lattice / consonant and consonant consonants) are input by repeated depression of the button to which the basic consonant belongs (eg, "a = 1" 11 "," b = 111 "or" a = 1 "," b = 11 "," b = 111 "). That is, if the alphabet belonging to the same button is displayed continuously, the second and subsequent alphabets are input by long press. For example, if the continuous push of the button [1] in Fig. 4-5 is defined as &quot; b &quot;, it can be recognized as &quot; b &quot; instead of &quot; When inputting with "a", inputting with "long press", it can be recognized as "a + a". In other words, in the "country", the long press is used to input "a" of the second syllable. When you enter "Kukka", you will enter "ㅋ = 1 ~ 1" using long press on the "ㅋ" input of the second syllable. This can be applied either by inputting the modified alphabet by the control processing method or alternatively (at least one of the two, or both at the same time).

An example of inputting a part of an alphabet that is not a representative alphabet in a long press, can be input by long press of either a lattice or a light consonant. For example, if the lattice sound is defined as input by long depression, the consonant consonant (double consonant) can be input as a combination of basic consonants. Of course, as mentioned in the earlier application, there is ambiguity in the case of "ottogi", which means that "o c" ("c" stands for "o").

Similarly, a long press on the input of a consonant assigned to a vowel (eg, "he" assigned to the [0] button in FIGS. 4-5 and 4-6) can be applied. That is, "he = 0 ~". The applicant's suggestion that the applicant submitted the application at the earlier application may also be referred to as "= = 8 **" or "= = 0 **" or "ㅎ = 0 (only the special case presented in the previous application) It is presumed that the input efficiency is better than using the long press. The method of inputting a missing consonant (e.g., &quot; hehe &quot;) and inputting by a long press can be selectively applied.

4-5 to Fig. 4-13, it is possible to input a certain object by using a short push followed by a long press. In the drawings of Figs. 4-5 to Fig. 4-13, when a collection button (a button to which a collection element or an element collection is assigned) When a certain object is defined as an input, a series of objects associated with the specific button can be input by pressing and holding a specific button for a long time. The reason is as described above. (Semicolon) = ㅁ + ㅡ + ㅡ ", there is no Hangul character starting with the vowel" ㅡ "after the" any object (period in the example) + ㅡ + ㅡ "as you can define. If you define the long press of the [*] button (the button assigned to "ㅡ") as "- (hyphen)", you can define it by pressing repeatedly after long press on any other object . That is, "- (hyphen) = * ~" and "_ (underline) = * ~ *". This is also due to the property that a vowel in Korean does not appear at the beginning of a word. Using the property that the vowel element "." Does not appear at the beginning of Hangul, short press of the button ("0" button in the example) assigned "." In "word start status" , You can define the pressing of a vowel button as the input of a particular object (eg a special character associated with that vowel button) in the "word start state". For example, if the button with the "ㅡ" assigned in the word's start state (the [*] button in the example) is pressed, it can be set to "- (hyphen)". However, there is a disadvantage in that it can not input the vowel "ㅡ" as a letter when applying it. In this case, if the button assigned to the "ㅡ" button is pressed after the specific target ("-" in the example) is recognized instead of the consonant as the input of the button assigned "ㅡ" The special character &quot; _ &quot;).

Next, we show a case of applying "control processing method by repeated depression after long press". The representative Korean input system of the applicant is introduced at the homepage http://www.simplecode.net along with the simulator (introduction of gore, symbol input and bottleneck input technique) .

It is revealed that the application is inevitably executed due to a request from the related persons of the industry to provide numerical and English input technology without mode switching. (Note that the vendor that made this request did not adopt the applicant's Korean input technology, which is a pity.)

The general usage frequency for input is in the following order: "National language alphabet - various symbols (special character) - number - English alphabet". As shown in FIGS. 4-5, there is no control button that can be used to input numbers and English. Here, it is possible to input numbers in combination with the long press (ie, "* ~ = number control") of the number buttons and the [*] button. That is, "number 1 = 1 * ~". The [*] button is primarily used as a vowel button and a control button at the same time. Pressing the [*] button once will display "l", but pressing the [*] Number control ") can be expressed.

There are many ways to enter the English alphabet. For example, "A = 2 # ~", "B = 2 # ~ #" and "C = 2 # ~ #" can be defined. What is not recognized as "A" and vowel "ㅣ" for the input "2 # ~ #" and can be recognized as "B" is the syllable nature (a kind of Korean restriction) that starts with the vowel "ㅣ" . If you use the long press and repeated presses of the [#] button for other purposes, the English alphabet is regarded as the next letter of the number, and "A = 2 * ~ *" or "A = 2 * ~ # B = 2 * ~ ** "or" B = 2 * ~ ## "as the" method ").

One more example of the control processing by long depression is presented. In Figures 4-5 to 4-8, it is assumed that the vowel "-" is inputting "ㅜ" or "ㅠ" by repetitive pressing of the assigned button (ie, "= *", " "," ㅠ = *** "), it takes up to 3 digits (that is, the maximum possible number of repetitions) for the alphabet input to continuously press the [*] button. In this case, the shuffle control can be selected by pressing the "maximum possible number of iterations + 1" times (ie, four [*] buttons). "That is," ㅋ = 1 **** ". In this case, in order to alleviate the burden of pressing four consecutive times, it can be defined as "ω = a + {shake control} = 1 * ~" with "shake control = * ~". This can be applied to the consonant consonants and the consonant consonants considered to be modified alphabets. Also, it can be applied to all cases where the shuffle control is selected by the iterative selection method in the control processing method, and the deformation alphabet input by the long depression and the deformation alphabet input by the conventional repression depression are optional Both of course). In this case, use the other buttons (eg [#] button) to input numbers.

26.3 Japanese

As shown in the Japanese example of Figs. 2-1 and 2-2, there are a plurality of following alphabets, which may be useful for inputting the subsequent alphabet by the iterative selection method. That is, "a = 1" or "a = 1 to", "i = 1 to 1", "u = 1 to 11", " will be. As mentioned above, if the alphabet assigned to the same button appears consecutively, only the second letter of the alphabet assigned to the same button should be entered using a long press (ie, "1 ~"), otherwise simply enter Even if entered by pressing once, it is input without ambiguity. However, in the Japanese example shown in Figs. 2-1 and 2-2, it has already been shown that the following control processing method can be applied without ambiguity to a small number of input strokes, which can be applied together with the repetitive selection method by the long press have.

* Representative example of inputting a modified alphabet by using long press in the example of inputting the succeeding alphabet by control processing method without applying repetition selection method by long press of representative alphabet. When inputting the subsequent alphabet by the control processing method in FIG. 2-2, when inputting the modified alphabets (e.g., &quot; a &quot;, &quot; b &quot;) of the representative alphabet Is somewhat large and unnatural. In this case, the long press of the corresponding button (the [6] button in Figure 2-2) can be defined as a variant alphabet of the representative alphabet (eg, "B"). You can define the remaining variant alphabet "ぱ = ば + the desired control button (eg [*] button) = 6 ~ *".

If you do not enter the modified alphabet by using the long press of the button assigned to the alphabet, you can apply the repeat selection method by the long press of the representative alphabet and the subsequent alphabet input by the control processing method together. The input of the variant alphabets (eg "b", "b") can be entered by pressing and holding the control button (eg the [*] button) and "ƒ" . In other words, "= (arbitrary variant alphabet) = can be defined as + * ~ = 6 * ~", and "ƒ (arbitrary other variant alphabet) = can be defined as * * ~ * = 6 * ~ *". If there are a large number of variant alphabets of "a", it can be input without ambiguity by using long press and then repeated press as "6 * ~ **", "6 * ~ ***", ... Of course. Just as "*" and "* ~" can represent different objects, "**" and "* ~ *" can represent different objects (arbitrary control here).

What is important here is that not only can arbitrary control be selected by long depression, but also by depressing a button (eg, a control button) used for long depression after long depression, Of the control).

Likewise, in the case of inputting numerals and English alphabets, what is described in Korean can be applied. For example, "A = 2 # ~ #" and "B = 2 # ~ ##" can be defined as "number 2 = 2 # ~". . . Can be defined as follows.

26.4 Chinese

The Chinese pinyille words can be input without ambiguity (or almost no ambiguity) on the keypad of Figs. 10-1 to 10-6 and the like. However, if "bb = 11" is input to shorten the word composed of "b__b__" (underlined part is composed of a vowel composed of vowels), if the language restriction that "bb" 11 = p &quot;. In this case, as described above, after inputting "b = 1", the input value "1" is intentionally determined as "b" by a predetermined time delay or a specific operation (eg, pressing the [>] button) = 1 ". It is also a problem of ambiguity that occurs when the alphabet assigned to the same button is input continuously. In this case, it is also possible to solve the problem by applying the control processing method by long press of the representative alphabet ([1] button's representative alphabet "b" to "b = 1 ~"). For example, "bb = 1 ~ 1 ~" or "bb = 11 ~" can be applied by applying a long press to the alphabet input after the second when the alphabet assigned to the same button comes out consecutively.

Next we see entering numbers and symbols. 10-6. The input of English in Chinese is not mentioned because inputting English alphabet and converting it into Chinese character is not necessary. Quot; number 1 = 1 * ~ &quot;, based on FIG. 10-6. In Figure 10-6, pressing the [*] button once recognizes it as "a", but long press ("* ~") can represent a different object ("number control" in the example). In Fig. 10-6, it is preferable to apply a control processing method using a long press and a repeated press of the [#] button to various kinds of symbol input. For example, you can associate dot (.), Comma (,), colon (:), semi-colon (; = 2 # ~ # "," colon (:) = 2 # ~ ## "and" semi-colon (;) = 2 # ~ ### ". The reason why "2 # ~ #" is not recognized as "dot (.) + I" and can be recognized as "comma (,)" is because Chinese Chinese Pinyin uses a Chinese restriction that does not start with "i". Similarly, "2 # ~ ##" can be recognized as "colon (:)" instead of "dot (.) + I + i" or "comma (,) + i". If you want to enter "dot (.) + I", as mentioned, enter "2 # ~" and after "dot (.)" Button), enter "# = i" after confirming "dot (.)".

The reason why the [*] button is not used for inputting the symbol (s) of a specific group in FIG. 10-6 is that since there are rarely Pinyin starting with "a", "e" Repeated depression "may cause ambiguity. Because there is only one number in the case of a number, you can press and hold the [*] button. In Figures 10-1 to 10-5, there is no Pinyin that starts with "i" and "u" assigned to the [*] button and the [#] button, so use the [*] button and the [#] It is always possible to input numbers, symbols, etc. by means of control processing using push-and-hold repeatedly.

It is obvious that the above description can be similarly applied to other keypads as well as the keypads of Figs. 10-1 to 10-6.

26.5 Languages with romanization

In European languages using the Roman alphabet, there are many variant alphabets with subscripts in the base alphabet. It can be applied to input of a modified alphabet and special character input by applying various long presses described above.

27. Apparatus and method for inputting Korean syllables (= alphabetic characters) by non-breaking drag on screen keyboard

27.1 Conventional input method using drag technique

Recently, a convergence-type device such as an Ultra Mobile PC (UMPC) has been introduced, and a plurality of technologies for inputting characters through a drag technique on a keyboard displayed on a liquid crystal screen have been introduced. A representative technique is "MoAki". Typical concept is to touch (or click with a mouse) a specific consonant (eg, "ㅇ") on the liquid crystal keyboard like the one shown in Figure 15-1, Left / right "side to input" O / U / U / U "respectively. When only one consonant is touched and released (ie, without dragging), the [-...], [.], And [] buttons for populating the vowel pop up around the touched consonant as shown in Figure 15-2 It allows you to enter additional vowels. Here, " drag " is also referred to as " gesture ", meaning dragging without touching or clicking on the touch or click. The point at which the drag ends is the moment when the pen touch is released or the mouse click is released after the drag. The concept of drag is easy to see when a program supporting mouse gesture is used once, and the term "drag" is used in the present invention.

Moakey has enjoyed some popularity despite the limitations that it only works on the touchscreen, due to the characteristics that other input devices have not provided in the past. There are some disadvantages, such as not being able to enter emoticons (eg "ㅜ", "ㅠㅠ", "ㅡ. ㅡ", ...) expressing emotion as a Korean vowel, and 19 consonant buttons on LCD In the case of a PDA, about half of the screen is used as a keyboard, and the same input technique can not be used for button input.

In addition, there is also a content which allows the user to input two buttons which start and end a drag on a specific keyboard by the drag. For example, when you start and drag a pen (or click a mouse) on the [a] button and drag it to the [l] button and release it, This does not necessarily apply to "primitive + neutral", but applies in all cases. In this case, however, it is always applied to only two buttons: point (start button) to point (end button). Implementation is also very simple, so you can do it by pressing "drag start button" where dragging starts and "drag end button" dragged. Detecting the start of a drag can be accomplished by detecting that the first touched position (coordinate) is moving when the pen touch (or mouse click) starts and the pen does not fall (or the mouse click has not dropped). This is like detecting a " mouse gesture " that is widely used on a PC, and since it is widely known technology that many individual users are distributing their mouse gesture programs, I never do that.

27.2 Composition of syllable input technique by continuous drag proposed in the present invention

In the present invention, a technique for inputting one Korean syllable (alphabet-combining letter) by one continuous dragging is presented. These techniques were confirmed directly by those that were not presented in the above "Moakki" products.

The contents of the present invention can be applied to all cases of inputting syllables by dragging consonants and vowel buttons on a displayed key board (keypad, keyboard, or any other modified form) on a liquid crystal display. For the sake of convenience, explanations will be made on the basis of the keyboard and input method presented by the applicant. Korean keyboards of all forms consist of consonant buttons with consonants and vowel buttons with vowels. Typically, FIG. 15-3 is a cell phone keyboard of Samsung Electronics, and FIG. 15-4 is a cell phone keyboard of LG Electronics. Each input method is so well known that it is not explained. However, in all input methods, the consonants placed on each consonant button (at least the first consonant arranged when a plurality of consonants are arranged) are inputted by pushing the corresponding button once, However, the vowel buttons are composed of a small number (normally three to four buttons), and the remaining vowels are input by combining the vowel buttons in a predetermined method provided by the corresponding input method.

What is most important in the present invention is that when a Korean keyboard is composed in any input method, the consonant buttons are grouped into groups and the group buttons are grouped together. Even if you do not do that, it does not matter how you apply the input method, but anyone does it for your "button location". For example, no one mixes consonant and vowel buttons together. This is also true of Korean keyboards on keyboards. One of the keyboards proposed by the applicant (the description of the applicant and the description of the invention in detail in chapter 4, particularly the contents in 4.1.1 and 4.11, hereinafter referred to as "applicant's Korean input method") is shown in Figure 15-5 a) or 15-5 (b), and consonant buttons are grouped together and grouped together. Figures 15-5 (a) and 15-5 (b) are keypads that are compatible with each other. The input method described with reference to FIG. 15-5 (a) may be applied to FIG. 15-5 (b), and conversely, the input method presented with reference to FIG. 15-5 (b) 15-5 (a). In the conventional keypad Korean input method and the Korean input method presented by the applicant in Figures 15-3 and 15-4, the number of the vowel buttons is relatively smaller than the number of consonant buttons.

The Korean syllable is about half of the letters consisting of "prepositive + neutral", and about half of the letters consisting of "prepositive + neutral + trait". This means that the letters consist of "consonant + vowel" about half, and letters composed of "consonant + vowel + consonant" are about half.

FIG. 15-6 is a drawing to which FIG. 15-5 (a) is applied to a "numeric keypad" of a PC, and shows the same keypad. In the following description, it is assumed that there are only twelve character buttons (nine [9] consonant buttons, [-], [a], [ , 15-5 (a) (that is, based on the applicant's Korean input method presented in the drawing 15-5 (a) and related description). On the basis of the drawing 15-6, "a" + [a] + [-] is pressed when "high" is inputted according to the input method proposed by the applicant in "applicant's Korean input method". On programming, you may want to make certain characters (eg "A") appear on the screen when you press a specific button (for example, the [a] button) It is possible. Most screen input devices (eg, screen keyboards) implement the input of characters on the screen as soon as you press and release the button (ie, the moment you press and release, not the moment you press the pen, or the moment you click, Yes, a built-in screen keyboard on MS Windows) and there is no difference in technology. Depending on the manufacturer of the mobile phone, there are some products that display the letter when the button is pressed. Some products do not display the letters while the button is pressed, but some products display the letters at the same time.

It will be appreciated that the present invention will be mainly described based on the applicant's Korean input method presented by the present applicant and may be applied to other input methods in the same or similar manner. Hereinafter, the description based on the applicant &apos; s Korean input method is a proven technology implemented by a program, and will be disclosed as a text input device program programmed through the homepage http://www.simplecode.net after the patent application of the present invention to be. 15-6 is a UI (User Interface) applied to the character input device to be displayed.

Referring to FIG. 15-6, if the user starts the [a] button and then drags the [a] button to the [s] button in order to write the character "high", the button , The dragged button) will be a number of buttons. The system recognizes the dragged buttons by changing the position of the pen or mouse cursor in a short period of time (eg, 1/100 second) until the button on the screen is dropped from the moment the pen is touched Check which button is located.

In order to facilitate the description of the present invention, "dragging" is referred to as "dragging" or "dragging operation" as shown in FIG. 15-7, and the button passing through the dragging operation is called "dragged button" . In FIG. 15-7, the "Drag start button" is the [A] button where the drag operation is started. The "Drag end button" and the "Dragged button" Button, the [] button, the [] button, the [] button, the [] button, and the [-] button. When the button (s) dragged by the drag operation of FIG. 15-7 is marked, it is expressed as [a → a → a → a → a → a → a → a]. For convenience of explanation, when the drag is displayed as shown in FIG. 15-7, the drag start button is indicated by a circle (●), and the end point of the drag is indicated by an arrowhead.

It is easy to input adjacent buttons by dragging. However, in the case of a plurality of dragged buttons, the problem of determining which button the user intends to input is problematic. In Figure 15-6, when you start dragging in [a] to enter "that", you will go to the [ㅡ] button via the [d] button and the [g] button. It is intended to provide a highly efficient method for determining which button is the button the user intended to input, and this is the essence of the present invention.

To go from a group of consonant buttons ([a] button to a [i] button) to a group of relatively small number of vowel buttons, a plurality of consonant buttons are displayed. When the user intends to press any dragged consonant button I never do that. That is, when starting from the consonant button and dragging to the collection button in FIG. 15-7, it is determined that the consonant button (drag start button) at the beginning of dragging is at least the button the user intends to input, In the example, the [b] button, the [k] button, the [o] button, and the [i] button) do not form a valid chord with the drag start button. This is due to the property that the consonants do not appear consecutively in the beginning of the Korean syllable (Jamo combining letter). Next, the first collection button (the [a] button in the example) is regarded as a collection button intended for input by the user, and can be combined with the [a] button, The [ㅡ] button is also considered a valid button. If only the button recognized by the system with the valid button is displayed except for the button ignored by the system during the dragged button [→ → → → → →] → [→ → → → →]. Depending on the user, dragging can be done as shown in Figure 15-8 (a), such as [a → b → → b → → b → a → a →]. In this case as well, "b → ㅁ → β → b" is invalidated, so the button recognized as valid becomes the same as [a → a → →]. Even if the user dragged as shown in Figure 15-8 (b), the result is the same.

If you drag the mouse to the [b] button without terminating the above drag operation (ie, by pressing the []] button or releasing the mouse click, pressing the [b] , And also through a number of consonant buttons. For example, as shown in Fig. 15-9, the total dragged button becomes [a → b → ㅁ → o → a → a → a → ㅇ → ㅁ → b]. In this case too, there are a number of consonant buttons (eg, [b] button, [ㅁ] button, [ㅇ] button, []] Button) to be ignored without judging that the user wanted to input all (i.e., a valid button). Because the Korean syllable is composed of "consonant + vowel + consonant", it is reasonable to judge that it wanted to enter only the final consonant ("b" in the example). If only the valid buttons of the dragged buttons are shown, the syllable (letter-joining character) that is recognized as (or is recognized as) the result of dragging becomes "gon".

As shown in the above example, the system firstly recognizes the first drag start button and the last drag end button as valid buttons, and recognizes only the buttons necessary for forming the Korean syllable of the middle button based on the predetermined input method as valid buttons And the remaining dragged buttons are ignored, thereby inputting the Korean syllable by one dragging is the key of the present invention.

Next, it is shown that the user can input by pressing the same vowel button twice by pressing the button. If you want to enter "Yes", you should input "Yes" by dragging from "ㅇ → ㅡ → a" to "Right" and then clicking [A] button. If you have two different methods, drag to [ㅇ → ㅡ → a] and drag to the [ㅡ] button, which is a collection that can not be combined with the vowel "ㅜ", without dragging and dragging again with the [a] button . When the dragged button is displayed, [ㅇ → ㅡ → a → ㅡ → a] becomes. Likewise, it ignores [ㅡ] button which is a collection button which can not be combined after "ㅜ" and recognizes only the next [a] button as a valid button. The disadvantage of this method is that the current vowel's input is used as a kind of emoticons (eg "ㅜ"), which can not be expressed. For example, if you do not apply the above, you can type "ㅜ" at a time by dragging [ㅡ → a → ㅡ → a] to enter "ㅜ". In the product (http://www.simplecode.net), which is to be implemented and distributed as a program, it was decided to input "ㅜ" as [ㅡ → ぁ → ㅡ → a]. Another way is to drag from the [a] button to a random consonant button (the [i] button in the example), and then drag it back to the [a] button, without dragging it after [o → ㅡ → a]. In other words, you can input "yes" by dragging from [ㅇ → ㅡ → → → → → a]. In order to enter the last name, the dragging must be ended at the consonant button ([i] button in the example). Since dragging is continued and dragged again to the vowel button ([a] button in the example), the last [a] . In other words, the [i] button that is not valid as a contour input only serves to indicate that the [a] button that was dragged subsequently is input "once more". Of course, it is natural that you can finish dragging from [ㅇ → ㅡ → a] and touch (or click) the [a] button once after inputting "right". If [ㅇ → ㅡ → → → → → → → → → → → ㅁ] is dragged, the system recognizes and processes it as "윰" (Figure 15-10. Is ignored)

The above contents are also possible when the state is entered with only the "preliminary", the state where the "preliminary + neutral" is inputted, or the state where the "preliminary + neutral + end" is inputted and the drag is further started. 15-5 (a) and 15-6, some examples of input are as follows. For the sake of convenience, it is indicated that the button to be invalidated (ignored) may not be displayed. When you input "Wing", you can input "Wing" as a single drag operation by dragging from [ㅇ → ㅅ → ㅡ → ゃ → ㅣ → → → ㅇ]. [O] button The following [g] button is ignored because it does not form a valid primitive, and the [i] button is also ignored because "ㅇ" is an end. This is because if "g" was the desired title of the user, it would have started dragging from "g", and if "g" was gong, it would have been dragged from "g". In Figure 15-6, you can drag [o] button from [o] button to [o → ㅡ → ...] instead of going through [o] button, but this is an example presented to show when the [o] button is ignored. If it is dragged from [ㅇ → ㅅ → ㅡ → ゃ → ㅣ → → → → →]] as shown in the drawing 15-11, the "above" + " Even if many other consonant buttons are dragged after the [ㅇ] button (eg [→ → ㅅ → → ㅁ → ㅡ → ...]), only the first [ㅇ] [ㅡ] button Previously, other consonant buttons are ignored. Likewise, when dragged like [... → → → ㅇ →]], only the last []] button is regarded as valid end, and the remaining consonant buttons are ignored. In other words, in the initial stage, only the buttons having the start button in the predetermined input method including the drag start button are regarded as valid buttons, and similarly, only the buttons having the ending in the predetermined input method including the drag end button are regarded as valid buttons will be.

Another input example is to input "V + +" ('V' to 'V' '), drag it to [ß → (ㅁ → ㅇ) → ㅡ → a] → ㅣ] and input "붜", then drag it to [ㅣ → (→ → ㅇ → ㅁ →)] to enter "+ +" " . See Figure 15-12 (a). "(ㅁ → ㅇ)" and "(→ → ㅇ → ㅁ)" are ignored (invalidated). Another thing is to input "Ve" with [→ → ㅡ → → → → → → → ㅣ → → → ㅣ] and input "Ve + ㄺ" ("ㄺ" do. See Figure 15-12 (b). The two [i] buttons entered when entering "v" are entered to separate consecutive entries of the continuous input [l] button of each [a] button. When the dragged button starts from the consonant button and goes to the collection button via the consonant button, the middle consonant button is invalidated. However, when the dragging starts from the consonant button and ends at the consonant button, the consonant button for starting the dragging and the consonant button It is a matter of course. Therefore, the trailing "ㄺ" is input by dragging [d → a]. Of course, input "V +" ("V" to "V") at once and press the [] button at the same time with [→ → ㅡ → → → → → → → ㅣ → ㅣ →]] You can also enter "('v' 'ㄺ' urn). All of the above contents have been implemented and verified by the program, and they will be disclosed as products through http://www.simplecode.net after the application of the present invention.

The following is the content to be implemented (programmed). Furthermore, if we define dragging to [a → b] and input "ㅋ" on the basis of Figure 15-6, [a → → → → → → →], then dragging "a → b" The system treats the initials "ㅋ" as input (ie, considering the initial [a] and [b] buttons as valid inputs) and the intermediate [ㅁ] and [ㅇ] buttons are ignored, It is possible to recognize and process the input of " KEY ". If you define dragging from the [a] button to the left of the button to the left as a "blah" input, dragging from [a] to [out] → as shown in Figure 15-13 (a) Can be treated as being. If you drag it to [a → sentence / num] and enter "ㄲ", if you drag it from [a → sentence / Num → a → a → a → →] The system can recognize and process "ke" input.

Here are some examples based on the typography input technique. Based on the letter input device drawing 15-4 employed by LG Electronics, start dragging from the [a] button, move the [Overwrite] button to another consonant button, and press the [ㅗ] button, [a] Button, and dragging is done on the [b] button, "continuous + drag" ("drag") is input by continuous dragging. The drawings illustrating the dragging process are shown in FIG. 15-14. When the dragged button is displayed, [a → ƒ → ˙ → ← → ㅅ → → → ㅁ → ㅗ → a → 外 → → → ㅇ → ㅁ → ㄱ → a ]. If the button and the button are separated as shown in FIG. 15-4, the user can directly go to the button located at the diagonal position. However, if the user does not have a space between the buttons, -14. Usually the screen keyboard is not spaced apart on the liquid crystal. In the process of dragging to enter "ㅋ", the []] button and the [ㅅ] button are passed. However, since the two consonants do not appear consecutively in the Korean syllable in the Korean syllable, It is. Likewise, in order to drag from the [ㅣ] button to the [a] button, only the [a] button, which is a consonant button that has been dragged after the [o] button, the [ㅁ] button and the [ (That is, ignoring the [o] button, the [k] button, and the [b] button). For example, if you start with the [a] button and then drag the [ㅗ] button and drag the [ㅁ] button, you can treat it as a "bear" input. However, when the dragged button becomes [a → ƒ → → → ㅗ → ㅁ → ㅇ → ㅅ → overwriting → ㅅ → → → ㅁ] as shown in Figure 15-15, the button dragged after the vowel "ㅗ" Write "button to input" bridge "(" bridge "to" bridge "). If one of the "ㅁ", "ㅇ", or "ㅅ" is dragged after the vowel "ㅗ", the [ㅗ] button is followed by the ㅁ button, the] button, It must have been terminated. On the keyboard of Samsung Electronics, start dragging from the [g] button and go through the [l] button [ㆍ] button, and when the drag operation is completed with the [o] button, "Up" is input. (See Figures 15-16)

Next, I will give an example based on the case where the Korean 2-character keyboard used on the PC is present on the liquid crystal. For convenience, it is assumed that there are only consonant buttons and vowel buttons in which Korean characters are displayed in Figs. 15-17, and the case where the position of a key is changed for efficiency is also included. If the dragged button in Drawing 15-17 is [a → a → a → a → a → a → a → a → a → a → a → a → a → a → a], then in this case, You can ignore the [g] and [he] buttons after the [] button. Next, the first dragged collection button, [ㅗ], is regarded as a valid button, so you can also ignore [ㅓ] and [a] buttons that can not be combined with the [ㅗ] The [ㅣ] button can be regarded as a valid button. Next, ignore the [a], [ㅓ], and [ㅗ] buttons that can not be combined with "ㅚ" and ignore the last three consonant buttons [heal] and [ Only the [o] button can be regarded as a valid button. The result is entered as " hi ". The above result is based on the input method in the two-polar keyboard.

The time when the system recognizes (or recognizes) the result of the recognition (or recognition) is output to the user (displayed on the liquid crystal or voiced) by the system as a valid button among the buttons dragged in the middle of the drag, It may be outputted at the time when all of them are finished. There is no notable difference between the two, rather it is somewhat confusing that the text is printed in the middle of dragging. Since a single unit recognized by the user is a completed consonant, vowel, or syllable (letter-joining letter), one syllable is input by one drag, It is not too bad to output one syllable).

In the above procedure, it was shown to input Korean syllables by one drag. In particular, under the input method of the applicant, most Korean syllables can be input by dragging once. It will be apparent that various modifications are possible within the scope of the present invention. As an example, it can be applied to a case in which a button is popped up after touching (or clicking) one button as in the case of the keypad of FIG. 15-2. Of course, Moakki does not support the dragging of the syllable unit described above at all. In addition, although the Mojo input technology can be applied only to the touch screen type in terms of the technology, the same Korean character input technique can be used by the touching method or the touching method on the touch screen by the technique proposed in the present invention There is an advantage.

The above-described drag technique can be applied to both a pen touch on a keyboard on a touch screen and a mouse click on a keyboard on the screen. Since the touch screen and screen keyboard technologies are already common technologies, the hardware structure is not described. Even if a hardware configuration technique that is slightly more precise than the present touch screen hardware configuration comes out, it is too obvious that there is no problem in applying the idea of the present invention, and it is impossible to describe a device configuration for a touch screen or screen keyboard, It is not meaningful.

The contents are summarized in claim form as follows.

In a keyboard having a plurality of buttons on a screen (liquid crystal), Korean characters (consonants, vowels, conjugated letters, words or words) are displayed by a drag operation that is dragged in a pen touch (or mouse click) A method for inputting a phrase,

(a) detecting the start of the drag operation and recognizing the dragged start button

(b) recognizing the buttons dragged by the drag operation, and recognizing only a consonant button capable of forming a Korean initial character including the drag start button among the dragged buttons as a valid input step

(Korean) letter input by continuous drag on a liquid crystal (screen) keyboard

In addition to the following:

(c) recognizing that the vowel button is dragged by the drag operation, the vowel button (or vowel buttons)

(d) recognizing a vowel formed by the predetermined input method including the first dragged vowel button,

A method of inputting Korean characters by continuous drag on a screen (liquid crystal) key board

Or, as shown in the drag example on a two-piece keyboard on the screen,

(c) recognizing that the collection button (or collection buttons) is dragged by the drag operation

(d) recognizing only the vowel buttons capable of forming Korean neutral by the predetermined input method among the dragged vowel buttons including the first vowel button as a valid vowel button

A method of inputting Korean characters by continuous drag on a screen (liquid crystal) key board

In addition to

(e) recognizing that the drag operation is terminated

(f) processing the consonant button having been dragged as a valid input

A method of inputting Korean characters by continuous drag on a screen (liquid crystal) key board

. &Lt; / RTI &gt;

The main idea of the present invention is that the drag start button and the drag end button are always valid buttons among the dragged button (s), and only the buttons that can effectively combine with the drag start button are valid It is essential to judge only the buttons which can be effectively combined with the drag end button by using the valid button. Of course, the button determined as a valid button is processed by the predetermined character input method, and the system recognizes the input character and can output it to the user. In addition, among the dragged buttons except for the drag start button and the drag end button (for convenience, " dragged button without starting end "), buttons which can not form a Korean syllable (alphabet combining letter) are invalidated (ignored) And judging only valid buttons as valid buttons and processing them.

therefore,

In a keyboard having a plurality of buttons on a screen (liquid crystal), Korean characters (consonants, vowels, conjugated letters, words or words) are displayed by a drag operation that is dragged in a pen touch (or mouse click) A method for inputting a phrase,

(a) recognizes a button (s) dragged by the drag operation,

(b) determining that the drag start button and the drag end button among the dragged buttons are valid buttons for inputting the character,

(c) judging a button that can be combined with the drag start button as a valid button according to a predetermined Korean character input method

A method of inputting Korean characters by continuous drag on a liquid crystal (screen) keyboard

As shown in Fig. 15-1 to Fig. 15-17, except for the buttons that are invalidated (ignored) among the dragged buttons, it has been found that the valid buttons are determined

The determination of a valid button in (c) is based on the Korean alphabet join rule for Korean syllable formation

Method for inputting Korean characters by continuous drag on a liquid crystal (screen) keyboard

. &Lt; / RTI &gt; Of course, Korean characters recognized as a result can be output (displayed on the screen or outputted as voice).

28. Korean syllable input device and its method by dragging uncut on screen keyboard 2

In the present invention, an additional technique is presented on the extension line of &quot; Korean syllable input device and method of dragging by non-breaking drag on screen keyboard &quot;

28.1 Circle of input method using drag technique

A long time ago, "Opera (http://www.opera.com)" in the web browser, "mouse gestures," the function was provided. Today, Internet Explorer (IE), which is built in MS Windows by using various utility programs, has become a universal technology that many people use. Figures 16-1 (a) and 16-1 (b) show the operation of the "mouse gesture" function in the latest version (v9.6) Opera browser. If you right-click and drag to the right in the drawing 16-1 (a), the next page is shown. If you right-click and drag left in the drawing 16-1 (b), the previous page is displayed. The button for moving to the "previous page" is indicated by the "left arrow button" in any web browser, and the button for moving to the "next page" is indicated by the "right arrow button".

Next, FIG. 16-2 (a) is an initial screen of the Pocket PC 2000 emulator included in Embeded Visual C ++ 3.0 distributed free from Microsoft, and FIG. 16-2 (b) , Is the screen keyboard screen that appears. 16-2 (c) is an option setting screen of the screen keyboard input device. As shown in FIG. 16-2 (c), at this time, input was provided by four-directional dragging in up, down, left and right directions. 16-2 (c) is as shown in Fig. 16-3. When the button is clicked (or touched) once, the alphabet "X" which is the basic character marked on the button is inputted. Dragging to the right to enter the space, dragging to the right will enter the Enter function, and dragging to the left will input the backspace function.

Figure 16-4 shows an example of application in Japanese. When the touch is once touched, the basic character "a" is input, and the remaining letters "i", "う", "e", "お" . There are many other kinds of drag input techniques.

28.2 Technical Problems to be Solved by the Present Invention

Currently the most popular drag input technology, Samsung Electronics' "Moakki" input device supports drag input for the four vowels "ㅗ", "ゃ", "ㅜ", and "ㅓ". The four vowels of "ㅗ", "ゃ", "ㅜ", and "ㅓ" have about 49.16% frequency of use in Korean, meaning that about half of vowels can be input by dragging .

However, since the vowels "ㅡ" and "ㅣ" can not be input by dragging in the conventional method, the consistency of the input method, uniformity Is not maintained. In addition, it is impossible at all to enter a Korean syllable (letter-joining letter) by a single continuous drag proposed by the applicant in Chapter 27 (for convenience, "drag one piece invention").

In Korean, a letter (syllable) that combines consonants and vowels can be seen as the basic unit of thought. In other words, rather than thinking and recognizing in units of consonants (consonants or vowels) in our thinking system, it is perceived as a unit of letters combined with consonants and vowels. In order to input a syllable (including a trail) into a single drag by a consistent method, it is intended to be presented in Chapter 27 "One-Invention" and the present invention.

Six collections plus two collections of "ㅗ", "" "," ㅜ "," ㅓ "(frequency of use 49.16%) and" ㅡ " Has a usage frequency of about 77.23%, the six vowels can input a vowel of about 3/2 or more of the whole in a consistent manner. Also, the four vowels of "ㅛ", "ㅑ", "ㅠ", "ㅕ" have a frequency of about 6.98%. The four vowels (frequency of use 49.16%), "ㅛ", "" "," "" and "ㅓ" The frequency of use of 10 vowels combined with 4 vowels (6.98%) of "ㅑ", "ㅠ", "ㅕ" is about 84.22%, so almost all vowels can be input by consistent drag input method . And if the applicant combines the techniques presented in Part 1, all the vowels can be entered in one consistent way. In addition, the applicant can combine the technique presented in Part 1 and input one consecutive drag with one consecutive drag, including the trailing consent.

DRAG 1 The invention will soon be disclosed as a product (PDA product), so that the present invention (the contents of Chapter 28) will be filed, and the details of the present invention will be described with reference to the following examples.

28.3 Composition of syllable input technique by continuous drag proposed in the present invention

First, it is shown that the technique of the first invention can be applied to the existing technology (typically, Mojo input device).

In Fig. 15-1 and Fig. 15-2, the main idea is to input "ㅗ" by upper dragging, "a" by right dragging, "ㅜ" by lower dragging, You can enter "ㅓ" by dragging. That is, as shown in FIG. 16-5 (b), when "A" is dragged from the [a] button to the right, "a" is input. When the drag from the button a downward as shown in FIG. 16-5 .

However, when dragging to the right as shown in FIG. 16-6 (a) and then dragging to the lower side longer, the result is input as a "sphere" instead of "a". As shown in FIG. 16-6 (b), when dragging to the lower side and dragging to the right side longer than the lower drag length, the result is "A". As shown in Fig. 16-6 (c), if you do so in the diagonal direction of about 45 degrees, the result may be "A" or "Sphere", depending on the case. Here, MoAki's implementation method calculates the X-axis movement distance (for convenience sake, "dX") and the Y-axis movement distance (for convenience, "dY") of the drag start point and the drag end point, If it is larger than the distance dY, it is recognized as a drag in the horizontal direction (right drag in this example), and if dY is larger than dX, it is recognized as a drag in the vertical direction (lower drag in the present example). It confirmed that it works the same in "Moakey 2.0" version applied to latest phones such as Samsung Omnia recently.

However, in order to apply the first invention, once the rightward drag is progressed, it is newly defined as recognizing the vowel "a". If dragged from [a] to [b], as shown in Figure 16-6 (a), dragging to the right of [a] causes "a" to be recognized (the result is combined with "a" "), And" ㅎ "is recognized as the last button, so the result is recognized as" red ". Figure 16-6 (c) shows whether it is dragged to [a → h → he] or dragged to [a → d → he], but if it is dragged to [a → h → → he] (The result is "sphere") as dragged from [a] to the bottom direction of [d] if dragged to [a → d → hehe] So the result is recognized as "old + heh" (under "old" heh "basal"). Here, the vowel is recognized by the drag direction, and the vowel in the braces is expressed as {x} for convenience. In other words, [a → → → he] can be expressed as [a → {b} → he], and [a → → → he] can be expressed as [a → {t}} → he .

If you want to enter "angle", you can do the following. In Figure 16-7 (a), when dragged from [a] to [a], the right dragged from the [a] button to the [g] button is recognized as "a", so [a → {a} → a] The result can be recognized as &quot; angle &quot;. By the way, in Moakey 2.0 version, the drag that is dragged to the right and returns to the place is treated as recognizing "other vowel". For example, as shown in FIG. 16-7 (a), the drag operation to return to the drag start button after the right drag is treated as a vowel "ㅐ". If this is applied, the drag of Figure 16-7 (a) will be recognized as "dog". In this case, you will need a different type of drag operation to enter "angle". For example, as shown in Figure 16-7 (b), when dragging from [a → b → b → b → b → b → a] = [b → → b → b → b → b → b → a] , "A" is recognized by the right drag from the [a] button to the [g] button, and "e", "d" and "d" are ignored except for the last button "a" "Angle" is recognized. When dragging from [a → ㅅ → ㅎ → a → a] = [a → {a} → he → → a → a → a → a], the result is likewise recognized as "angular". Even if it is dragged from the [a] button to the [g] button as shown in Fig. 16-7 (c), the result of the final recognition is the same.

In MoaKey 2.0 version, when dragging is started from the [a] button and dragged to the right and then back to the [a] button, the vowel "ㅐ" is recognized (the result is recognized as "dog"). "ㅔ" is recognized when it returns to the start button of the left drag, and "ㅚ" is recognized when it returns to the drag start button after the upper drag, and "ㅟ" is recognized when it returns to the drag start button after the down drag . However, when actually used, there is the same phenomenon as in FIG. 16-6 (*). In Figure 16-6 (*), the symbol "*" means all.) If you drag in the direction of about 45 degrees as shown in Figure 16-6 (c) and then return to the drag start button, Is recognized (i.e., processed by the right drag), and in some cases, &quot; ㅟ is recognized (i.e., processed by the lower drag). This indicates that the direction of the drag (in this case, the right drag or the lower drag) is processed by comparing the maximum movement distance in the X-axis direction with the maximum movement distance in the Y-axis direction with the logic pointed out in FIG. 16-6 have. However, for convenience of explanation, it is explained that the right drag is dragged to the adjacent right button and then returns to the original button. The other cases (up / down / left drag) are also the same.

To enter a "gang", drag it to [a → a → a → a → a], as shown in Figure 16-8 (a). It can be explained as [a → {ㅐ} → → → ㅇ] because it is defined as "ㅐ" after starting from [a] button and dragging it to the right button [g] "C" is invalid since the last button "drag" followed by the consonant "ㅇ" is a valid button. The result is a "gang". If you want to enter a "guest", you can drag it to [a → a → a → a → a], as shown in Figure 16-8 (b). Only the last drag button "a" is recognized as a valid button after "dog" has been recognized, and it can be described as [→ → → → → → ㄱ] "D" is invalidated. When [a → a → a] is recognized as [a → {ㅐ}], it is assumed that dragging down to [a → a → a] and then returning to the original button is not recognized as ".". [A → a → a → →]. . . → [a], it can be processed in the same way. ". . . "Means dragged through a number of other buttons (including character buttons, function buttons, or keyboard skin skins) as in 16-8 (c).

As a result, the representative drag-character input device Samsung Electronics, Moakki, applied the contents of the first invention ("dragon last button" as a valid button and invalidation of the remaining consonant buttons among the consonant buttons dragged since " The input logic can be modified to some extent, and dragging can be applied to the trailing edge. However, in this case, 8 vowels can be input by dragging, but not all Korean vowels can be entered consistently by dragging. Next, in the present invention, all the vowels are consistently input by dragging, and the description of inputting the ending vowels will be described. As mentioned in the first part of the invention, the following contents can be applied to all other character input devices (eg, Samsung Electronics employment letter input device, LG Electronics employment letter input device), but for convenience, http://www.simplecode.net The description will be based on the letter input technique of the applicant.

In Chapter 27, Part 1, we have mentioned that Figures 15-5 (a) and 15-5 (b) are compatible keyboards. You can also set whether or not to display the [a] button as "ㆍ" in the "For PC / One-handed character input device" screen, which is introduced at http://www.simplecode.net , And the basic setting at the time of installing the program is to display the [a] button with "?" (I.e., Fig. 15-5 (b)). Figures 16-9 (a) and 16-9 (b) also show the screen of the program to be released as a product for PDA soon. Figure 16-9 (b) describes the basic settings, and Figure 16-9 (a) Keyboard explains the following, and the vowel input technique by basic button combination is introduced at http://www.simplecode.net "Korean Basic 2" is applied.

First, in the existing Mojo-type drag input technique, the vowels "ㅗ", "ㅜ", "ㅓ" and "a" are input from the consonant buttons by up / down / left / right drag. As a result, vowels "ㅡ" and "ㅣ", which have a frequency of use of about 28%, can not be input by dragging at all. In the present invention, it is appropriate to input the vowel "-" by dragging from left to right for consistent input by dragging and in accordance with the "writing habit", and it is valid to input the vowel "ㅣ" . The applicant wondered about this part when using the Moakie product. If you drag from left to right, "ㅡ" should be entered together. If dragging down on the screen, the collection "ㅣ" should be entered together. It was intuitively more or less consistent with our notions. Probably it is probably due to the fact that we refer to the examples in Figure 16-3 and Figure 16-4. As shown in Figure 16-10 (a), dragging to the right will recognize the vowel "-". That is, [a → b] is [a → {ㅡ}] and the input result is recognized as "that". The button does not need to be changed for the right drag. As shown in Fig. 16-10 (b), if the same length is dragged within the same button, the result can be recognized as an input of "ㅡ". As shown in Figure 16-10 (c), since the vowel "ㅡ" is under "a" in "it", dragging starts from the [b] button under the [a] button and the [ If dragged, it can be recognized as "that". Likewise, if the user drags a "predetermined length" within the [b] button under the [a] button, the result can be recognized as "him". 16-10 (a) will be described with reference to FIGS. 16-10 (a) for the sake of convenience, and it is also applicable to other cases (16-10 (b), (c), and (d)). Figures 16-10 (a) and 16 (b) can not be applied at the same time as Figures 16-10 (c) and (d), but one can be selected (either developer specified or user selected in preference) It is natural to be able to. The drawing of FIG. 16-10 (*) is also applicable to the case of the vowel "ㅣ", so the description of the vowel "ㅣ" should be avoided.

Next, inputting the trajectory becomes [a → {ㅡ} → ㅁ → d] as shown in Figure 16-11 (a), and "ㅁ" is invalidated and dragged Only the last button, "d", is recognized as a valid button and the "text" is recognized. Similarly, in order to input the "pole", drag [a → b → ㅁ → a → a] as shown in Figure 16-11 (b) to become [a → {ㅡ} → ㅁ → a → a] "And" d "are invalidated, the result is recognized as" polar ". This can be done by inputting a "pole" by dragging [a → b → a], unless another vowel (eg "a") is input as shown below. It is obvious that "pole" is recognized as input even if it is dragged from [a → b → → (outside) → a] as in Figure 16-11 (c) Here, &quot; (outside) &quot; should be engraved with &quot; outside the character button &quot; (Eg, Space, Enter, Mode, Skin, Back Space, and Hanja conversion) other than the character buttons involved in dragging character input can be regarded as "outside".

Next, the four vowels "ㅗ", "ゃ", "ㅜ", "ㅓ" are dragged upwards according to the vowel shape and dragged to the start drag button again, "ㅗ" is recognized and dragged to the right Is dragged to the drag start button, "a" is recognized. When dragging to the lower side and dragging to the drag start button again, "ㅜ" is recognized, and when dragging to the left side and then dragging to the start drag button again, "ㅓ" Suggest that it is perceived.

First, in the case of "a", as shown in Figure 16-12 (a), "a" is placed on the right side of "a". Therefore, it is natural that when dragging to [a] → [b → a] to the right and dragging to the drag start button again as shown in Figure 16-12 (b) 16-12 (c), even if the button is not changed, the same process may be performed when the user moves rightward by a predetermined length and then returns to the right. Hereinafter, It is obvious that it can be applied to other cases as well. Here, as shown in FIG. 16-12 (b), it is possible to define both the case where the user drags with the right button and the case where the user returns to the drag start button again. For example, you can do the same thing when dragging all the consonant buttons except [a → b → "a", "b" ... → b → a]. In the case of &quot; phrase &quot; is also the same as the case of &quot; a &quot;

In the case of "ga", as shown in Figure 16-13 (a), "ㅓ" is placed on the left side of "a". Therefore, as shown in Fig. 16-13 (b), dragging is started from the [b] button on the right side of "a" and dragged to the left direction constituting "ㅓ" [B → a → b]) can be recognized as "gig". However, considering the drag habits of current users, dragging from the [a] button to the left and then back to the [a] button (depending on the form of the vowel "ㅓ" , [A → (outside = mode button) → A]) may be recognized as "G". Of course, even if the button does not change as shown in FIG. 16-12 (c), it is possible to process the same button by moving a predetermined length within the same button again. For example, in the case of FIG. 16-13 (b), the button is dragged to the left by a predetermined length in the [b] button and then dragged to the right again. In the case of FIG. And then drag it to the right again. However, the following description will be made with reference to Fig. 16-13 (c) for convenience of explanation. In the case of "high", it is the same as that of "high." For example, since the vowel "ㅗ" is located at the bottom of the "a", the [d] button located at the bottom of the [a] button is used as a start button for dragging and the one dragged to the [a → a → d] It will be possible. However, this can not be coexisted in one system by inputting "high" by [A] button as drag start button and [A → (outside as skin) → a] It is obvious that only one of them should be applied according to the setting of the user (if the user can select the user).

In the input of the above "ㅗ", "" "," "" and "ㅓ", when dragging a predetermined distance within the same button (or dragging out of the button) Dx, dY and dX, dY of the coordinates of the point which is maximally dragged from the coordinate of the drag start point in the input case explanation of the above-mentioned &quot; - &quot; and & You can easily judge which is bigger or smaller. The judgment may be made when the drag start button is pressed or when the drag start point is the closest. As a simple example, if the deviation dX in the X-axis direction is within a predetermined distance (or a length, which will be expressed by about the number of pixels in the program) in the program, and dY is a predetermined distance or more and dY is a positive number, . Other cases are similar and are not difficult, so we do not explain them in detail. However, for the convenience of explanation, it is described that dragging to any direction (e.g., rightward) is judged to be a case where a dragged button is typically changed (e.g., [a → b]). However, Judging by the apparently dragged button changes rather than by length is a good way to reliably reduce input errors. (Including the case of being dragged in the same button or another button), it is considered that the drag is sufficiently recognized in the user's viewpoint. However, in the system, when dragging is performed, Or touch), but if the rule of button change (eg, [a → b]) on the screen keyboard partitioned in a lattice form is applied, it can be clearly recognized and clearly dragged from the user's point of view Which reduces the likelihood of errors. The keyboard skin design of Figure 16-9 (*) is also designed in consideration of this point. The 12 character input buttons are located at the center, so you can drag the buttons at the farthest end (eg, [a], [c], [ It can be dragged out of the button with certainty.

As shown in Figure 16-14 (a), the vowel "ㅑ" in "Gya" is the shape lined up next to the consonant. Thus, in accordance with the form, as shown in FIG. 16-14 (b), from the left to the right, it returns to the start button of the drag, it is more appropriate to drag again from left to right and then return to the start button of drag . In Figure 16-14 (b), dragged from [a → b → a → b → a], which can be expressed in brace form [a → {ㅑ}]. Or dragging to the right, and then returning to the drag start button (entering the vowel "a") twice, and typing "a" two consecutive times is considered to be recognized as "ㅑ". This can be thought of as [a → b → a → b → a] = [a → {a +}] = [a → {ㅑ}]. Also, even if dragged from [a → b → c → b → a → b → a], if the first drag goes to the [c] button and returns to the drag start button [a] It is possible to think like [a → → → → → → → → → →] → [→ →] → [→ →]. In the case of "rule", it is the same as the case of "above", so no further explanation is given.

In the case of "bran", the explanation of "a" above: description of "b" above: description of "b": description of "b"]. However, since the vowel "ㅕ" is arranged on the right side of the consonant "a", the [b] button as the right button of the [a] button is used as a drag start button as in the case of " You can also define "chaff" by dragging it like [b → a → b → a → b]. If dragging the [a] button to the left with the drag start button and then returning to the left twice, it can be dragged as [A → (outside = mode) → A → (outside = mode) → a]. This can be interpreted as [a → {ㅓ + ㅓ}] = [a → {ㅕ}]. However, this may be used as one of the programmer's implementation or the setting of the user, such that the one shown in FIG. 16-13 (b) can not coexist with the one shown in FIG. 16-13 (c). The drawings are not attached separately, and the case of "bridge" is the same as that of "bamboo".

In the above, there are 4 collections of "" "," "", "" "," ㅓ "with two vowels" ㅡ "and" ㅣ " And 10 vowels with a frequency of use of about 84% are added by a consistent method of dragging by combining all four vowels of "ㅛ", "ㅑ", "ㅠ", and "ㅕ" . For convenience, the vowel input method will be referred to as &quot; directional drag &quot; or &quot; vowel input by directional drag &quot; in contrast to the drag vowel input technique in the first invention. Next, the meaning of the above-described dragging input rule when combining vowels with consecutive dragging will be described. Entering a continuous drag up to the trailing edge can refer to the application of the first invention to the above-mentioned moq. In addition, this two-part invention has the meaning that it can coexist in the same system together with the content of the one-part invention.

First, we show that the input of "ㅗ", "a", "ㅜ", "ㅓ" If you enter "a" as a drag in the right direction as in Moaki, when dragging from [a → b → → b → → b → →], [a → {→} → Invalidation buttons ... → ㅣ] , You can see that dragging with the [b] button on the right side of the [a] button was for inputting the vowel "a" along with "a", or "a + It is difficult to judge whether or not to proceed with the dragging with the [-... For convenience, a collection recognized by dragging in one direction (eg, {}) is called an "implicitly dragged collection", and a collection (eg "ㅡ") recognized by consecutive dragging is called an "explicit dragged collection ". The solution would be:

(A) If both the implicitly and explicitly dragged vowels can be combined, they can all be recognized at the same time,

(B) If an implicitly dragged vowel and an explicitly dragged vowel can not be combined, only explicitly dragged vowels can be recognized,

(C) If explicitly dragged vowels are present, they are not always implicitly dragged vowels, but only explicitly dragged vowels

. . . . . . .

And so on. If (A) is applied, [a → {b}} will be recognized and the result will be "dog". If the explicitly dragged vowel is "ㅡ", it becomes [a → {b}}. If you do not define "{b}" as a vowel, it will be recognized. (B)) In the case of the basic character input technique (http://www.simplecode.net "Hangul Basic 2") presented in the case of the present invention, "a + ㅡ = ㅗ" is defined as "a + ㅡ = ㅗ" The combination of the implicitly dragged vowel {v} and the explicitly dragged vowel vowel is used to indicate that the combination of the [a] button and the [ "The issue of whether or not to admit is a different matter.

As described briefly above, the input of the vowel by dragging in one direction causes a complicated problem when the other vowels are combined by the continuous dragging. In the case of the present invention, the collection button is located at the bottom of the consonant button, but the shape of the keyboard may be the same as the keyboard of Samsung Electronics, the collection button may be located above the consonant button, And various other forms will be possible. In the present invention, only "a" and "l" are defined as unidirectional drag inputs, and in this case, (A), (B), or (C) may be applied. For example, if you drag [a → a → consonant buttons ... → ㅣ], [a → {ㅡ} → ㅣ] = "긔" will be recognized.

However, in the present invention, the method of inputting an implicitly dragged "a" is defined as returning to the drag start button rather than dragging in one direction. In one-way dragging, it was "implicitly dragged vowel", but the "a" vowel can be explicitly recognized (specified) by the process of returning to the start drag button again. For example, if you drag [a → a → a → consonant buttons ... → ㅣ], it is clear that the user enters a vowel "a" through the process of returning to the "a → a → a" It can be seen that it becomes. Thus, the result will be [a → {a = explicit =} → l], so that "dog" will be recognized. As you can see in the first part of the invention, if you want to enter "period" by continuous drag, you have to drag [a → consonant buttons ... → l] and drag it from the [a] button to the [b] There is no reason to come back with the [a] button. In other words, it is meaning to remove the implication of vowel input by directional dragging by dragging back to the start button of dragging, and it is possible to combine vowels which can be combined by continuous dragging, so that all vowels . For example, [a → (outside = top) → a → consonant buttons ... → a] = [a → {a = clarification) → a]. [A → (outer = top) → a → consonant buttons ... → a → ㅣ] = [a → {a = explicit =} → a →) If you see an example of typing in the trailblazer, [a → (outside = top) → a → consonant buttons ... → a → (consonant buttons ...) → o] = [a → { } → a → → → o] and the result is "light". The input of "ㅗ", "a", "ㅓ", "ㅜ" proposed in the present invention can be input by continuous dragging in combination with the content of the first invention and input by continuous dragging It is meaningful to be able to do it. It is also applicable to "ㅛ", "ㅑ", "ㅠ", "ㅕ" as well.

Since the vowel "ㅡ" is input by the right drag and the vowel "ㅣ" is input by the downward drag, only one kind of drag (right drag, downward drag) is used for the vowel input by one-way drag. The left drag is to input a lattice note (e.g., &quot; b &quot;) corresponding to the notes (e.g., &quot; a &quot;) placed on the drag start button as shown in Figure 15-13 can do. Likewise, the upper dragging is performed by inputting a consonant sound (e.g., &quot;? &Quot;) corresponding to a plain sound (e.g., &quot; a &quot;) arranged on the drag start button as shown in FIG. 15-3 . As shown in Figure 16-3, the upper drag is defined to be "Shift + X", so it conforms to the notion of using the existing dragon (in the case of Pocket PC 2002, 2003 emulator, the upper drag also works) . In Figure 15-3 (b), dragging from [a → (outside = top) → a → ƒ → ㅅ → ㅡ] is expressed as recognizing "끄". In the present invention, (A), it is possible to avoid collision with this rule and to recognize "끄", as shown in Figure 16-15 (a), [a → (outside = top) → "a" It should be dragged to the other consonant buttons ... → ㅡ] → [{consonant consonant} → ㅡ] = "off". The drag result in Figure 16-15 (b) will be "peek". In the case of the keyboard in which the vowel button is disposed at the lower side of the consonant button as shown in the example of the present invention, there is no fear of implication (confusion) in the upper drag even in the one-directional drag. Because it starts dragging from an arbitrary consonant button and almost always must be dragged toward the vowel button on the lower side (one piece invention), something promised by upper drag that is dragged upwards (eg, light consonant or lattice sound) Because I am certain that I dragged it to input, I specify that I want to input something promised.

The contents of the present invention in which the directional drag and the contents of the first invention are combined can be similarly applied to the case where the collection button is displayed on the keyboard skin as in the case of the example keyboard but the collection button is popped up as in the case of the moiré .

Next, the case of continuous dragging to the trailing edge is similar to the case of inputting the trailing edge by applying the first piece of invention in the present invention in the present invention, so that it will be briefly explained through several examples.

First, [a → b → a] is recognized as "a", so if you want to enter "pole", drag it to [a → b] as shown in drawing 16-16 (a) By dragging without dragging the button, you can drag it so that the last button becomes the [a] button. Next, drag "a" to "b" to input "a", then "a" will be recognized. To input "a", drag [a → b] And drag the last button to the [b] button. For example, as shown in FIGS. 16-16 (b). To input "귿", simply drag it to [a → b → c] and it is recognized as [a → {ㅡ} → c] = "귿". In other words, if you drag from the [a] button to the right button to the [b] button, the right drag ({ㅡ}) will be recognized.

To enter "liver", drag from [a → b → a → b] as shown in Figure 16-17 (a). This is interpreted as [a → {b} → b]. Similarly, in order to input "angle", drag to [a → a → a] as shown in Figure 16-17 (b) to make "a" recognized, move to another button (including buttons or skin outside) Button to the [a] button. "ㅛ", "ㅑ", "ㅠ", "ㅕ" is similar in the case, so avoid a detailed description.

29. Korean consonant input method using continuous pushing of same button

Korean input technology, which is mainly commercialized by Korean large corporations (eg, Samsung Electronics), uses a repetitive pressing of a consonant button. In the present invention, the term " repeat selection method " is used and the word " multi-tap method " For convenience, the term "repeat selection method" is used. The disadvantage of this approach is ambiguity.

The keypad of Fig. 4- * is logically "ㅋ" and "ㄲ" is "ㄱ", even if "ㅋ" and "ㄲ" are additionally arranged in the button arranged "a" It is a keypad associated with the arranged buttons. In the currently used Samsung keypad, "a" and "k" are arranged in one button, and "ㄲ" is a keypad associated with the button. In the keypad of FIGS. 4 to 7 of the present invention or the current keypad of Samsung Electronics, "a" is recognized (or input) by pressing the corresponding button once, "ke" is recognized by pressing twice, When "ㄲ" is recognized by pressing, if "Country" is input, there is ambiguity that becomes "Guka".

In the following, we summarize the basic properties of the iterative selection method, propose a technique that improves convenience and improves ambiguity dramatically. The following description is based on the current Unicode Hangul characters and can be applied to additional Hangul characters that can be expressed in future Unicode.

29.1 Properties of Repetitive Selection Methods and Current Application Examples

The basic and common properties of the iterative selection method (i.e., the multi-tap method) are as follows. When N alphabets are arranged, press the corresponding button once to enter the first alphabet, press twice to enter the second alphabet, press the third button to enter the third alphabet, ..., The Nth press is input the Nth alphabet. If N alphabets are arranged or associated for a certain button, the cycle is completed when it is pressed N times. As mentioned, there is an ambiguity about whether the second press of a button twice has entered the second alphabet or whether the first alphabet is entered twice.

In order to solve this ambiguity, there is an application example in which a timer is set and the input state is initialized after a predetermined time elapses. For example, when the corresponding button is pressed once, and the predetermined time elapses, the first alphabet is confirmed, so that when the button is pressed again, the first alphabet is inputted again.

Another way to overcome ambiguity is to "cycle toggle." For example, "a" is recognized when the button is arranged with three alphabets "abc", "b" is recognized when the button is pressed twice, "c" is recognized when the button is pressed three times, "A" is recognized again and "b" is recognized by pressing it five times. When N + 1 is pressed, only the first alphabet is recognized again, and when N + 2 is pressed, only the second alphabet is recognized again. This is referred to as " cyclic toggle repetition selection method " for convenience. If only the common basics of the iterative selection method are applied, "c" is inputted by pushing 3 times and then "1" is inputted after "c" . This will be referred to as " basic repetition selection method " or " acyclic repetition selection method " for convenience.

How to select cyclic toggle iteration

(Press once) → a → (press twice) → b → (press 3 times) → c (cycle end) → (press 4 times) → a → (press 5 times) → b → Press 6 times) → c (end of cycle) → (press 7 times) → a →. . .

Basic repetition selection method (non-recursive repetition selection method)

(Press once) → a → (press twice) → b → (press 3 times) → c (cycle end) → (press 4 times) → ca → (press 5 times) → cb → 6 times) → cc (cycle end) → (press 7 times) → cca →. . .

The basic repetition selection method and the cyclic toggle repetition selection method are illustrated in FIG. 17-1 for easier understanding.

The above-mentioned " (pressed twice) " means that the corresponding button is pressed twice including " (pressed once) " This is also the same as in FIG. 17-1. The above two examples (cyclic toggle type / non-cyclic type repeated selection method) are all operations shown in the current product and may be used in combination with the timer operation. The present inventor has a view that the operation of the basic repetition selection method is more appropriate, but the cyclic toggle repetition selection method is widely used by large corporations at present.

29.2 Application examples in current Korean

In Korean, there is a case where the note consonant (also called "double consonant" when called morphologically) is input by pressing the button assigned to the note consonant twice. In this case, the operation is an improvement of the automata in the two-round type Korean keyboard, and also the two-round type operation in the large flow. When consonants are consecutively appearing like "XY" in the normal syllable (letter-joining letter) list in our Korean, "X" is the supporter of the preceding letter and "Y" is the superscript consonant of the following letter. The consonants of two consecutive consonants can be interpreted as the consonants of the preceding letters and the back letters.

For example, when the "A" button is pressed once in the initial input state, "A" is inputted, and when it is pressed once, it becomes ".". If you press it once again, it becomes "ㄲ a". This is an operation to which the basic repetition selection method is applied. If the cyclic toggle iterative selection method is applied, it will be " a " rather than " a ". It is considered that the cyclic toggle repetition selection method is applied in the initial input state or the initial consonant input state, but it is not preferable that the cyclic toggle repetition selection method is applied to a series of consecutive inputs.

"이 된다. 이는 "ㄱ"이 이미 입력된 "ㄱ"과 결합하여 "ㄲ"으로 한국어 음절(자모결합글자)를 이룰 수 있으면 한국어 자모결합글자로 처리하는 것이다. 이렇게 입력된 "

" 다음에 모음(예. "ㅏ")가 입력되면 "각가"가 된다. 이 역시 기존의 2벌식 한글키보드 오토마타(이하 "2벌식 한글오토마타")에서 받침있는 글자 다음에 모음이 입력되면, 앞글자의 받침이 다음 글자의 초성자음으로 빠져나오는 동작(예. "각" 다음에 "ㅏ"가 입력되면 "가가"로 됨)과 동일하다. 만약 상기 "

" 다음에 "ㄱ"버튼이 한번 더 눌러지면 입력된 "ㄱ"이 앞글자와 결합할 수 없으므로 "

ㄱ"이 된다. 이 역시 기존의 2벌식 한글오토마타에서 앞글자와 결합할 수 없는 자음이 입력되면, 다음 글자의 초성자음으로 처리하는 것과 동일하다. 같은 논리로 상기 "

ㄱ" 다음에 "ㄱ"버튼이 한번 더 눌러지면 "

ㄲ"로 된다. 상기 "

ㄲ" 다음에 "ㄱ"버튼이 한번 더 눌러지면, 기본 반복선택방법 적용시는 "

ㄲㄱ"이 되고, 최초입력상태 또는 초성자음입력상태에서는 순환토글식 반복선택방법 적용하면, "

ㄱ"이 된다. When the "A" button is pressed once while "each" is entered, the "

"This means that if" a "can be combined with the already entered" a "to form a Korean syllable (" jamo ") with" ㄲ "

("A") is input, it becomes "each." This is also the case when a vowel is input after the character that is supported by the existing two-verse Korean keyboard automata (hereinafter, "2-verbal Korean automata" (For example, when "a" is input after "each", it becomes "Gaga"). If the above-mentioned "

"Button is pressed once again, the entered" a "can not be combined with the preceding character, so"

A. "This is also the same as processing the initial consonant of the next letter when the consonant that can not be combined with the preceding letter is input in the existing two-verbal Korean automata.

A "and then the" a "button is pressed again, the"

Quot ;, and "

ㄲ "button is pressed once again, the default repeat selection method is"

"And when the first input state or the initial consonant input state is applied,

A ".

When the basic repetition selection method is applied in the above-mentioned graph form, when the letter " a " is assigned or associated with the second alphabet in the "

(Press once) → → (press twice) → ㄲ → (press 3 times) → → (press 4 times) → ㄲㄲ → (press 5 times) → → →. . .

ㄲㄱ" 사례) 이 아닌, "ㄱ" (상기 "

ㄱ" 사례) 이 되도록 할 수 있다. However, in the state of the consonant consonant, the cyclic toggle-type repetition selection method is applied so that " b " (the "

A "case)," a "(the above"

A "case).

29.3 Improvement of prior application and optimization for Korean consonant input

The basic system of modern Korean consonants known to all Korean people is as follows.

The plaintext "a", the consonant consonant "ㄲ", and the lattice sound "ㅋ" form a group with strong similarity in pronunciation and morphology. The lattice sound "ㅋ" is a form in which "a" is arranged vertically, and the serpentine "ㄲ" is a form in which "a" is arranged horizontally. "" "And" ㅊ "also have strong morphological associations with corresponding" ㅂ "and" ㅈ ", respectively, but" ㅃ "and" ㅉ " It is a little weaker than morphological association.

The following illustrations for "a", "ㄲ", "ㅋ" refer to other plaintexts (eg, "c"), other lattice notes (eg " ) Can be similarly applied.

In the case of inputting "ㅋ" by pressing the "a" button twice as in the case of the Korean inputting technology of the present Samsung Electronics, the phenomenon of "guka" can not be avoided by inputting "country". However, as in the above example, when "ㄲ" is input by depressing the "A" button twice, inputting "Country" is not "Go". As noted, the consonant consonants are more strongly related to the corresponding notes in form than in lattice notes. In addition, a concise keypad can be constructed by arranging only plain notes that are representative of light consonant and lattice notes on the buttons as the applicant has shown on the 4- * keypad.

"A" is recognized by pressing the "a" button once in the "3+ other input method" proposed by the applicant, "a" is recognized once more by pressing twice, "k" There is a case where "ㄲ" is recognized because it is recognized and pressed four times. Press the "A" button 4 times to make one cycle. It must be pressed four times in succession to enter a slash "ㄲ". However, as described above, when the " a " button is pressed twice, it is a key point of the present invention that the two-elemental Korean automata sometimes become " ㄲ " and sometimes become " a ". In other words, even if you do not press the "A" button 4 times to enter "ㄲ", you can press it twice.

기"의 "

기" 에서 "ㄲ"과 "ㄱ"이 연속하여 나온다. 기본 반복선택방법을 적용하여 "떡

기"를 입려하면 "떡보키"로 될 것이다. "

기"가 입력되는 과정을 보면, "복" → "

" → "

" → "보키" 와 같이 될 것이다. 이는 "ㄱ"버튼을 2번 누른 것이 절대적으로 "ㄲ"이 되는 것이 아니라 2벌식 한글오토마타에 의하여 때로는 "ㄲ" (예. "

")이 되기도 하고, 때로는 "ㄱㄱ" (예. "복기")이 되기 때문이기도 하다. 그러나, "

기"에서와 같이 "ㄲㄱ"이 연속하여 나오거나("ㄲ"받침 다음 "ㄱ"초성자음), "ㄱㄲ"이 연속하여 나오는 경우("ㄱ"받침 다음 "ㄲ"초성)는 "극히" 드물다. "ㄲㄱ"와 같이 "받침+초성자음"이 나오는 경우는 0.013% 이고, "ㄱㄲ"과 같이 "받침+초성자음"이 나오는 경우는 0.038% 이다. 다른 평자음(예. "ㄷ")과 경자음(예. "ㄸ")의 경우도 유사하므로, 사실상 거의 무시할 수 있는 수준이다. If "a" and "ㄲ" (due to double depression) appear consecutively, or if "ㄲ" (due to double depression) and "a" appear consecutively, "a", " Blah "all have the same input value, so there may be ambiguity. For example,

However,

"" ㄲ "and" ㄱ "appear in succession. By applying the basic repetition selection method,

If you try to put on a "ki," it will be "keikbo".

In the process of inputting a "period", "

"→"

"→" boki. "This means that pressing the" a "button twice is not absolutely" ㄲ ", but sometimes" ㄲ "(eg"

"), And sometimes because it is" a "(eg," repentance "), but"

("ㄱ", "ㄱ", "ㄲ", "ㄱ", and "ㄱ") are consecutive , And 0.038% when it comes to "supine + chord consonant", such as "ㄲ", and 0.038% when it comes to "supine + In the case of light consonants (eg, "ㄸ"), the similarities are virtually negligible.

기"의 "ㄲ"을 "ㄱ"버튼 4번 눌러짐으로 입력하면 모호성없이 입력할 수 있다. 이 역우, 기본 반복선택방법으로 "기"가 입력되는 과정을 보면, "복" → "

" → "

" → "

" → "

ㄱ" → "

기" 가 된다. "ㄱ"버튼 2번 누름에 의한 "ㄲ"은 다음 입력(예. 모음입력)에 따라 "ㄱㄱ"으로 될 수 있지만, "ㄱ"버튼 4번 눌러짐이 항상 "ㄲ"이 되므로 "

기"의 경우는 모호성없는 입력이 가능하다. "오뚜기"의 경우도 "ㄷ"버튼 2번 눌러짐으로 "ㄸ"을 입력하면, "

두기"와 같이 된다. 즉, "오뚜기=

두기"인 모호성이 있는 것이다. 그러나 "ㄷ"버튼 4번 눌러짐으로 "ㄸ"을 입력하면 모호성없이 "오뚜기"로 올바르게 입력할 수 있다. "오뚜기"를 입력하기 위하여 "ㄷ"버튼을 눌러 "오ㄸ"을 입력하는 과정과 "가까이"를 입력하기 위하여 "

"을 입력하는 과정을 보이면 다음과 같다. 아래에서 모음 "ㅜ" 및 "ㅏ"의 입력에는 본 발명에서 제시한 모음입력기술 또는 다른 어떠한 모음입력기술이 적용될 수 있으며, 이하 유사한 경우에서도 같다.Also, since the technique of inputting "" by pressing four times is applied,

"" ㄲ "of""" can be input without ambiguity by pressing the """button 4 times. In this case, In the process of inputting a "period", "

"→"

"→"

"→"

"→"

The "ㄲ" by pressing the "A" button twice can be "ㄱ" by the next input (eg vowel input), but the " Therefore,

In the case of "Otogi", if you press """button twice and input" ㄸ ","

Quot ;, " Otogi =

But if you press the "c" button 4 times and type "ㄸ", you can input it correctly as "ottogi." To enter "ottogi", press the "c" O "and" close "to enter"

"Below, the vowel input technique or any other vowel input technique proposed by the present invention can be applied to the input of vowels" t "and" a "below, and the same applies to the following cases.

→

ㄷ →

→ 오ㄸ →("ㅜ"입력)→ 오뚜Oh →

→

ㄷ →

→ O ㄸ → (enter "ㅜ") → Otsu

→

→

→("ㅏ"입력)→ 가까→ → angle →

→

→

→ (enter "a") → close

" 다음에 "ㅏ"가 입력되면 "각가"가 되지만, "ㄱ"버튼 4번 누름은 항상 절대적으로 "ㄲ"이 된다고 하였으므로, "ㄱ"버튼 4번 누름 다음에 "ㅏ"가 입력되면 "가까"가 된다. Pressing the " a " button twice "

Quot; button 4 times, then " a " is input, then " a "".

Even when "ㄲ" is input by pressing the "a" button 4 times, the "a", "b" and "ㄲ" all have the same input value, so that ambiguity occurs. But in practice, this is also "extremely rare" in the words we use. It is 0.013% when it comes to "supple + consonant consonant" like "a blah", and 0% when "supple + consonant" comes out like "ㅋ". It is virtually negligible at the level of other plaintexts (eg "c") and lattice notes (eg "ä").

The change when the " A " button is pressed successively by applying the basic repetition selection method is as follows.

→ → ㄲ or → → → → ㄲ (end of cycle) → ㄲ → → ㄲ → a → ㄲ → → ㄲ → (end of cycle) → ㄲㄲa →. . .

Apply the basic repetition selection method and see the change when the "A" button is pressed successively after the letter "A".

→

→

(사이클 종료) →

ㄱ →

ㄲ →

ㅋ →

ㄲ (사이클 종료) → . . .→ → angle →

→

→

(Cycle end) →

A →

ㄲ →

ㅋ →

ㄲ (End of cycle) →. . .

"이고, 8번 눌러진 상태는 "

ㄲ"이 된다. 4번 눌러지고 나면 입력규칙 사이클이 종료되었으므로 기 입력된 글자(예."

")는 완성되고, 5번째 눌러짐은 다시 1번 눌러짐(새로 "ㄱ"입력)과 동일한 효과를 내게된다."A" followed by the "a" button is pressed four times, the "

"And the state of being pressed 8 times is"

ㄲ. "After pressing the key four times, the input rule cycle is terminated and the entered characters (eg"

"Is completed, and the fifth depression is the same effect as depressing" depression "once again (newly entering" a ").

ㄲ" 상태에서 한번 더 "ㄱ"버튼이 눌러지면, 다음의 2가지로 처리될 수 있다. 기본 반복선택방법이 적용되면, "

ㄲㄱ"이 될 것이다. 사이클 종료후, 눌러진 "ㄱ"버튼이 한번 더 눌러졌을 때, 입력중인 글자가 초성자음 상태에서는 순환토글식 반복선택방법이 적용된다면, "

ㄱ"이 될 것이다. 이 상태에서 "ㄱ"버튼이 한번 더 눌러진다면 "

ㄲ"이 될 것이다. 상기 기본 반복선택방법 적용의 경우, 그리고 사이클종료후 초성자음일 때 순환토글식 반복선택방법이 적용시의 경우를 조금 더 이해하기 쉽게 그림으로 나타내면 도면17-2와 같다. 도면17-2에서, 4번 눌러졌을 때의 "ㄲ"은 1사이클이 완료되었을 때의 결과이고, 8번 눌러졌을 때의 "ㄲㄲ"은 2사이클이 완료되었을 때의 결과인 것이다.It is preferable that the cyclic toggle repetition selecting method is not applied in the state of switching from the input of the pedestal to the leading consonant. The last "

If the "a" button is pressed once more in the "ㄲ" state, it can be processed in two ways: When the basic iterative selection method is applied,

If you press the "A" button once more after the end of the cycle and the cyclic toggle repetition selection method is applied when the character being entered is in the chord consonant state,

A. "If the" a "button is pressed again in this state,

The case of applying the cyclic toggle type repetition selection method when the basic repetition selection method is applied and when the repetitive consonant is generated after the end of the cycle is shown in FIG. 17-2 for easier understanding. In Fig. 17-2, "ㄲ" when pressed four times is the result when one cycle is completed, and "ㄲㄲ" when it is pressed eight times is a result when two cycles are completed.

There are double supports such as "ㄺ" among Korean supports (consonant consonants). In the form of a double bearing "xy", "x" can be combined with "a" to form "xy". The operation in this case is also the same. For example, if you try to type "ㄲ" by pressing the "" "button 2 times while typing" じ ゃ ", it will be" 앍 go ". However, by pressing the "a" button 4 times, it always becomes "ㄲ" and it is solved easily. The following is the case where the "a" button is pressed after the "know", and can be applied to other similar cases as well. When pressed twice, it becomes "a" (eg "앍"). When it is pressed three times, it becomes "ㅋ" Al. "). In the below, the vowel input technique or any other vowel input technique proposed by the present invention can be applied to the input of the vowel " a "

Al → 앍 → 앍 → Al → Al → (enter "a") → Al

In Korean, if there is a consonant followed by "ㅆ" (ie, "ㅆ") in Korean, there are many such as "~~" and "~~" There are few cases. When applying the default repetition selection method, it is natural that it becomes "ㅅ" when the "ㅅ" button is pressed after the "ㅆ" pedestal. This is because only "g" and "g" are arranged or associated with the "g" button. The keypad of FIG. 4- * is also the same.

수" 와 같이 된다. 이 경우도 "ㅅ"버튼 4번 누름으로 "ㅆ"을 입력하면 간단히 해결되며, 동작은 다음과 같다. "얼" 다음에 "ㅅ"버튼이 눌러질 때의 변화이다. 2번 눌러졌을 때 "ㅅㅅ" (예. "

ㅅ") 이 되고, 3번 눌러졌을 때 "ㅅㅆ" (예. "

ㅆ") 이 되고, 4번 눌러졌을 때 절대적으로 "ㅆ"이 되므로 "얼ㅆ"가 된다. 아래에서 모음 "ㅜ"의 입력에는 본 발명에서 제시한 모음입력기술 또는 다른 어떠한 모음입력기술이 적용될 수 있으며, 이하 유사한 경우에서도 같다.In the case of "xy", "ㅅ" comes in the position of "y", there are "ㄳ", "ㄽ", "ㅄ". In the case of "ㅆ", "ㅆ", "ㅆ", it is difficult to input "ㅆ" simply by pressing the "ㅅ" button twice. For example, if you are typing "ㅆ" by pressing the "ㅅ" button twice,

In this case, if you press """button 4 times," ㅆ "will be solved easily, and the action will be as follows:" Earl "is the change when the" ㅅ "button is pressed. When you press twice, you will see "yes" (eg.

"), And when it is pressed 3 times," ㅅ "(eg"

The vowel input technique described in the present invention or any other vowel input technique applied to the input of the vowel "ㅜ" is applied to the input of the vowel "ㅜ" The same shall apply in the following cases.

→

ㅅ →

ㅆ → 얼ㅆ →("ㅜ"입력)→ 얼쑤Earl →

→

ㅅ →

ㅆ → ㅆ ㅆ → (enter "ㅜ") → Ulus

After the vowel, "ㅆ" appears as a leading consonant. For example, in the case of "Asa", if you input "ㅆ" as "ㅅ" button 2, it becomes "ァ" by the Hangul Automata. The right arrow (→) from the bottom indicates that the "ㅅ" button is pressed. The input of the vowel "a" can be applied to any vowel input method (including other input methods not proposed by the applicant). For example, it may be input as "?" In the same manner as the conventional method, or may be input by pressing the "?" Button as presented in the prior application. It is a change when the "o" button is pressed after "ah".

→ → → → (→ enter "a") →

For consistent input rules and for unobtrusive input, you can press the "ㅅ" button four times as "ㅆ". "ㅆ" by pressing 2 times can be changed to "ㅅ" according to the next input (eg vowel input), but "ㅆ" by pressing 4 times is absolutely applied as in "ㄲ". Press 3 times as described above. The following shows the process of inputting "Assassin" by pressing "ㅅ" button 4 times.

→ → → → → → (→ "a" input) → Ahsa

If there is ambiguity (for example, enter "bk" as a supporter and a consonant), the way to overcome ambiguity is to terminate the input token by pressing the timer There is a method of ending the input token by depressing the arrow button. In order to input "a blah", the user presses the right arrow button after inputting "a" to interrupt the input token, and then presses the "b" button three times to input "blah". Here are some examples of ambiguities:

A 0.013 ㄱ 0 ㄲ 0.038 haha 0 C 0 ㄷ 0.064 ㄸ ㄸ 0.002 T 0 The 0.013 The 0.004 ㅃ ㅃ 0.001 ㅍ ㅍ 0.001 ㅆ 0.003 The 0.059 Good 0.002 ㅉ 0 Cock 0.003 Sum 0.203

기"를 입력한 것이 "보키"로 되지 않음. "오뚜기"를 입력한 것이 "

두기"로 되지 않음)가 있다. In Korea, the ratio of "supine + initial consonant" to "neutral vowel + initial consonant" is about half. In the present invention, there is no ambiguity in the case of " neutral vowel + initial consonant &quot;. This is because you can enter a continuous tone (eg "ㄲ") by pressing four times on the plain tone (eg "A" button). Therefore, the total of 0.2% is 0.1% when the total case is considered. It can be seen that the ambiguity occurs once in 1000 characters. Since the Korean input technology presented in the keypad of FIG. 4 of the present invention takes about 3.5 letters per character, it can be seen that ambiguity occurs once about 3500 times . In fact, there is almost no ambiguity. The reason for this ambiguity is that there are very few consonants (eg, "a" and "blah") that have similar phonetic values in our Hangul. The above results show that in order to input "ㄲ" in one example of the applicant's elected cause "3+ other input method"("a" is pressed once, "ㅋ" is pressed 3 times and "ㄲ" is pressed 4 times) Pressing the button twice in a row may be somewhat tedious. In most cases, pressing the "A" button twice has the effect of inputting "ㄲ". Since "ㄲ" is a form in which "ㄱ" is overlapped on the left and right, it is also possible to input "ㄲ" by pressing "a" button 2 times which is a method that can be matched with the emotion of a Korean user who writes horizontally There is an effect. The above result also shows that the ambiguity is greatly widened by inputting " ㄲ " by pressing the " a " button twice and by recognizing " ㄲ " Reduced effects (eg.

Key "is not" bokey. "Entering" ottogi "means"

Quot; not &quot;).

It is pointed out that the basic iterative selection method is more suitable than the cyclic toggle type iterative selection method when inputting from the pedestal to the consonant consonant. However, it is noted that the cyclic toggle iterative selection method can be applied when the cycle is completed. Furthermore, if the lighted consonant sound recognized by depressing the button 2 times is a "consonant consonant", it may not be treated as a consonant again by pressing four times. That is, the first press of the "A" button is recognized as "A", the second press is recognized as "ㄲ" or "a", and the third press is recognized as "ㅋ". 2 If the recognized "ㄲ" is the first consonant when it is pressed twice by the verbal Korean automata, the cycle is completed by pressing three times, and the pressed again is called "ㅋ" with the recognized "ㅋ" (When applying the repetition selection method) or " a " (when applying the cyclic toggle repetition selection method). This is shown in Figure 17-3. In Figure 17-3, the graph (or diagram) format and the flowchart format are integrated for convenience. However, in order to ensure consistency of the input rules, it is possible to process the presses 4 times at all times as " ㄲ " (i.e., consonant sounds), and the inventor's opinion is that the input rule is consistently repeated four times It seems preferable.

The above example is an example of a case where a plain consonant is used as a basic consonant, and even consonants and lattices are input. The above example can be applied to the keypad shown in FIG. 4- * and also to other types of keypad not shown by the applicant. In addition, the above example may be applied together with the vowel input method proposed by the present applicant and the present invention, and may be applied together with other vowel input methods existing or appearing in the future.

(Eg "ㅋ = ㄱ ㅡ ㅡ", "ㄲ = び ㅣ"), which is a technique that can be entered without any ambiguity, presented by the applicant's prior application, using a collection button. If you use a combination of control methods (eg, "ㅋ = ㄱ ㅡ ㅡ", "ㄲ = び ㅣ") presented by the applicant at the time of inputting lattice notes and light consonants, Will be even smaller. We have not shown the input of "he" on the keypad of Figure 4- *, but we have explained in the previous paragraph that "he" may be separated by a separate button. In the present invention, it is essential to regularly input "extremely" less ambiguity in a concise keypad (eg, FIG. 4- *) by using the relationship of plain, lattice, and light consonants. This is a key issue that can be applied " in common " in any modified case as well as in the keypad of Figs. The input of "ㅎ" (or "" "), which was expressed as a consonant in the applicant's earlier application, can be applied to the input of lattice notes or light consonants, as described below, and is referred to separately below.

The above input technology, which is a core matter of the present invention, will be disclosed as a product through the site "http://www.simplecode.net" with the technology of "Korean Basic 3".

29.4 Optimization of elimination of consonants (eg "ㅎ") by repetitive pressing

Next, examples of modifications are presented. It is assumed that the " " button is further arranged or associated with " he. &Quot; It is the case that the expression "ㅎ" is regarded as a modified alphabet (lattice sound or light consonant) of "ㅇ" in the expression of the prior application. The prior art corresponds to a case in which "he" is regarded as a modified alphabet (lattice or triangular consonant) of "o" and processed. As the "ㅇ" button is pressed, the basic repetition selection method will be as follows.

ㅇ → ㅇㅇ → ㅎ (End of cycle) → ㅎㅇ → ㅎㅇ ㅇ → ㅎㅎ (End of cycle) → ㅎ hechan →. . .

In modern Korean, there is no "twinning." But if you can enter "twinning", which is Gore, you can press "o" button twice by "2"

It is also possible to arrange "b" and "d" in one group in a single button, as in the case presented in the earlier application. In this case, the processing of " b " and " d " can be processed similarly to the case of " o " Since 9 basic consonants can be assigned to the nine buttons [1] - [9], if "ƒ" is treated as a variant alphabet (ie lattice or consonant) of "ㄴ" And "he" may be assigned to different buttons.

Quot ;, " " and " hehe " are inputted by the above basic repetition selection method as described above, There is more ambiguity than one).

However, it can be applied together with the control processing method (eg, "ㅋ = ㄱ ㅡ ㅡ", "ㄲ = び ㅣ"), which is a technique that can be entered without any ambiguity, as presented in the applicant's prior application. If the input of "ㅎ" is always input as "ㅎ = ㅇ ㅡ ㅡ" or "ㅎ = - ㅡ ㅡ" presented at the applicant's original application, the method of repetitive pressing Even if it is about 1000 characters (about 3500), there will be one ambiguity. The same applies to the case where the user inputs "ㅎ = ぁ ㅡ ㅡ" in the prior application. Also, when entering "ㅋㅋ", which is not a normal word but is used frequently in a younger generation, it is of course possible to input without ambiguity by inputting "ㅋ" as "ㅡ ㅡ ㅡ". If you use a combination of control methods (eg, "ㅋ = ㄱ ㅡ ㅡ", "ㄲ = び ㅣ") presented by the applicant at the time of inputting lattice notes and light consonants, Will be even smaller.

Next, it is possible to apply the input of "ㅎ" by pressing the "ㆍ" button (assigned to the number button [0] button) three times, which is one of the contents presented by the applicant. This means that, as mentioned in the prior application, the lattice note is input by pressing the ruler button three times and the input rule is provided in a coherent manner, and the " ㆍ " button associated with the " ㆍ " . When the " ㆍ " button is pressed three times after the consonant, " hehe " is inputted, there is no ambiguity and there is ambiguity as shown in the prior application, but it is very small. First, the case where the existing vowel input method used by Samsung Electronics is applied will be briefly described as follows. If there is ambiguity, the vowel "a" (entered as "ㅣ" in the previous method), then "ㅑ", then "ㅜ" ), There may be ambiguity. When the default iteration selection method is applied, it will be as follows. The following is the case where the "ㆍ" button is pressed successively, such as "period", "it", and so on. The right arrow "→" below represents the press of the "ㆍ" button.

→ → → →

→ → → → → → → Kyu →

If only the basic iterative selection method is applied without modifying the automata, if "a" is followed by "a", "au", "au", "au", then the " ㅡ "or" ㅎ = ㅡ ㅡ "can be used. 0, 0%, 0%, 0.02%, 0.001%, 0%, and 0%, respectively, when "ㅎ", "ㅑ", "ㅜ" And 0.563%, 0.02%, 0.4%, and 0.094%, respectively, when "ㅎ", "ㅑ", "ㅜ" and "ㅠ" It is a negligible level that can be ignored except for the case where "ㅎ" comes from the "ㄱ" next consonant. The application of the basic iterative selection method is as follows.

→ 갛 →

→

ㆍ(or 가ㅎㆍ) →

ㆍㆍ(or 갸ㅎㆍㆍ)→ → → →

→ →

→

ㆍ (or gah ㆍ) →

ㆍ ㆍ ㆍ ㆍ (ㆍ)

→

→

→

ㆍ(or 규ㅎㆍ) →

ㆍㆍ(or 규ㅎㆍㆍ)→ → → → → → → Kyu →

→

→

→

ㆍ (or ㆍ ㆍ) →

ㆍ ㆍ (or ㆍ ㆍ ㆍ ㆍ)

"을 입력하고 싶었다면, 상기 "갸" 다음에 "ㆍ"버튼의 연속누름을 종료해 주는 수단(예. 우측이동버튼 또는 스페이스버튼 등등. 이하 대표하여 "우이동버튼"으로 표현)을 누른 후, "ㆍ"버튼 3번 누름으로써 "

"을 입력하도록 할 수 있다. 또는 타이머에 의하여 "갸" 입력후 일정시간(예. 0.2초)이 경과하면 "ㆍ"버튼 연속누름에 의한 처리가 종료되는 것으로 하여, "갸" 다음 0.2초 경과후 "ㆍ"버튼 3번 눌러짐으로 "

"을 입력할 수 있다. 상기 "갛" 상태에서 "가호"를 입력하기 위하여 "ㆍ"버튼을 한번 더 누르면 "

"이 되는데, 이 경우도 "갛" 상태에서 상기 우이동버튼 또는 상기 타이머에 의하여 "갛"을 확정한 상태에서 "ㆍ"버튼과 "ㅡ"버튼을 순차적으로 눌러 "가호"를 입력할 수 있다. There may be ambiguity in the case where the input value inputted subsequent to the input of the case is the "ㆍ" button (for example, "symbol = garch"). However, when the neutral vowels "ㅑ", "ㅠ", followed by "ㅎ" and the consonant consonant "ㅎ" appear, they are negligible as 0.001%, 0%, 0.02% and 0.094% respectively. As described above, when the " ㆍ " button is pressed continuously, there may be ambiguity,

(E.g., a right movement button or a space button, hereinafter referred to as a " wipe button &quot;) to terminate the continuous pressing of the ""ㆍ" By pressing the button 3 times "

Or 0.2 seconds elapses after inputting "" by the timer, it is assumed that the processing by the "ㆍ" button is terminated and "0.2" seconds elapse after " Press the "ㆍ" button 3 times to "

Quot ;, "" button is pressed again to input "

In this case, in the state in which "red" is confirmed by the scroll button or the timer in the "red" state, "?" Can be inputted by sequentially pressing the "?" Button and the "?

In the past, when the wiggle button is depressed in the " Gyre " state, " Gyro " is confirmed, and again the " ㆍ " button is pressed three times and " , "Ghahha" has become. However, in the above example, the function of cutting the automata by continuous pressing of the " ㆍ " (Eg, "red" or "red") can be completely confirmed by pressing the above-mentioned push button twice or by a predetermined time (for example, the above 0.2 second is 0.3 second ) Can be processed as elapsed. That is, if there is ambiguity due to the "ㆍ" button, the tokens of the "ㆍ" button continuous push with the primary means (eg push button 1 time or 0.2 second timer) It can be treated as being cut off and the letter input by the secondary (eg, pushing the woofer button one more time or a timer greater than 0.2 seconds) is confirmed. This can be applied equally to the following cases.

Another way is to end the consecutive depressed token of the "ㆍ" button for consonant input when the delete button is pressed during the continuous pressing of the "ㆍ" button (to initialize the consecutive depressing logic of the "ㆍ" button for consonant input) . In the case of vowel input, it can operate in the same way as before. For example, if the Delete button is pressed in the "red" state, the per-key or per-cognitive unit (described below) "he" is deleted and becomes "a". Since the delete button has been pressed once, the continuous pressing process of the conventional "ㆍ" button has been terminated, and when the "ㆍ" button is pressed again three times in this state, it becomes "red". This also applies to the following examples. The advantage of this method is that when the user desires to output a character, the user can modify the character by pressing the delete button. The advantage is that the desired character can be input rather than reappearing the undesired character according to the logic before pressing the delete button.

Also, since there is almost no consonant (consonant or consonant consonant) after "ㅑ" and "ㅠ", the modified automata can be applied as follows.

→ 갛 → 갛ㆍ(or 가ㅎㆍ) → 갛ㆍㆍ(or 가ㅎㆍㆍ) →

ㆍㆍ(or 갸ㅎㆍㆍ)→ → → →

→ ㆍ · · · · · · (· · ·) → →

ㆍ ㆍ ㆍ ㆍ (ㆍ)

→

→

ㆍ(or 구ㅎㆍ) →

ㆍㆍ(or 구ㅎㆍㆍ) →

ㆍㆍ(or 규ㅎㆍㆍ)→ → → → → → → Kyu →

→

→

ㆍ ㆍ

ㆍ ㆍ ㆍ ㆍ (ㆍ) ㆍ →

ㆍ ㆍ (or ㆍ ㆍ ㆍ ㆍ)

And a technique of inputting a vowel "a" by pressing the "" "button once in the prior art. In addition, a technique of inputting "ㅓ" by pressing the "" "button twice has been proposed. This is done by using buttons that can associate a vowel "a" (eg a "a" button or a button with a combination of "a" and "0" in place of the "ㆍ" . Hereinafter, the " ㆍ " In this case, one of the cases where the basic iterative selection method is applied is as follows. The lower right arrow (→) is also expressed including the pressing of the "ㆍ" button.

← → go → go → go → red → go

The above example shows that the input of the " ㆍ " button is processed to make the Korean syllable at the maximum, so that the input of " he " in " red ", " . When the "" "and" 그 "are followed by the" "" button, the modified automata can be applied as shown above.

→ 갛 → 가하 → 가허 → 갸허→ go → go → go →

Gat inflicting → → → → gaheo gyaheo

→

→ 구하 → 구허 → 규허→ → → → → → →

→

Guheo → → → save gyuheo

Here, "red" (or "including") can use the technique described in "A → A → B → A → A → B". In the case of "a", which is frequently used vocabulary more than 22%, you can input it by pressing "" "button 1 times, but there are not many users to input with 2 와 like" ㅣ ㆍ ". Therefore, the following transformation automata can be applied.

→ 기하 → 기허 → 가허 → 갸허→ go → go → go →

→ geometry → license → → →

If the user intends to input the " affirmation ", the user presses the delete button once in the state of " You can enter "G" by typing "ㅗ". As described above, by pressing the delete button, the continuous input processing logic of the " ㆍ " button for inputting the dropout consonant (e.g., " In the state of " released ", when the deletion button is pressed, it is possible to refer to the " improvement of deletion button processing " shown below. If the user intends to input a " symbol ", the word " symbol " can be entered by pressing the " - "

30. Improved Delete Button Handling

30.1 Process Delete Button Based on "Cognitive Unit"

At present, the keypad input technology is mainly applied to the delete (cancel) logic on a per-key basis. For example, if you press the "Delete" button with "E" entered, it will be "ㅇ". On the keyboard, it is natural that the last entered "ㅔ" is deleted and "ㅇ" is entered because the "ㅔ" button is pressed once when "ㅔ" is input. However, in the keypad including the drawing 4- *, "ㅔ" is inputted in combination with "ㅓ + ㅣ = ㅣ l ㅣ". For convenience, the process of inputting "E" as a vowel input method currently applied by Samsung Electronics is as follows. Right arrows indicate that "ㆍ", "ㅣ", "ㅣ" are pressed, respectively.

ㅇ → ㅇ ㆍ → え → →

The user recognizes and inputs "ㅓ + ㅣ". Therefore, deletion logic can be applied to perceptual unit. If the deletion button is pressed in the state in which the above-mentioned "E" is inputted, "ㅣ" recognized as the final input is deleted and becomes "æ". If " a " is pressed in the above-mentioned state, it will become " billion ".

In sum, the deletion logic is applied to the "cognitive unit" in which the non-cognitive units are combined. In some other cases, if you enter "K", you will see that you typed "K" as "K + L". If you press the delete button once in "K" state, "And once again, it becomes" ㅇ ". If the delete button is pressed in the " A " state, it may be questioned whether it is " to ". However, the unit recognized by the user is "a", and "⋅" in "⋅ ㆍ" is not an independent cognitive unit.

As a representative example, the case of deletion by cognitive unit when the vowel input method of Samsung Electronics is applied is as follows, and it can be similarly applied to other examples of inputting a vowel on the keypad. For example, the technique of inputting "a" with the "ㆍ" button can be similarly applied. The ten basic vowels "a", "ㅑ", "ㅓ", "ㅕ", "ㅗ", "ㅛ", "ㅜ", "ㅠ", "ㅡ" It is deleted by pressing the delete button once. For the sake of simplicity, only one is indicated when the operation is the same as that of the existing two-round keyboard. The right arrow (→) below means that the delete button is pressed, and the same is true for the following cases.

ㅔ → ㅓ → All deleted

ㅐ → a → all deleted

Removed → all

ㅓ → All deleted

. . .

ㅝ → ㅜ → All deleted (same with existing two-axed keyboard)

ㅞ → ㅝ → ㅜ → All deleted

ㅒ → ㅑ → All deleted

ㅙ → ㅘ → ㅗ → All deleted

Typical cognitive units in keypad Korean input may include the following. "ㅔ" is mainly entered as a combination of "ㅓ" and "ㅣ". Thus "ㅓ" and "ㅣ" can be separate cognitive units. "ㅐ" is mainly entered as a combination of "a" and "ㅣ". Thus, "a" and "l" can be separate cognitive units. "ㅙ" is also entered as a combination of "ㅗ", "a", "ㅣ", so each can be a separate cognitive unit. "ㅞ" is also input as a combination of "ㅜ", "ㅓ", "ㅣ", so each can be a separate cognitive unit.

30.2 Recombination of the completed characters after pressing the Delete button

There is also another application for delete logic by depressing the delete button. The following is the case of the 2-bean style Hangul automata on PC. The right arrow (→) contains the Delete button pressed, and is the same in the following examples.

Gana → Gana → Gana → Gana → Gana → Gana → Gana → Gana → Gana → Gana → Gana → Gana . .

The following is an example of a modified automata applied to smart phones.

Gana → Ganug → Gana → Go → Go → A

The characteristic is that when the neutral vowel is deleted and only the leading consonant is left, it can be combined with the consonant consonant of the preceding letter if it can become the consonant consonant of the preceding letter. In a similar example, when the delete button is pressed once in "maneuver", it becomes "갉". When it becomes "liver", when "a" is pressed, it becomes "a liver", and when "ㅣ" is pressed, it becomes "go." This can be one of the factors that gives flexibility to typos correction. However, when the user presses the delete button in the "alphabet" to psychologically "expect" to be "cana", becoming "grainy" can be a confusing factor. If the user wanted to enter "grainy", simply press the delete button once and immediately enter "da". However, if you want to change it to "Cana de", you may be embarrassed because it becomes "grainy" which is different from the expectation.

Thus presenting an intermediate form. For example:

Ganora → Gano → Gano → Gan → Gai → A

The deletion button is characterized in that the input token is not interrupted and the letters can be reassembled even if the last input character is deleted by the successive depressing. When the neutral vowel is deleted, the leading consonant is not combined with the consonant consonant of the preceding letter will be. At the same time, when the deletion button is pressed and the newly pressed button press can be combined with the remaining characters, they are combined. For example, when the user presses "o" in the "Gano" state, it becomes "Ganon." This will provide less flexibility to the user and flexibility in using the delete button.

.

Claims (1)

A method for deleting an input Korean alphabet in a keypad having a plurality of buttons, wherein the buttons are arranged or associated with one or more alphabets,
In response to the depression of the delete button, the unit which the user can recognize
A, ㅑ, ㅓ, ㅕ, ㅗ, ㅛ, ㅜ, ㅠ, ㅡ, ㅣ
The deletion operation is performed as a basic unit of deletion of 10 Korean vowels of &quot;
When a deletion button is pressed in a state in which a collection of ten vowels combined is input, a deletion operation is performed in units of the above ten vowels in response to depression of the delete button once
To delete Korean alphabet using keypad

Images